Engine Control System: Modification Notice

GI
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

MA
MODIFICATION NOTICE:
SECTION EC EM
LC
I Wiring diagrams have been modified.

I TB48DE engine models have been applied to Europe.
I TD42Ti engine models have been applied to Australia. FE
CL
CONTENTS
MT
TB45E TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL INDEX FOR DTC ...........................................................41 AT
SYSTEM...........................................................................9 Alphabetical Index .....................................................41
Circuit Diagram ............................................................9 DTC No. Index...........................................................44
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY..........10 PRECAUTIONS .............................................................47 TF
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit....................10 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ″CAMSHAFT POSI (SRS) ″AIR BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT
SEN″ (DTC 11)...............................................................14 PRE-TENSIONER″ ....................................................47
PD
Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) ...........................14 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ″OVER HEAT″ (DTC and A/T ......................................................................47 FA
28) ..................................................................................19 Precaution..................................................................48
Cooling Fan Control (Overheat) ................................19 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...................51
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE PREPARATION..............................................................52 RA
ITEMS.............................................................................27 Special Service Tools ................................................52
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) ....................................27 Commercial Service Tools .........................................52
Fuel Pump .................................................................29 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................54 BR
IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve ........................................32 System Diagram ........................................................54
Vacuum Hose Drawing ..............................................55 ST
TB45S System Chart .............................................................56
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .......................56
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL Electronic Ignition (EI) System ..................................59 RS
SYSTEM.........................................................................33 Air Conditioning Cut Control......................................60
Circuit Diagram ..........................................................33 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine
CARBURETOR ..............................................................35 Speed) .......................................................................60 BT
Fuel Level ..................................................................35 CAN Communication .................................................61
ISC-FI Pot ..................................................................35 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ...................................62
COOLING FAN MOTOR ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT ........36 HA
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check ......................62
Wiring Diagram - COOL/F -.......................................36 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning.........63
Inspection...................................................................37
Electrical Components Inspection .............................37
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ...................63 EL
Idle Air Volume Learning ...........................................63
Fuel Pressure Check .................................................66
TB48DE A/T Injector Removal and Installation ..............................68 SE
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ................69
SYSTEM.........................................................................39 Introduction ................................................................69
Two Trip Detection Logic ...........................................69
IDX
Circuit Diagram ..........................................................39
EC-1
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Emission-related Diagnostic Information ...................70 Description ...............................................................165
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System) ..............................82 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Malfunction Indicator (MI) ..........................................83 Mode ........................................................................165
OBD System Operation Chart ...................................86 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................165
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.................................................91 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................165
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ..................................91 Wiring Diagram ........................................................167
DTC Inspection Priority Chart....................................96 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................170
Fail-safe Chart ...........................................................97 Component Inspection.............................................172
Basic Inspection.........................................................98 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR.............................173
Symptom Matrix Chart.............................................103 Component Description ...........................................173
Engine Control Component Parts Location.............106 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Circuit Diagram ........................................................110 Mode ........................................................................173
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout..............112 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................173
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................112 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................173
CONSULT-II Function ..............................................122 Wiring Diagram ........................................................175
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function .........................134 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................176
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Component Inspection.............................................179
Mode ........................................................................136 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ...............................180
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Component Description ...........................................180
Mode ........................................................................139 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................180
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE ..141 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................180
Description ...............................................................141 Wiring Diagram ........................................................182
Testing condition ......................................................141 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................183
Inspection Procedure...............................................141 Component Inspection.............................................184
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................142 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR..............................185
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT Component Description ...........................................185
INCIDENT.....................................................................145 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................185
Description ...............................................................145 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................186
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................145 Wiring Diagram ........................................................187
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM .......................146 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................188
Wiring Diagram ........................................................146 Component Inspection.............................................189
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................149 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR................................190
Component Inspection.............................................153 Component Description ...........................................190
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE................154 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Description ...............................................................154 Mode ........................................................................190
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................154 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................190
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................154 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................191
Wiring Diagram ........................................................155 Wiring Diagram ........................................................192
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................156 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................193
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 Component Inspection.............................................195
HEATER .......................................................................157 DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1 .........................................196
Description ...............................................................157 Component Description ...........................................196
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................157 Mode ........................................................................196
Component Inspection.............................................164 Component Inspection.............................................203
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1 .........................................205
HEATER .......................................................................165 Component Description ...........................................205
EC-2
CONTENTS (Cont’d) GI
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode ........................................................................205 Mode ........................................................................268 MA
Overall Function Check ...........................................207 Wiring Diagram ........................................................270
EM
Wiring Diagram ........................................................208 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................271
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................211 Component Inspection.............................................273 LC
Component Inspection.............................................216 DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER
DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1 .........................................218 MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE ..................274
Component Description ...........................................218 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................274
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................274
Mode ........................................................................218 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................275
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................218 DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS.......................280 FE
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................219 Component Description ...........................................280
Overall Function Check ...........................................219 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................280
CL
Wiring Diagram ........................................................221 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................280
Component Inspection.............................................226 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................282 MT
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 .........................................228 Component Inspection.............................................283
Component Description ...........................................228 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (OBD)..............................284
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Component Description ...........................................284 AT
Mode ........................................................................228 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................228 Mode ........................................................................284
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................229 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................284
TF
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................233 Wiring Diagram ........................................................286 PD
Component Inspection.............................................236 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................287
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 .........................................238 Component Inspection.............................................289
Component Description ...........................................238 DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) FA
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor SENSOR ......................................................................290
Mode ........................................................................238 Component Description ...........................................290
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................238 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................290 RA
Overall Function Check ...........................................240 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................291 BR
Component Inspection.............................................248 Component Inspection.............................................295 ST
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST
FUNCTION ...................................................................251 FUNCTION ...................................................................297
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................251 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................297 RS
Wiring Diagram ........................................................253 Overall Function Check ...........................................298
BT
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE
FUNCTION ...................................................................260 VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...................302 HA
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................260 Description ...............................................................302
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................260 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Wiring Diagram ........................................................262 Mode ........................................................................302 EL
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................264 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................302
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR................................268 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................303
Component Description ...........................................268 Wiring Diagram ........................................................304
SE
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................306
IDX
EC-3
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Component Inspection.............................................308 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................334
DTC P0500 VSS ..........................................................309 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................334
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................309 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................336
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................309 Component Inspection.............................................341
Overall Function Check ...........................................310 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................310 MOTOR RELAY ...........................................................342
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR..........................................311 Component Description ...........................................342
Component Description ...........................................311 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................342
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................311 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................342
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................311 Wiring Diagram ........................................................344
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................313 Component Inspection.............................................347
Component Inspection.............................................315 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR.............348
DTC P0605 ECM .........................................................316 Component Description ...........................................348
DTC P0650 MI .............................................................319 Component Inspection.............................................352
Component Description ...........................................319 DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1 .........................................353
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................319 Component Description ...........................................353
Wiring Diagram ........................................................320 Mode ........................................................................353
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................321 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................353
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY ...........................323 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................354
Component Description ...........................................323 Overall Function Check ...........................................355
Wiring Diagram ........................................................324 DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1 .........................................360
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................325 Component Description ...........................................360
DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.........327 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Description ...............................................................327 Mode ........................................................................360
Operation .................................................................327 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................360
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................361
Mode ........................................................................328 Overall Function Check ...........................................362
Wiring Diagram ........................................................329 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 .........................................368
Component Inspection.............................................331 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL Mode ........................................................................368
ACTUATOR..................................................................332 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................368
Component Description ...........................................332 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................369
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................332 Overall Function Check ...........................................370
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL Component Inspection.............................................378
FUNCTION ...................................................................334 DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 .........................................381
Description ...............................................................334 Component Description ...........................................381
EC-4
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH .....................................428
Mode ........................................................................381 Description ...............................................................428 MA
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................381 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................382 Mode ........................................................................428
Overall Function Check ...........................................383 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................428
EM
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................388 Wiring Diagram ........................................................429 LC
Component Inspection.............................................391 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................430
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE Component Inspection.............................................432
(OVERHEAT) ...............................................................394 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR .............................434
System Description..................................................394 Component Description ...........................................434
Operation .................................................................394 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
CONSULT-II Reference Value In Data Monitor Mode ........................................................................434 FE
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................395 DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................435
CL
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................395 Wiring Diagram ........................................................436
Overall Function Check ...........................................396 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................438
Wiring Diagram ........................................................397 Component Inspection.............................................440 MT
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................398 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR .............................441
Main 12 Causes of Overheating..............................403 Component Description ...........................................441
Component Inspection.............................................404 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor AT
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR ............................................405 Mode ........................................................................441
TF
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................406 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................444 PD
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR ............................................407 Component Inspection.............................................447
Component Description ...........................................407 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR ............................................448
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................407 Component Description ...........................................448 FA
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................408 Mode ........................................................................448
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ....................409 On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................448 RA
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................409 Wiring Diagram ........................................................450 BR
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................411 Component Inspection.............................................453
DTC P1336 CKP SENSOR (OBD)..............................414 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR..........................................454 ST
Component Description ...........................................414 Component Description ...........................................454
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................414 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................415 Mode ........................................................................454 RS
BT
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH...........................................421 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................458
Component Description ...........................................421 Component Inspection.............................................460 HA
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor IGNITION SIGNAL.......................................................461
Mode ........................................................................421 Component Description ...........................................461
On Board Diagnosis Logic.......................................421 Wiring Diagram ........................................................462 EL
DTC Confirmation Procedure ..................................421 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................468
Overall Function Check ...........................................422 Component Inspection.............................................474
Wiring Diagram ........................................................423 SNOW MODE SWITCH ...............................................475
SE
IDX
EC-5
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................475 Mass Air Flow Sensor..............................................516
Wiring Diagram ........................................................476 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ......................516
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................477 Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 ........................................516
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 ........................................516
(VIAS)...........................................................................479 Fuel Pump ...............................................................516
Description ...............................................................479 EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................480 Valve ........................................................................517
Wiring Diagram ........................................................481 Injector .....................................................................517
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................482 Ignition Coil with Power Transistor ..........................517
START SIGNAL ...........................................................483 Condenser ...............................................................517
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Throttle Control Motor..............................................517
Mode ........................................................................483
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................483 TD
Wiring Diagram ........................................................484
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................485 QUICK-GLOW SYSTEM..............................................518
INJECTOR CIRCUIT....................................................486 Circuit Diagram ........................................................518
Component Description ...........................................486 Wiring Diagram ........................................................520
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor ENGINE ROOM FAN MOTOR ELECTRICAL
Mode ........................................................................486 CIRCUIT .......................................................................523
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................488 Electrical Components Inspection ...........................524
Component Inspection.............................................491
FUEL PUMP.................................................................492 ZD30DDTi
System Description..................................................492 ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL
Component Description ...........................................492 SYSTEM.......................................................................526
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Circuit Diagram ........................................................526
Mode ........................................................................492 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY........527
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................493 Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit..................527
Wiring Diagram ........................................................494 DTC 0102 MASS AIR FLOW SEN..............................528
Component Inspection.............................................497 DTC 0104 VEHICLE SPEED SEN ..............................529
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ......................498 Wiring Diagram ........................................................529
Component Description ...........................................498 DTC 0208 OVER HEAT...............................................530
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL.....................................503 Component Inspection.............................................537
Description ...............................................................503 Main 12 Causes of Overheating..............................538
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor DTC 0402 P9⋅FUEL TEMP SEN .................................539
Mode ........................................................................503 Wiring Diagram ........................................................539
Wiring Diagram ........................................................504 DTC 0403 ACCEL POS SENSOR ..............................540
DATA LINK CONNECTORS........................................510 DTC 0902 ECM RLY....................................................542
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM .........................511 DTC 1003 EGR VOLUME CONT/V.............................543
Component Inspection.............................................513 MI (MIL) & DATA LINK CONNECTORS .....................544
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION....................514 Wiring Diagram ........................................................544
Description ...............................................................514
Component Inspection.............................................514
TD42Ti
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ........516
Fuel Pressure Regulator..........................................516 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX ................................545
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing................................516 Alphabetical & Numerical Index for DTC ................545
EC-6
PRECAUTION..............................................................546 Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit..................602
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ″COOLANT TEMP MA
BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″...........546 SEN″ (DTC 0103) ........................................................610
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ...........610
System of Engine ....................................................546 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ″F/INJ TIMG F/B″
EM
PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION........................547 (DTC 0201)...................................................................615
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System ................547 Injection Timing Control Valve .................................615 LC
Precautions ..............................................................548 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ″ECM 2″ (DTC 0301) ..621
Special Service Tools ..............................................550 Engine Control Module (ECM) ................................621
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ″NEEDLE LIFT SEN″
SYSTEM.......................................................................552 (DTC 0304)...................................................................623
Engine Component Parts Location..........................552 Needle Lift Sensor (NLS) ........................................623
Circuit Diagram ........................................................555 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ″INTAIR TEMP SEN″ FE
System Diagram ......................................................557 (DTC 0401)...................................................................629
Vacuum Hose Drawing ............................................558 Intake Air Temperature Sensor................................629
CL
System Chart ...........................................................559 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ″ACCEL POS
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SENSOR″ (DTC 0403).................................................635
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................................560 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor..........................635 MT
Fuel Injection Timing Control System......................560 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ″CRANK POS SEN
Air Conditioning Cut Control....................................561 (TDC)″ (DTC 0407) ......................................................641
Positive Crankcase Ventilation ................................562 Crankshaft Position Sensor (TDC) ..........................641 AT
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE .................................563 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ″ECM 10″ (DTC
Injection Pump .........................................................563 0802) ............................................................................647
Injection Nozzle .......................................................567 Engine Control Module (ECM) ................................647
TF
Fuel System Check .................................................572 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ″ECM 11″ (DTC
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM 0804) ............................................................................649 PD
DESCRIPTION .............................................................573 Engine Control Module (ECM) ................................649
DTC and MIL Detection Logic .................................573 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR NON-DETECTABLE
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ..............................573 ITEMS...........................................................................651 FA
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)............................574 Glow Control System...............................................651
CONSULT-II .............................................................579 Cooling Fan .............................................................658
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - Introduction ......................585 EGRC-Solenoid Valve and Throttle Control RA
Introduction ..............................................................585 Solenoid Valve A, B .................................................664
Diagnostic Worksheet..............................................586 Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) ..................................671 BR
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - Work Flow.........................587 Start Signal ..............................................................675
Work Flow................................................................587 Park/Neutral Position Switch ...................................678
Description for Work Flow .......................................588 Fuel Cut System ......................................................682 ST
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - Basic Inspection ..............589 Fast Idle Control Circuit...........................................684
Basic Inspection.......................................................589 MIL & Data Link Connectors ...................................687
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - General Description.........591 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ........689 RS
Symptom Matrix Chart.............................................591 General Specifications.............................................689
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Injection Nozzle .......................................................689
Mode ........................................................................594 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ......................689
BT
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Crankshaft Position Sensor (TDC) ..........................689
Mode ........................................................................595 Glow Plug ................................................................689 HA
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................596 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor..........................689
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY........602 Injection Timing Control Valve .................................689
EL
SE
IDX
EC-7
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
When you read wiring diagrams:

I Read GI section, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”.
I See EL section, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” for power distribution circuit.
When you perform trouble diagnoses, read GI section, “HOW TO FOLLOW FLOW CHART IN
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES” and “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL
INCIDENT”.
EC-8
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM TB45E
Circuit Diagram GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC345M
EC-9
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY TB45E
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit
TEC300M
EC-10
(Cont’d) GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC359
EC-11
(Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
H
No
Start engine. E CHECK POWER SUP-
Is engine running? PLY-I.
1. Turn ignition switch
Yes “ON”.
2. Check voltage between
ECM terminal q 45 (With
NATS) or q 57 (Without
SEC504D
NATS) and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery volt-
age
If NG, check the following.
I Harness connectors
E127 , M21
M50 , F5
I Harness for open or
short between ECM and
ignition switch
If NG, repair harness or
connectors.
SEF294S OK
H
Go to “CHECK GROUND
CIRCUIT” on next page.
H
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY-II. E Check the following.
1. Stop engine. I Harness connectors
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal E127 , M21
q58 and ground with CONSULT-II or I Harness connectors
tester. M52 , F7
Voltage: Battery voltage I 7.5A fuse
OK short between ECM and
battery
SEF554V If NG, repair harness or
connectors.
H
OK
CHECK POWER SUPPLY-III. E Go to “CHECK GROUND
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and then turn CIRCUIT” on next page.
“OFF”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals
q49 , q
59 , 109 and ground with CON-
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Case-1: Battery voltage does
After turning ignition switch “OFF”, not exist.
battery voltage will exist for a few Case-2: Battery voltage exists
seconds, then drop to approximately for more than a few
0V. seconds.
SEF513VA
NG
Case-2
Case-1 E Go to “CHECK ECM
RELAY” on next page.
H
q
A
SEF555V
EC-12
(Cont’d) GI
q
A
H
MA
NG
CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY E Check the following.
BETWEEN ECM RELAY AND ECM. I Harness connectors
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. M52 , F7 EM
2. Disconnect ECM relay. I Harness for open or
3. Check harness continuity between ECM short between ECM and
terminals q
49 , q
59 , 109 and terminal q
5 . ECM relay
Continuity should exist. If NG, repair open circuit, LC
If OK, check harness for short to short to ground or short to
SEF073U ground and short to power. power in harness or con-
nectors.
OK
H
NG
CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN ECM E Check the following.
RELAY AND GROUND. I Harness connectors FE
Check voltage between terminals q
1 ,q 3 E127 , M21
and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. I 7.5A fuse
Voltage: Battery voltage I Harness for open or
short between ECM relay CL
OK and battery
connectors.
MT
H
NG
SEF556V CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. E Check the following.
Check harness continuity between ECM I Harness connectors AT
terminal q
16 and relay terminal q2 . M52 , F7
Continuity should exist. I Harness for open or
If OK, check harness for short to ground short between ECM and
and short to power. ECM relay TF
If NG, repair open circuit,
OK short to ground or short to
power in harness or con-
nectors. PD
H
NG
CHECK ECM RELAY. E Replace ECM relay. FA
1. Apply 12V direct current between relay
terminals q
1 and q 2 .
2. Check continuity between relay termi-
SEF090M
nals q
3 and q 5 . RA
12V (q1 -q 2 ) applied:
Continuity exists.
No voltage applied:
No continuity BR
OK
H
NG ST
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. E Repair open circuit, short
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. to ground or short to power
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground in harness or connectors.
screws. RS
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM
terminals q10 , q
20 , q
50 , q
60 , 107 , 108 ,
SEF299S 116 and engine ground. BT
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power.
HA
OK
H
Check ECM pin terminals for damage and
check the connection of ECM harness EL
connector.
H SE
INSPECTION END
IDX
EC-13
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR “CAMSHAFT POSI SEN” (DTC 11) TB45E
Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS)

ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values, and are measured between each terminal and ground with a voltmeter.
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
Approximately 0.3 - 0.6V★
Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)
Idle speed
41
51
(With
NATS) SEF542V
Camshaft position sensor
42 L
(REF) (120° signal) Approximately 0.4 - 0.5V★
52
(With-
out
NATS)
Engine is running.
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
SEF543V
Approximately 2.6 - 2.7V★
Idle speed
42
(With
NATS) SEF544V
51 B/W
(POS) (1° signal) Approximately 2.5 - 2.6V★
(With-
out
NATS)
Engine is running.
SEF548T
★: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
EC-14
Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC301M
EC-15
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
INSPECTION START
H
CHECK STARTING SYSTEM. No Check starting system.
E
Does the engine turn over? (Refer to EL section.)
(Does the starter motor operate?)
Yes
H
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
SEF558V
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground
screws.
OK
H
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. NG Check the following.
E
1. Disconnect camshaft position sensor I Harness connectors
harness connector. M52 , F7
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. I Harness for open or short
3. Check voltage between terminal q7 and between camshaft posi-
ground with CONSULT-II or tester. tion sensor and ECM
Voltage: Battery voltage I Harness for open or short
SEF557V
between camshaft posi-
OK
tion sensor and ECM
relay
connectors.
H
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit, short to
E
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. ground or short to power in
2. Check harness continuity between termi- harness or connectors.
nal q
8 and engine ground.
SEF559V
If OK, check harness for short to ground
and short to power.
OK
H
q
A
SEF560V
EC-16
q
A GI
H
NG
MA
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. Repair open circuit, short to
E
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. harness or connectors.
3. Check harness continuity between termi-
EM
nal q
6 and ECM terminals q 42 (With
NATS) or q 51 (Without NATS), terminal
q5 and ECM terminals q 4 ,q 51 (Without LC
NATS) or q 42 , q
52 (Without NATS).
and short to power.
OK
H FE
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace camshaft position
E
(Camshaft position sensor). sensor.
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” CL
below.
OK
H
MT
CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT. NG Check the following.
E
SEC511D 1. Remove joint connector-6 F26 . I Joint connector-6 F26
2. Check the following. I Joint connector-5 F25 AT
I Continuity between joint connector ter- I Harness for open or short
minal q1 and ground between joint connector-6
I Joint connector and engine ground TF
(Refer to “HARNESS LAYOUT” in EL If NG, repair harness or
section.) connectors.
Continuity should exist. PD
and short to power. Then reconnect joint
connector. FA
OK
H
Disconnect and reconnect harness connec- RA
tors in the circuit. Then retest.
Trouble is not fixed.

H BR
check the connection of ECM harness con-
nector. Reconnect ECM harness connector ST
and retest.
H RS
INSPECTION END
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-17
COMPONENT INSPECTION
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals q 41 , q
51 , q
42 (With NATS)
42 , q
or q 52 , q
51 (Without NATS) and ground with DC range.
Condition Terminals Voltage

q
41 , q
51 and ground
(With NATS) Approximately
SEC512D q
42 , q
52 and ground 0.3 - 0.6V*
(Without NATS)
Engine running at idle
q
42 and ground
(With NATS) Approximately
q
51 and ground 2.6 - 2.7V*
(Without NATS)
*: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by
oscilloscope.) (Refer to EC-14.)
If NG, replace distributor assembly with camshaft position sen-

sor.
3. Visually check signal plate for damage or dust.
SEF001S After this inspection, DTC 11 might be displayed with camshaft
position sensor functioning properly. Erase the stored
memory.
EC-18
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR “OVER HEAT” (DTC 28) TB45E
Cooling Fan Control (Overheat) GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC346M
EC-19
Cooling Fan Control (Overheat) (Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
H
CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-1 NG Check cooling fan motor-1
E
OPERATION. control circuit.
1. Disconnect cooling fan relay-2. (Go to PROCEDURE A .)
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3. Perform “COOLING FAN” in
SEF574V “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Disconnect engine coolant tem-
perature sensor harness connec-
tor.
3. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine
coolant temperature sensor har-
ness connector.
4. Start engine.
5. Make sure that cooling fan
motor-1 operates.
SEF784Z
Be careful not to overheat
engine.
OK
H
CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-2 NG Check cooling fan motor-2
E
OPERATION. control circuit.
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. (Go to PROCEDURE B .)
2. Reconnect cooling fan relay-2.
“ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
SEF785T
5. Make sure that cooling fan
motor-1 and 2 operate.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Restart engine and make sure
that cooling fan motor-1 and 2
operate.
Be careful not to overheat
engine.
OK
H
q
A
SEF785Z
SEF785T
EC-20
q
A GI
H MA
CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK. NG Check the following for
E
Apply pressure to the cooling system with leak.
a tester, and check if the pressure drops. I Hose EM
Testing pressure: I Radiator
98 kPa (0.98 bar, 1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi) I Water pump
Pressure should not drop. Refer to LC section (“Water LC
CAUTION: Pump”).
SLC754AA Higher than the specified pressure may
cause radiator damage.
OK
H FE
CHECK RADIATOR CAP. NG Replace radiator cap.
E
Apply pressure to cap with a tester.
Radiator cap relief pressure: CL
59 - 127 kPa (0.59 - 1.27 bar, 0.6 - 1.3
kg/cm2, 9 - 18 psi)
OK MT
H
SLC755AA
CHECK THERMOSTAT. NG
E
Replace thermostat. AT
1. Check valve seating condition at normal
room temperatures.
It should seat tightly. TF
2. Check valve opening temperature and
valve lift.
3. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) PD
below valve opening temperature.
For details, refer to “Thermostat”, “ENGINE
COOLING SYSTEM”, TB engine in LC FA
section.
OK
SLC343
H RA
Check engine coolant temperature sensor. NG Replace engine coolant
E
Refer to “Engine Coolant Temperature temperature sensor.
Sensor (ECTS)”, “COMPONENT INSPEC- BR
TION” in EC section.
OK
H
ST
If the cause cannot be isolated, go to
“MAIN 12 CAUSES OF OVERHEATING”,
EC-25.
RS
H BT
INSPECTION END
Perform FINAL CHECK by the following procedure after repair HA

is completed.
1. Warm up engine. Run the vehicle for at least 20 minutes. Pay
attention to engine coolant temperature gauge on the instrument EL
panel. If the reading shows an abnormally high temperature,
another part may be malfunctioning.
2. Stop vehicle and let engine idle. Check the intake and exhaust SE
systems for leaks by listening for noise or visually inspecting the
components.
3. Allow engine to cool and visually check for oil and coolant leaks. IDX
Then, perform “OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK”.
EC-21
Procedure A
INSPECTION START
H
E
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. I 20A fuse
2. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1. I 40A fusible link
4. Check voltage between terminals q
1 , between cooling fan
SEF574V q3 ,q6 and ground with CONSULT-II or relay-1 and fuse
tester. I Harness for open or short
Voltage: Battery voltage between cooling fan
relay-1 and battery
OK
connectors.
H
E
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness harness or connectors.
connector.
3. Check harness continuity between
PBIB0951E relay terminal q
5 and cooling fan
motor-1 terminal q1 , relay terminal
q7 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal
q3 .
cooling fan motor-1 terminals q 2 ,
q4 and ground.
SEC505D ground and short to power.
OK
H
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG Check the following.
E
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. I Harness connectors
2. Check harness continuity between ECM E127 , M21
terminal q19 and cooling fan relay-1 ter- I Harness connectors
minal q1 , ECM terminal q 6 and cooling M52 , F7
fan relay-1 terminal q
1 . I Diode F9
Continuity should exist. I Harness for open or short
If OK, check harness for short to ground between cooling fan
SEF641V and short to power. relay-1 and ECM
OK
short to ground or short to
nectors.
H
q
C
SEC506D
EC-22
q
C
GI
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
Replace cooling fan relay.
(Cooling fan relay-1). MA
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION”,
EC-26.
OK
H EM
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
Replace cooling fan motor.
(Cooling fan motor-1).
Refer to “Cooling Fan Control”, “COMPO-
NENT INSPECTION” EC-104 on the Ser- LC
vice Manual (Publication No. SM7E-
1Y61G1).
H
OK
Disconnect and reconnect harness connec-
FE
H
Check ECM pin terminals for damage or
the connection of ECM harness connector. CL
Reconnect ECM harness connector and
retest.
H
MT
INSPECTION END
AT
Procedure B
INSPECTION START
TF
H
NG PD
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. Check the following.
E
2. Disconnect cooling fan relay-2. I Harness continuity
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. between cooling fan
FA
4. Check voltage between cooling fan relay-2 and fuse
relay-2 terminals q1 ,q5 and ground I Harness continuity
SEF574V
with CONSULT-II or tester. between cooling fan RA
Voltage: Battery voltage relay-2 and battery
OK
connectors. BR
H
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit, short to ST
E
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-2 harness harness or connectors.
connector. RS
3. Check harness continuity between cool-
ing fan relay-2 terminal q
3 and cooling
PBIB0657E fan motor-2 terminal q1 , cooling fan BT
motor-2 terminal q 2 and body ground.
If OK, check harness for short to ground HA
and short to power.
OK
EL
H
q
D
SE
SEC534D
IDX
EC-23
q
D
H
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I. NG Check the following.
E
terminal q6 and cooling fan relay-2 ter- I Harness connectors
minal q1 . M52 , F7
If OK, check harness for short to ground between cooling fan
SEC535D and short to power. relay-2 and ECM
OK
nectors.
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace cooling fan relay.
E
(Cooling fan relay-2).
EC-26.
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENTS NG Replace cooling fan motor.
E
EC-26.
OK
H

H
Check ECM pin terminals for damage or
the connection of ECM harness connector.
retest.
H
INSPECTION END
EC-24
MAIN 12 CAUSES OF OVERHEATING GI
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page
OFF 1 I Blocked radiator I Visual No blocking — MA
I Blocked condenser
I Blocked radiator grille
I Blocked bumper EM
2 I Coolant mixture I Coolant tester 30 - 50% coolant mixture See “RECOMMENDED
FLUIDS AND LUBRI-
CANTS” in MA section.
LC
3 I Coolant level I Visual Coolant up to MAX level See “Changing Engine
in reservoir tank and Coolant”, “ENGINE MAIN-
radiator filler neck TENANCE” in MA section.
4 I Radiator cap I Pressure tester 59 - 127 kPa (0.59 - 1.27 See “System Check”,
bar, 0.6 - 1.3 kg/cm2, “ENGINE COOLING SYS- FE
9 - 18 psi) (Limit) TEM” in LC section.
ON*2 5 I Coolant leaks I Visual No leaks See “System Check”, CL
“ENGINE COOLING SYS-
TEM” in LC section.
ON*2 6 I Thermostat I Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot. See “Thermostat” and MT
lower radiator hoses “Radiator”, “ENGINE
COOLING SYSTEM” in
LC section. AT
ON*1 7 I Cooling fan I Visual Operating See “TROUBLE DIAGNO-
SIS FOR OVER HEAT TF
(DTC 28)”, EC-92 on the
Service Manual (Publica-
tion No. SM7E-1Y61G1). PD
OFF 8 I Combustion gas leak I Color checker chemical Negative —
tester 4 gas analyzer
FA
ON*3 9 I Coolant temperature I Visual Gauge less than 3/4 —
gauge when driving
I Coolant overflow to res- I Visual No overflow during driving See “Changing Engine RA
ervoir tank and idling Coolant”, “ENGINE MAIN-
TENANCE” in MA section.
OFF*4 10 I Coolant return from res- I Visual Should be initial level in See “ENGINE MAINTE-
BR
ervoir tank to radiator reservoir tank NANCE” in MA section.
OFF 11 I Cylinder head I Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- See “Inspection”, “CYLIN- ST
gauge mum distortion (warping) DER HEAD” in EM sec-
tion.
12 I Cylinder block and pis- I Visual No scuffing on cylinder See “Inspection”, “CYLIN- RS
tons walls or piston DER BLOCK” in EM sec-
tion.
BT
*1: Engine running at idle.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time. HA
For more information, refer to “OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS” in LC section.
EL
SE
IDX
EC-25
Cooling fan relay-1
Check continuity between terminals q
3 and q
5 .
Conditions Continuity
12V direct current supply between terminals q
1
Yes
and q
2
No current supply No
SEC202B
Cooling fan relay-2

3 and q
5 ,q
6 and q
7 .
12V direct current supply between terminals q
1
Yes
and q
2
SEF145X
Cooling fan motor-2

1. Disconnect cooling fan motor-2 harness connector.
2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and
check operation.
Terminals
(!) (@)
Cooling fan motor-2 q
1 q
2
SEF646V Cooling fan motor should operate.

If NG, replace cooling fan motor.
EC-26
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS TB45E
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC305M
EC-27
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
H
OK
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION. E
INSPECTION END
1. Lift up the vehicle.
2. Start engine.
3. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” signal
in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
SEF065Y
The vehicle speed on CON-
SULT-II should be able to
exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when
rotating wheels with suitable
gear position.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Rotate drive wheel by hand.
4. Check voltage between ECM
terminal q 53 and ground.
Voltage should vary between
approx. 0 - 5V.
NG
SEF588V
H
NG
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. E
Check the following.
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. I Harness connectors
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector M52 , F7
and combination meter harness con- I Joint connector-1 M79
nector. I Harness for open or
terminal q53 and terminal q
63 . combination meter
Continuity should exist. If NG, repair open circuit,
ground and short to power. power in harness or con-
nectors.
OK
H
SEC507D
NG
CHECK SPEEDOMETER FUNCTION. E
Make sure that speedometer functions I Harness for open or
properly. short between combina-
tion meter and vehicle
OK speed sensor
connectors.
I Vehicle speed sensor
and its circuit
(Refer to EL section.)
H
Disconnect and reconnect harness con-
nectors in the circuit. Then retest.

H
check the connection of ECM harness
connector. Reconnect ECM harness con-
nector and retest.
H
INSPECTION END
EC-28
Fuel Pump GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC307M
EC-29
Fuel Pump (Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
H
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION. OK INSPECTION END
E
2. Pinch fuel feed hose with fingers.
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt
on the fuel feed hose for 5 seconds
after ignition switch is turned “ON”.
SEF610V
NG
H
E
2. Disconnect fuel pump relay. I Harness for open or short
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. between fuse and fuel
1 , pump relay
q3 and ground with CONSULT-II or If NG, repair harness or
tester. connectors.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK
SEF611V H
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT-I. NG Check the following.
E
2. Disconnect fuel pump harness connec- C2 , B37
tor. I Harness for open or short
3. Check harness continuity between termi- between fuel pump and
nal q6 and body ground. body ground
nectors.
OK
H
SEF612V CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT-II. NG Check the following.
E
2. Disconnect fuel pump (fuel tank gauge M20 , B19
unit) harness connector. I Harness connectors
3. Check harness continuity between relay C2 , B37
terminal q5 and fuel pump terminal q
4 . I Harness for open or short
Continuity should exist. between fuel pump and
If OK, check harness for short to fuel pump relay
ground and short to power. If NG, repair open circuit,
OK power in harness or con-
nectors.
H
q
A
SEF479P
(Go to next page.)
SEF608V
EC-30
Fuel Pump (Cont’d)
q
A GI
H
NG
MA
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. Check the following.
E
2. Check harness continuity between ECM M52 , F7
8 (Without NATS) or q
terminal q 18 (With I Harness for open or short
EM
NATS) and terminal q2 . between ECM and fuel
Continuity should exist. pump relay
If OK, check harness for short to If NG, repair open circuit, LC
ground and short to power. short to ground or short to
SEF604V power in harness or con-
OK nectors.
H
NG Replace fuel pump relay.
CHECK COMPONENT
E
FE
(Fuel pump relay).
1. Reconnect fuel pump relay, fuel
pump harness connector and
ECM harness connector.
CL
3. Turn fuel pump relay “ON” and
“OFF” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode MT
with CONSULT-II and check
SEF605V operating sound.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- AT
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPEC-
TION” on next page.
OK TF
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace fuel pump.
E
(Fuel pump). PD
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” on
next page.
OK FA
H
SEC508D tors in the circuit. Then retest. RA
H
Check ECM pin terminals for damage and BR
nector. Reconnect ECM harness connector
and retest.
ST
H
INSPECTION END RS
SEF073Y BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-31
IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve
TEC347M
EC-32
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM TB45S
Circuit Diagram GI
MODELS WITH NATS
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC348M
EC-33
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM TB45S
Circuit Diagram (Cont’d)
MODELS WITHOUT NATS
TEC349M
EC-34
CARBURETOR TB45S
Fuel Level GI
INSPECTION
Fuel cut solenoid valve MA
1. Connect solenoid valve connector to battery.
2. Check “click” sound from solenoid valve when battery is con- EM
nected and disconnected.
LC
SEC509D
3. If no sound is heard from fuel cut solenoid valve, replace with

a new one.
1) Disconnect harness from harness connector. Refer to “Disas-
sembling Carburetor Harness Connector”, EC-163 on the Ser- FE
vice Manual (Publication No. SM7E-1Y61G1).
CL
MT
SEF462D
AT
2) Remove fuel cut solenoid valve from carburetor.
3) Install new fuel cut solenoid valve.
I Always use a new washer. TF
Fuel cut solenoid valve:
: 12 - 26 N⋅m (1.2 - 2.7 kg-m, 9 - 20 ft-lb)
I After replacement, start engine and check that fuel cut PD
solenoid is in good condition.
FA
SEF463DB
RA
ISC-FI Pot
AIR CONDITIONER CUT RELAY BR
3 and q
5 ,q
6 and q
7 .
ST
12V direct current supply between
YES
terminals q
1 and q 2 RS
No current supply NO
SEC202B If NG, replace relay. BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-35
COOLING FAN MOTOR ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT TB45S
Wiring Diagram — COOL/F —
TEC350M
EC-36
Inspection GI
ENTIRE SYSTEM
For air conditioner signal MA
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector. EM
3. Turn ignition switch and air conditioner switch “ON”.
4. Check voltage between terminals q 1 ,q3 and ground.
Battery voltage should exist. LC
If OK, check cooling fan motor ground circuit.
SEF622V If NG, check following.
I 10A and 30A fuses
I Power supply circuit to cooling fan motor
I Cooling fan relay and circuit
I Air conditioner relay and circuit FE
CL
MT
AT
For engine coolant temperature switch signal
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor and engine coolant temperature TF
switch harness connectors.
3. Connect suitable jumper wire between engine coolant tempera-
ture switch harness connector terminals. PD
5. Check voltage between cooling fan motor terminals q1 ,q3 and
ground. FA
Battery voltage should exist.
If OK, check cooling fan motor ground circuit and engine cool-
SEC510D
ant temperature switch. RA
If NG, check following.
I 10A and 40A fuses
I Power supply circuit to cooling fan motor BR
I Cooling fan relay and circuit
I Engine coolant temperature switch and circuit
ST
RS
BT
Electrical Components Inspection
COOLING FAN RELAY
HA
3 and q
5 ,q
6 and q
7 .
EL
Condition Continuity
Between terminals q
1 and q
2 Yes
SE
No current supplied No
If NG, replace cooling fan relay.

SEC202B
IDX
EC-37
Electrical Components Inspection (Cont’d)
AIR CONDITIONER RELAY
3 and q
5 ,q
6 and q
7 .
Between terminals q
1 and q
2 Yes
No current supplied No
If NG, replace air conditioner relay.
SEC202B
EC-38
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL
SYSTEM TB48DE A/T
Circuit Diagram GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC241M
EC-39
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL
SYSTEM TB48DE A/T
TEC372M
EC-40
INDEX FOR DTC TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
Alphabetical Index GI
Check if the vehicle is a model with Euro-OBD (E-OBD) system or not by the “Type approval number” on the
identification plate. Refer to GI section. MA
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
EC-154, “DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE”. EM
x: Applicable —: Not applicable
Items
DTC*1 LC
CONSULT-II Trip MI lighting up Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) ECM*3
GST*2
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 1 x EC-434
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 1 x EC-434
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 1 x EC-441 FE
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 1 x EC-441
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 1 x EC-454 CL
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 2 — EC-428
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*5 1 x EC-154 MT
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 2 x EC-284
CKP SENSOR (COG) P1336 1336 2 x EC-414 AT
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 2 x EC-290
CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 2 — EC-405
TF
CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 2 — EC-407
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 2 x EC-274
PD
FA
CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 0306 2 x EC-274 RA
ECM P0605 0605 1 or 2 x or — EC-316
ECM BACK UP/CIRC P1065 1065 2 x EC-323 BR
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0117 0117 1 x EC-185
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0118 0118 1 x EC-185 ST
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 1 x EC-394
ETC ACTR P1121 1121 1 or 2 x EC-332 RS
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 1 x EC-334
ETC MOT P1128 1128 1 x EC-348
BT
ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 1 x EC-342
ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 1 x EC-342
HA
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 2 x EC-251
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 P0174 0174 2 x EC-251
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 2 x EC-260
EL
FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 P0175 0175 2 x EC-260
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 0132 2 x EC-196 SE
HO2S1 (B1) P0133 0133 2 x EC-205
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 0134 2 x EC-205 IDX
EC-41
Alphabetical Index (Cont’d)
DTC*1
Items
GST*2
HO2S1 (B1) P1143 1143 2 x EC-353
HO2S1 (B1) P1144 1144 2 x EC-360
HO2S1 (B2) P0152 0152 2 x EC-196
HO2S1 (B2) P0153 0153 2 x EC-205
HO2S1 (B2) P0154 0154 2 x EC-205
HO2S1 (B2) P1163 1163 2 x EC-353
HO2S1 (B2) P1164 1164 2 x EC-360
HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0031 0031 2 x EC-157
HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0032 0032 2 x EC-157
HO2S1 HTR (B2) P0051 0051 2 x EC-157
HO2S1 HTR (B2) P0052 0052 2 x EC-157
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 2 x EC-228
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 2 x EC-238
HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 2 x EC-368
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 2 x EC-381
HO2S2 (B2) P0158 0158 2 x EC-228
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 0159 2 x EC-238
HO2S2 (B2) P1166 1166 2 x EC-368
HO2S2 (B2) P1167 1167 2 x EC-381
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 2 x EC-165
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 2 x EC-165
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0057 0057 2 x EC-165
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0058 0058 2 x EC-165
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 2 x EC-180
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0113 0113 2 x EC-180
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 2 x EC-327
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 2 — EC-280
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 2 x AT section
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0102 0102 1 x EC-173
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0103 0103 1 x EC-173
MIL/CIRC P0650 0650 2 — EC-319
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 2 x EC-274
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 2 — EC-82
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING No DTC Flashing*4 — Flashing*4 EC-83
MAY BE REQUIRED.
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — — —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
EC-42
Alphabetical Index (Cont’d)
DTC*1
GI
Items
GST*2 MA
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 2 x EC-421
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 2 x EC-302 EM
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0445 0445 2 x EC-302
PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 2 — EC-434
LC
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 1 x EC-409
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 2 x AT section
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 1 x EC-268
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 1 x EC-268
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 1 x EC-190
FE
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 1 x EC-190
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 1 x EC-448 CL
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 2 x EC-297
TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 0430 2 x EC-297 MT
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC P0500 0500 2 x EC-309
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. AT
*2: These numbers are prescribed by ISO 15031-5.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), these numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
*4: When engine is running.
*5: The trouble shooting for these DTCs needs CONSULT-II. TF
NOTE:
Regarding Y61 models with TB48DE engine, “B1” indicates bank 1 (cylinders number 1, 2 and 3), “B2” indicates bank 2
(cylinders number 4, 5 and 6). PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-43
DTC No. Index

Check if the vehicle is a model with Euro-OBD (E-OBD) system or not by the “Type approval number” on the
identification plate. Refer to GI section.
NOTE:
EC-154, “DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE”.
DTC*1
Items
ECM*3 (CONSULT-II screen terms)
GST*2
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
No DTC Flashing*4 FURTHER TESTING — Flashing*4 EC-83
MAY BE REQUIRED.
U1000 1000*5 CAN COMM CIRCUIT 1 x EC-154
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
P0000 0000 FURTHER TESTING — — —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0031 0031 HO2S1 HTR (B1) 2 x EC-157
P0032 0032 HO2S1 HTR (B1) 2 x EC-157
P0037 0037 HO2S2 HTR (B1) 2 x EC-165
P0038 0038 HO2S2 HTR (B1) 2 x EC-165
P0051 0051 HO2S1 HTR (B2) 2 x EC-157
P0052 0052 HO2S1 HTR (B2) 2 x EC-157
P0057 0057 HO2S2 HTR (B2) 2 x EC-165
P0058 0058 HO2S2 HTR (B2) 2 x EC-165
P0102 0102 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT 1 x EC-173
P0103 0103 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT 1 x EC-173
P0112 0112 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 x EC-180
P0113 0113 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 x EC-180
P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT 1 x EC-185
P0118 0118 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT 1 x EC-185
P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC 1 x EC-190
P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC 1 x EC-190
P0132 0132 HO2S1 (B1) 2 x EC-196
P0133 0133 HO2S1 (B1) 2 x EC-205
P0134 0134 HO2S1 (B1) 2 x EC-205
P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) 2 x EC-228
P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) 2 x EC-238
P0152 0152 HO2S1 (B2) 2 x EC-196
P0153 0153 HO2S1 (B2) 2 x EC-205
P0154 0154 HO2S1 (B2) 2 x EC-205
P0158 0158 HO2S2 (B2) 2 x EC-228
P0159 0159 HO2S2 (B2) 2 x EC-238
P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 2 x EC-251
P0172 0172 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 2 x EC-260
P0174 0174 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 2 x EC-251
EC-44
DTC No. Index (Cont’d)
DTC*1
GI
Items
GST*2 MA
P0175 0175 FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 2 x EC-260
P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC 1 x EC-268 EM
P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC 1 x EC-268
P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE 2 x EC-274
LC
P0301 0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE 2 x EC-274
FE
P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 2 — EC-280 CL
P0328 0328 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 2 — EC-280
P0332 0332 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B2 2 — EC-280 MT
P0333 0333 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B2 2 — EC-280
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT 2 x EC-284 AT
P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 2 x EC-290
P0420 0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 2 x EC-297 TF
P0430 0430 TW CATALYST SYS-B2 2 x EC-297
P0444 0444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V 2 x EC-302
PD
P0445 0445 PURG VOLUME CONT/V 2 x EC-302
P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC 2 x EC-309
FA
P0550 0550 PW ST P SEN/CIRC 2 — EC-311
P0605 0605 ECM 1 or 2 x or — EC-316
P0650 0650 MIL/CIRC 2 — EC-319
RA
P0740 0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC 2 x AT section
P0745 0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC 2 x AT section BR
P1065 1065 ECM BACK UP/CIRC 2 x EC-323
P1111 1111 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 2 x EC-327 ST
P1121 1121 ETC ACTR 1 or 2 x EC-332
P1122 1122 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC 1 x EC-334 RS
P1124 1124 ETC MOT PWR 1 x EC-342
P1126 1126 ETC MOT PWR 1 x EC-342 BT
P1128 1128 ETC MOT 1 x EC-348
P1143 1143 HO2S1 (B1) 2 x EC-353
HA
P1144 1144 HO2S1 (B1) 2 x EC-360
P1146 1146 HO2S2 (B1) 2 x EC-368
EL
P1147 1147 HO2S2 (B1) 2 x EC-381
P1163 1163 HO2S1 (B2) 2 x EC-353
P1164 1164 HO2S1 (B2) 2 x EC-360
SE
P1166 1166 HO2S2 (B2) 2 x EC-368
P1167 1167 HO2S2 (B2) 2 x EC-381 IDX
EC-45
DTC No. Index (Cont’d)
DTC*1
Items
GST*2
P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP 1 x EC-394
P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING 2 — EC-405
P1226 1226 CTP LEARNING 2 — EC-407
P1229 1229 SENSOR POWER/CIRC 1 x EC-409
P1336 1336 CKP SENSOR (COG) 2 x EC-414
P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION 2 — EC-82
P1706 1706 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT 2 x EC-421
P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT 2 — EC-428
P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC 1 x EC-434
P2123 2123 APP SEN 1/CIRC 1 x EC-434
P2127 2127 APP SEN 2/CIRC 1 x EC-441
P2128 2128 APP SEN 2/CIRC 1 x EC-441
P2135 2135 TP SENSOR 1 x EC-448
P2138 2138 APP SENSOR 1 x EC-454
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), these numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
*4: When engine is running.
*5: The trouble shooting for these DTCs need CONSULT-II.
NOTE:
(cylinders number 4, 5 and 6).
EC-46
PRECAUTIONS TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System GI

(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER” MA
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS system composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL Y61 is as follows (The compo- EM
sition varies according to the destination and optional equipment.):
I For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steer-
LC
ing wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
I For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of front side air bag module (located in the outer side of front
seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring FE
harness, warning lamp (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.
WARNING: CL
I To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN dealer. MT
I Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the RS section. AT
I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow harness connector.
TF
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine
and A/T PD
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator (MI) to warn the driver
of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
FA
CAUTION:
I Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery ground cable before any repair
or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will RA
cause the MI to light up.
I Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MI to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, BR
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
I Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to EL section. ST
I Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with
a bracket, etc. may cause the MI to light up due to the short circuit.
I Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube RS
may cause the MI to light up due to the malfunction of the fuel injection system, etc.
I Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer. BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-47
Precaution
I Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.
I Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine
is running.
I Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness
connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery
ground cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM
because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition
switch is turned off.
I Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then
SEF289H disconnect battery ground cable.
I Do not disassemble ECM.
I If battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to
the initial ECM values.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial values.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the cable is dis-
connected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunc-
tion. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation.
SEF707Y
I When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it

securely with levers as far as they will go as shown at right.
PBIB1162E
PBIB1163E
EC-48
Precaution (Cont’d)
I When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or GI
from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM MA
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
I Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge) EM
voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in
damage to ICs.
I Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in) LC
away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control
PBIB0090E
system malfunctions due to receiving external noise,
degraded operation of ICs, etc.
I Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.
FE
CL
MT
AT
I Before replacing ECM, perform “ECM Terminals and Refer-
ence Value” inspection and make sure ECM functions
properly. Refer to EC-112, “ECM Terminals and Reference TF
Value”.
I Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
I Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor. PD
I Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of deter-
gent.
I Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator. FA
I Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause seri-
ous incidents.
MEF040D
I Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor, crank- RA
shaft position sensor (OBD).
BR
ST
RS
BT
I After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform
“DTC Confirmation Procedure” or “Overall Function HA
Check”.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC Confirmation
Procedure” if the repair is completed. The “Overall Func- EL
tion Check” should be a good result if the repair is com-
pleted.
SE
SAT652J
IDX
EC-49
I When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, connect
a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between
the ECM and ECM harness connector.
I When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never
allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
I Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the
ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals,
such as the ground.
SEF348N
I Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.

I Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
SEC686C
I Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.

I Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unneces-
sarily.
I Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
SEF709Y
I When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure

to observe the following as it may adversely affect elec-
tronic control systems depending on installation location.
— Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic
control units.
— Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
— Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-
wave radio can be kept smaller.
— Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
SEF708Y
EC-50
I Regarding Y61 models with TB48DE engine, “B1” indicates GI
bank 1 (cylinders number 1, 2, 3), “B2” indicates bank 2
(cylinders number 4, 5, 6).
MA
EM
LC
SEC888C
FE
CL
MT
SEC889C
AT
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
I “How to Read Wiring Diagrams” in GI section TF
I “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” for power distribution circuit in
EL section
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: PD
I “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAG-
NOSES” in GI section
I “How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident”
FA
in GI section
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-51
PREPARATION TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
Special Service Tools

Tool number
Description
Tool name
KV10117100 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors
Heated oxygen sensor with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut
wrench
NT379
KV10114400 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors

Heated oxygen sensor a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
wrench
NT636
Commercial Service Tools

Tool name Description
Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
pressure
NT653
Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant tem-

perature sensor
NT705
Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads

cleaner before installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with
ie: (J-43897-18) anti-seize lubricant shown below.
(J-43897-12) a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zir-
conia Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for
Titania Oxygen Sensor
AEM488
EC-52
PREPARATION TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
Commercial Service Tools (Cont’d)
Tool name Description
GI
Anti-seize lubricant Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool
ie: (PermatexTM 133AR when reconditioning exhaust system threads. MA
or equivalent meeting
MIL specification MIL-A-
907) EM
LC
NT779
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-53
ENGINE CONTROL
SYSTEM TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
System Diagram
SEC745D
EC-54
ENGINE CONTROL
Vacuum Hose Drawing GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
Refer to EC-54, “System Diagram” for Vacuum Control System. SEC665D
EC-55
ENGINE CONTROL
System Chart
Input (Sensor) ECM Function Output (Actuator)
I Camshaft position sensor Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Fuel injectors
I Crankshaft position sensor (OBD)
I Mass air flow sensor Electronic ignition system Power transistor
I Engine coolant temperature sensor
I Heated oxygen sensor 1 Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
I Throttle position sensor
On board diagnostic system MI (On the instrument panel)
I Accelerator pedal position sensor
I Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Intake valve timing control Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
I Intake air temperature sensor
I Power steering pressure sensor Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
I Ignition switch
I Stop lamp switch Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
I Battery voltage
EVAP canister purge volume control sole-
I Knock sensor EVAP canister purge flow control
noid valve
I Refrigerant pressure sensor
I Heated oxygen sensor 2*1 Air conditioning cut control Air conditioner relay
I TCM (Transmission control module)*2
I Air conditioner switch*2 Power valve control VIAS control solenoid valve
I Vehicle speed sensor*2
I Electrical load signal*2 Cooling fan control Cooling fan relay
*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
*2: The signals are sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator
Engine speed and piston
position
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Density of oxygen in
Heated oxygen sensor 1
exhaust gas
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position Fuel injection & mixture ratio
Fuel injectors
control
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition
Battery Battery voltage
Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation
Density of oxygen in
Heated oxygen sensor 2*1
exhaust gas
Vehicle speed sensor*2 Vehicle speed
Air conditioner switch*2 Air conditioner operation
Ignition switch Start signal
*1: Under normal conditions, this sensor is not for engine control operation.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
EC-56
ENGINE CONTROL
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System (Cont’d)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION GI
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined MA
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the camshaft position sensor and the mass air
flow sensor.
EM
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various oper- LC
ating conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase>
I During warm-up
I When starting the engine
I During acceleration
I Hot-engine operation FE
I When selector lever is changed from “N” to “D”
I High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease> CL
I During deceleration
I During high engine speed operation
MT
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
AT
TF
PD
FA
PBIB0121E
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission con- RA
trol. The three way catalyst (manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses
heated oxygen sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor if the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM
adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about heated
BR
oxygen sensor 1, refer to EC-196. This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal
air-fuel mixture). ST
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching
characteristics of heated oxygen sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal RS
from heated oxygen sensor 2.
Open loop control BT

The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
I Deceleration and acceleration HA
I High-load, high-speed operation
I Malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1 or its circuit
I Insufficient activation of heated oxygen sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature EL
I High engine coolant temperature
I During warm-up
I After shifting from “N” to “D” SE
I When starting the engine
IDX
EC-57
ENGINE CONTROL
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System (Cont’d)
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from heated oxygen
sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to
the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as
originally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot film) and characteristic
changes during operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This
is then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from heated oxygen sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared
to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an
increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences,
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.
FUEL INJECTION TIMING
SEF179U
Two types of systems are used.
Sequential multiport fuel injection system

Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous multiport fuel injection system

Fuel is injected simultaneously into all six cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The six injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of the engine at excessively high speeds.
EC-58
ENGINE CONTROL
Electronic Ignition (EI) System GI

MA
Engine speed and piston posi-
tion EM
Engine coolant temperature
Engine coolant temperature LC
sensor
Accelerator pedal position sen-
Accelerator pedal position Ignition timing control Power transistor
sor
Knock sensor Engine knocking FE
Park/neutral position (PNP)
Gear position
switch
CL
Battery Battery voltage
MT
AT
TF
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best
air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the engine. The ignition PD
timing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms the map shown.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width
and camshaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, FA
ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
e.g., N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec
A °BTDC RA
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the
ECM according to the other data stored in the ECM.
SEF742M
I At starting BR
I During warm-up
I At idle
I At low battery voltage ST
I During acceleration
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies.
The basic ignition timing is programmed within the anti-knocking
RS
zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard
system does not operate under normal driving conditions. If engine
knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition. The
BT
signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition tim-
ing to eliminate the knocking condition. HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-59
ENGINE CONTROL
Air Conditioning Cut Control

Air conditioner switch*1 Air conditioner “ON” signal
Throttle position sensor Throttle valve opening angle
Camshaft position sensor Engine speed
sensor
Battery Battery voltage Air conditioner cut control Air conditioner relay
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure
Power steering pressure sen-
Power steering operation
sor
*1: These signals are sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
I When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
I When cranking the engine.
I At high engine speeds.
I When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
I When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
I When engine speed is excessively low.
I When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine

Speed)
Neutral position
switch
Accelerator pedal position sen-
Accelerator pedal position
sor Fuel cut control Fuel injectors
sensor
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 3,950 rpm with no load (for example, in neutral and engine speed over 3,950
rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will operate until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut is cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under “Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System”,
EC-56.
EC-60
ENGINE CONTROL
CAN Communication GI
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- MA
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many
electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with EM
2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wir-
ing. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
LC
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
FE
CL
MT
SEL599Y
AT
Input/output signal chart
T: Transmit R: Receive
Signals Combination meter TCM ECM
TF
Engine speed signal R R T
Engine coolant temperature signal R R T PD
Accelerator pedal position signal R T
Closed throttle position signal R T FA
Wide open throttle position signal R T
A/T fluid temperature warning lamp signal R T R RA
Current gear position signal R T R
Shift change signal T R
BR
Air conditioner switch signal T R
Headlamp switch signal T R
ST
Rear window defogger switch signal T R
Brake switch signal T R
Vehicle speed signal T R R
RS
A/T self diagnosis signal T R
Manual mode signal T R BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-61
BASIC SERVICE
PROCEDURE TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check

IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
With GST
Check idle speed with GST.
SEF058Y
IGNITION TIMING
Any of following two methods may be used.
Method A
1. Slide the harness protector of ignition coil No. 1 to clear the
wires.
2. Attach timing light to the wires as shown.
3. Check ignition timing.
SEC560C
Method B
1. Remove No. 1 ignition coil.
2. Connect No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug with suitable
high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to this
wire.
SEC561C
SEF166Y
3. Check ignition timing.
SEC536DA
EC-62
BASIC SERVICE
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning GI

DESCRIPTION
“Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning” is an operation to learn the fully released position of the MA
accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each
time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
EM
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. LC
2. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF” wait at least 10 seconds.
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning FE

DESCRIPTION
“Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning” is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve CL
by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of
electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
MT
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. AT
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. TF
Idle Air Volume Learning

PD
DESCRIPTION
“Idle Air Volume Learning” is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the spe-
cific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: FA
I Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
I Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
RA
PREPARATION
Before performing “Idle Air Volume Learning”, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. BR
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
I Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
I Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 95°C (158 - 203°F) ST
I PNP switch: ON
I Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) RS
On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, set lighting switch to the 1st position to light
only small lamps.
I Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) BT
I Vehicle speed: Stopped
I Transmission: Warmed-up
For models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” HA
system indicates less than 0.9V.
For A/T models without CONSULT-II, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
EL
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II SE
1. Perform EC-63, “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”.
2. Perform EC-63, “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”.
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. IDX
4. Check that all items listed under the topic “PREPARATION” (previously mentioned) are in good order.
EC-63
BASIC SERVICE
Idle Air Volume Learning (Cont’d)
5. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
SEF217Z
6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
SEF454Y
7. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen.

If “CMPLT” is not displayed, “Idle Air Volume Learning” will not
be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the
incident by referring to the “Diagnostic Procedure” below.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle
speed and ignition timing are within the specifications.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed 675±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Ignition timing 10±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
MBIB0238E
EC-64
BASIC SERVICE
Idle Air Volume Learning (Cont’d)
Without CONSULT-II GI
NOTE:
I It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
I It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit MA
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-63, “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”. EM
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Check that all items listed under the topic “PREPARATION” (previously mentioned) are in good order. LC
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch “ON” and wait 3 seconds.
7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MI stops FE
blinking and turned ON.
9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MI turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle. CL
11. Wait 20 seconds.
MT
AT
TF
PD
PBIB0665E
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the FA
specifications.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
RA
Idle speed 675±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Ignition timing 10±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
BR
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, “Idle Air Volume Learning” will not be car-
ried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the “Diagnostic Procedure”
below. ST
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
RS
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2. Check PCV valve operation.
3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
BT
4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condi-
tion are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. HA
It is useful to perform EC-141, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE”.
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform “Idle air volume learning” all over again: EL
— Engine stalls.
— Erroneous idle.
SE
IDX
EC-65
BASIC SERVICE
Fuel Pressure Check

FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel
line to eliminate danger.
With CONSULT-II
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT”
mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
SEF214Y
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in fuse box.
2. Start engine.
3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
SEC550C
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK

I When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
I Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent
parts.
I Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
I Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero, refer to above.
2. Disconnect fuel hose between fuel filter and fuel tube (engine
side).
3. Install pressure gauge between fuel filter and fuel tube.
SEC551C 4. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
5. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.

At idling:
Approximately 245 kPa (2.45 bar, 2.5 kg/cm2, 36
psi)
A few seconds after ignition switch is turned OFF to
ON:
Approximately 294 kPa (2.94 bar, 3.0 kg/cm2, 43
psi)
6. Stop engine and disconnect fuel pressure regulator vacuum
hose from intake manifold.
7. Plug intake manifold with a rubber cap.
SEF718BA
8. Connect variable vacuum source to fuel pressure regulator.
EC-66
BASIC SERVICE
Fuel Pressure Check (Cont’d)
9. Start engine and read indication of fuel pressure gauge as GI
vacuum is changed.
Fuel pressure should decrease as vacuum increases. If results
are unsatisfactory, replace fuel pressure regulator. MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-67
BASIC SERVICE
Injector Removal and Installation

1. Release fuel pressure to zero.
2. Disconnect harness connector clip.
3. Disconnect injector harness connectors.
4. Disconnect fuel hoses from fuel tube assembly.
5. Remove fuel tube assemblies in reverse numerical sequence of
that shown in the figure at left.
SEC552C
6. Expand and remove clips securing fuel injectors.

7. Extract fuel injectors straight from fuel tubes.
I Do not extract injector by pinching connector.
I Be careful not to damage injector nozzles during removal.
I Do not bump or drop fuel injectors.
SEC553C
8. Install injector to fuel tube assembly.

I Lubricate O-rings with a smear of silicone oil.
I Be careful not to damage O-rings with service tools, finger
nails or clips. Do not expand or twist O-rings.
I Discard old clips, replace with new ones.
9. Position clips in grooves on fuel injectors.
I Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned
with cutouts of clips after installation.
10. Align protrusions of fuel tubes with those of fuel injectors. Insert
fuel injectors straight into fuel tubes.
11. After properly inserting fuel injectors, check to make sure that
SEC559C
fuel tube protrusions are engaged with those of fuel injectors,
and that flanges of fuel tube are engaged with clips.
SEC554C
12. Tighten fuel tube assembly mounting nuts in numerical

sequence (indicated in the figure at left) and in two stages.
: Tightening torque N⋅m (kg-m, ft-lb)
1st stage:
9 - 20 (0.9 - 2.1, 7 - 15)
2nd stage:
21 - 26 (2.1 - 2.7, 16 - 19)
13. Insert fuel hoses into fuel tubes so that ends of fuel hoses butt
up against fuel tubes; fasten with clamps, avoiding bulges.
CAUTION:
After properly connecting fuel tube assembly to injector and
SEC552C
fuel hose, check connection for fuel leakage.
EC-68
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD)
Introduction GI
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including: MA
Emission-related diagnostic information ISO Standard
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Mode 3 of ISO 15031-5 EM
Freeze Frame data Mode 2 of ISO 15031-5
System Readiness Test (SRT) code Mode 1 of ISO 15031-5 LC
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Mode 7 of ISO 15031-5
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
Test values and Test limits Mode 6 of ISO 15031-5
Calibration ID Mode 9 of ISO 15031-5
FE
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
CL
Freeze Frame 1st trip Freeze
DTC 1st trip DTC SRT code Test value
data Frame data
CONSULT-II x x x x x — MT
GST x x*1 x — x x
ECM x x*2 — — — — AT
*1: 1st trip DTCs for self-diagnoses concerning SRT items cannot be shown on the GST display.
*2: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
TF
The malfunction indicator (MI) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected in two
consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-97.)
PD
Two Trip Detection Logic
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in FA
the ECM memory. The MI will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored
in the ECM memory, and the MI lights up. The MI lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd RA
trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MI,
and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below. BR
MI DTC 1st trip DTC ST

1st trip 2nd trip
Items 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip 2nd trip
Lighting Lighting
Blinking Blinking displaying displaying displaying displaying RS
up up
Misfire (Possible three way cata-
lyst damage) — DTC: P0300 - x — — — — — x — BT
P0306 is being detected
Misfire (Possible three way cata-
lyst damage) — DTC: P0300 - — — x — — x — —
HA
P0306 is being detected
One trip detection diagnoses
— x — — x — x —
EL
(Refer to EC-41.)
Except above — — — x — x x —
SE
IDX
EC-69
Emission-related Diagnostic Information

EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS
DTC*1 Test Value/
Items Reference
CONSULT-II SRT code Test Limit 1st trip DTC
(CONSULT-II screen terms) ECM page
GST*2 (GST only)
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*3 — — — EC-154

NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — — — —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0031 0031 x x x*4 EC-157
HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0032 0032 x x x*4 EC-157
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 x x x*4 EC-165
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 x x x*4 EC-165
HO2S1 HTR (B2) P0051 0051 x x x*4 EC-157
HO2S1 HTR (B2) P0052 0052 x x x*4 EC-157
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0057 0057 x x x*4 EC-165
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0058 0058 x x x*4 EC-165
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0102 0102 — — — EC-173
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0103 0103 — — — EC-173
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 — — x EC-180
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0113 0113 — — x EC-180
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0117 0117 — — — EC-185
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0118 0118 — — — EC-185
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 — — — EC-190
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 — — — EC-190
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 0132 x x x*4 EC-196
HO2S1 (B1) P0133 0133 x x x*4 EC-205
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 0134 x x x*4 EC-205
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 x x x*4 EC-228
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 x x x*4 EC-238
HO2S1 (B2) P0152 0152 x x x*4 EC-196
HO2S1 (B2) P0153 0153 x x x*4 EC-205
HO2S1 (B2) P0154 0154 x x x*4 EC-205
HO2S2 (B2) P0158 0158 x x x*4 EC-228
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 0159 x x x*4 EC-238
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 — — x EC-251
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 — — x EC-260
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 P0174 0174 — — x EC-251
FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 P0175 0175 — — x EC-260
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 — — — EC-268
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 — — — EC-268
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 — — x EC-274
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 — — x EC-274
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 — — x EC-274
EC-70
(Cont’d) GI
DTC*1 Test Value/
Items Reference
CONSULT-II SRT code Test Limit 1st trip DTC MA
GST*2 (GST only)
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 — — x EC-274 EM

CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 — — x EC-274
CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 0305 — — x EC-274
LC
CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 0306 — — x EC-274
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 — — x EC-280
FE
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 — — x EC-284
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 — — x EC-290 CL
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 x x x*4 EC-297
TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 0430 x x x*4 EC-297 MT
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 — — x EC-302
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0445 0445 — — x EC-302 AT
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC P0500 0500 — — x EC-309
PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 — — x EC-311 TF
ECM P0605 0605 — — x EC-316
MIL/CIRC P0650 0650 — — x EC-319
PD
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 — — x AT section
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 — — x AT section
FA
ECM BACK UP/CIRC P1065 1065 — — x EC-323
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 — — x EC-327
ETC ACTR P1121 1121 — — x EC-332
RA
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 — — — EC-334
ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 — — — EC-342 BR
ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 — — — EC-342
ETC MOT P1128 1128 — — — EC-348 ST
HO2S1 (B1) P1143 1143 x x x*4 EC-353
HO2S1 (B1) P1144 1144 x x x*4 EC-360 RS
HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 x x x*4 EC-368
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 x x x*4 EC-381
BT
HO2S1 (B2) P1163 1163 x x x*4 EC-353
HO2S1 (B2) P1164 1164 x x x*4 EC-360
HA
HO2S2 (B2) P1166 1166 x x x*4 EC-368
HO2S2 (B2) P1167 1167 x x x*4 EC-381
EL
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 — — — EC-394
CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 — — x EC-405
CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 — — x EC-407
SE
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 — — — EC-409
CKP SENSOR (COG) P1336 1336 — — x EC-414 IDX
EC-71
(Cont’d)
DTC*1 Test Value/
Items Reference
CONSULT-II SRT code Test Limit 1st trip DTC
GST*2 (GST only)
P1610 -
NATS MALFUNCTION 1610 - 1615 — — x EC-82
P1615
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 — — x EC-421
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 — — x EC-428
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 — — — EC-434
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 — — — EC-434
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 — — — EC-441
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 — — — EC-441
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 — — — EC-448
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 — — — EC-454
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*3: The trouble shooting for these DTCs need CONSULT-II.
*4: These are not displayed with GST.
NOTE:
(cylinders number 4, 5 and 6).
DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MI will not
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MI lights up. In other words,
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MI lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two con-
secutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and
2nd trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MI dur-
ing the 1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in EC-81, “HOW
TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”.
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-70, “EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC
INFORMATION ITEMS. These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/
component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-II.
1st trip DTC is specified in Mode 7 of ISO 15031-5. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MI
and therefore does not warn the driver of a problem. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the
vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in “Work Flow” procedure Step II, refer to EC-92, “WORK FLOW”. Then perform “DTC Con-
firmation Procedure” or “Overall Function Check” to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is
duplicated, the item requires repair.
How to read DTC and 1st trip DTC

DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
With CONSULT-II
With GST
CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P0705, P0750, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by ISO 15031-5.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
EC-72
(Cont’d) GI
No Tools
The number of blinks of the MI in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC. MA
Example: 0102, 0340 etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
I 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. EM
I Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indi-
cate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to
normal. CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II LC
(if available) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunc-
tion is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times
the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”. FE
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “[1t]”.
CL
MT
AT
PBIB0911E
TF
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA PD

The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant
temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, base fuel schedule and
intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected. FA
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For RA
details, see EC-125, “Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data”.
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no prior- BR
ity for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MI on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol- ST
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items RS
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
1
Freeze frame data Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items) BT
3 1st trip freeze frame data
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd HA
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal-
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is EL
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or
1st trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and
freeze frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged SE
in the ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM
memory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-84, “HOW TO ERASE IDX
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”.
EC-73
(Cont’d)
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Mode 1 of ISO 15031-5.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and com-
ponents. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”,
use the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer’s
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
I The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the
ECM memory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspec-
tor will continue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more
of the SRT items the vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
I If MI is “ON” during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer
untested even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to
check SRT (“CMPLT”) and DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.
SRT item
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
SRT item Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to
Performance Priority*1 Corresponding DTC No.
(CONSULT-II indication) “CMPLT”
CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420, P0430
Heated oxygen sensor 1 P0132, P0152
HO2S 1 Heated oxygen sensor 1 P1144, P1164
P0031, P0032, P0051,
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
P0052
HO2S HTR 1
P0037, P0038, P0057,
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
P0058
*1: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the prior-
ity for models with CONSULT-II.
EC-74
(Cont’d) GI
SRT set timing
SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is done MA
regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and is
shown in the table below.
Example
EM
Self-diagnosis result Ignition cycle
Diagnosis
+ ON , OFF + ON , OFF + ON , OFF + ON , LC
P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2)
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2)
Case 1
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
All OK FE
P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1)
Case 2 CL
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
P0400 OK OK — —
MT
P0402 — — — —
NG AT
P1402 NG — NG (Consecutive
NG exists Case 3
NG)
TF
(1st trip) DTC
1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC
DTC (= MI “ON”)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” PD
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out. FA
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT
will indicate “CMPLT”. , Case 1 above
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indi-
RA
cate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. , Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indi-
cate “CMPLT”. , Case 3 above
BR
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state ST
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the follow-
ing reasons:
I The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result. RS
I The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
I When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diag-
nosis memory must be erased from ECM after repair. BT
I If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried HA
out prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
SRT service procedure EL
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.
SE
IDX
EC-75
(Cont’d)
SEF573XB
*1 EC-72 *2 EC-77 *3 EC-77
EC-76
(Cont’d) GI
How to display SRT code
WITH CONSULT-II MA
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with
CONSULT-II.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the EM
CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT codes are not set,
“INCMP” is displayed.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown at right. LC
“INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not
PBIB0666E set. “CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set.
WITH GST
Selecting Mode 1 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)
FE
How to set SRT code
To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions. CL
WITH CONSULT-II
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on “Performance Priority” in the table MT
on EC-74, “SRT Item”.
AT
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes. TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-77
(Cont’d)
Driving pattern
MBIB0241E
EC-78
(Cont’d) GI
I The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driv-
ing habits, etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the MA
shortest.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed
within zone A.
EM
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
I Sea level
I Flat road
LC
I Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
I Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diag-
nosis may also be performed.
Pattern 1: FE
I The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 121 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V).
I The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C CL
(158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 121 and ground is lower than 1.4V).
Pattern 2:
I When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted. MT
In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal
and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 AT
km/h (56 MPH) again.
*2: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
TF
Suggested Transmission Gear Position
Set the selector lever in the “D” position with the overdrive switch turned ON. PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-79
(Cont’d)
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II)
The following is the information specified in Mode 6 of ISO 15031-5.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is “OK” or “NG” while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
Items for which these data (test value and test limit) are displayed are the same as SRT code items.
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be dis-
played on the GST screen.
Test value (GST display)

SRT item Self-diagnostic test item Test limit Application
TID CID
01H 01H Max. x
Three way catalyst function (Bank1)
02H 81H Min. x
CATALYST
03H 02H Max. x
Three way catalyst function (Bank2)
04H 82H Min. x
09H 04H Max. x
0AH 84H Min. x
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (Bank 1) 0BH 04H Max. x
0CH 04H Max. x
0DH 04H Max. x
11H 05H Max. x
12H 85H Min. x
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (Bank 2) 13H 05H Max. x
14H 05H Max. x
HO2S
15H 05H Max. x
19H 86H Min. x
1AH 86H Min. x
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 1)
1BH 06H Max. x
1CH 06H Max. x
21H 87H Min. x
22H 87H Min. x
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 2)
23H 07H Max. x
24H 07H Max. x
29H 08H Max. x
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (Bank 1)
2AH 88H Min. x
2BH 09H Max. x
2CH 89H Min. x
HO2S HTR
2DH 0AH Max. x
2EH 8AH Min. x
2FH 0BH Max. x
30H 8BH Min. x
EC-80
(Cont’d) GI
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
How to Erase DTC (With CONSULT-II) MA
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF-
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased indi- EM
vidually from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
NOTE: LC
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-41, “INDEX FOR DTC”), skip steps 2 through 4.
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “A/T”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK” FE
twice.
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. CL
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF966X
EL
SE
IDX
EC-81
(Cont’d)
How to erase DTC (With GST)
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Mode 4 with GST.
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-41, “INDEX FOR DTC”), skip step 2.
10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT-II)” in AT section titled “TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS”, “Self-diagnosis”. (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis
only to erase the DTC.)
3. Select Mode 4 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
How to erase DTC (No Tools)
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF” once.
2. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
3. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal. Refer to
EC-84, “HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE”.
I If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost after approx.
24 hours.
I The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
1. Diagnostic trouble codes
2. 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
3. Freeze frame data
4. 1st trip freeze frame data
5. System readiness test (SRT) codes
6. Test values
7. Others
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but
all of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System)

I If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in
the “ON” position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed
on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic
results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Refer to EL section, “NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYS-
TEM)”.
I Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NATS is displayed
before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode
with CONSULT-II.
SEF515Y I When replacing ECM, initialization of NATS system and
registration of all NATS ignition key IDs must be carried out
with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner.
Regarding the procedures of NATS initialization and NATS
ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation
manual, NATS.
EC-82
Malfunction Indicator (MI) GI

DESCRIPTION
The MI is located on the instrument panel. MA
1. The MI will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
I If the MI does not light up, refer to EL section “WARNING EM
LAMPS”, or see EC-319.
2. When the engine is started, the MI should go off.
If the MI remains on, the on board diagnostic system has LC
detected an engine system malfunction.
SAT652J
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION

The on board diagnostic system has the following four functions. FE
Diagnostic
KEY and ENG. Status Function Explanation of Function
Test Mode CL
Ignition switch in “ON” position
This function checks the MI bulb for damage

MT
BULB CHECK (blown, open circuit, etc.).
Engine stopped
If the MI does not come on, check MI circuit.
AT
This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunc- TF

Mode I
tion is detected twice in two consecutive driving
cycles (two trip detection logic), the MI will light up
Engine running to inform the driver that a malfunction has been PD
MALFUNCTION WARNING detected.
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the
MI in the 1st trip. FA
I “Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)”
I “One trip detection diagnoses”
Ignition switch in “ON” position RA
This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be BR

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Engine stopped read.
Mode II
ST
Engine running This function allows the fuel mixture condition (lean
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
MONITOR
or rich), monitored by heated oxygen sensor 1, to RS
be read.
MI flashing without DTC BT

If the ECM is in Diagnostic Test Mode II, MI may flash when engine is running. In this case, check ECM diag-
nostic test mode, EC-84 “HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE”. HA
How to switch the diagnostic test (function) modes, and details of the above functions are described later,
EC-84 “HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE”.
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased. EL
I Diagnostic trouble codes
I 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
I Freeze frame data SE
I 1st trip freeze frame data
I System readiness test (SRT) codes
I Test values IDX
I Others
EC-83
Malfunction Indicator (MI) (Cont’d)
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
NOTE:
I It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
I It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
I Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned “OFF”.
How to set diagnostic test mode II (Self-diagnostic results)
1. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch “ON” and wait 3 seconds.
2. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MI starts
blinking.
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
PBIB0092E
How to set diagnostic test mode II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor)

1. Set the ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-84, “How to set diagnostic
test mode II (Self-diagnostic results)”.
2. Start Engine.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor).
ECM will start heated oxygen sensor 1 monitoring from the bank 1 sensor.
How to switch monitored sensor from bank 1 to bank 2 or vice versa

1. Fully depress the accelerator pedal quickly and then release it immediately.
2. Make sure that monitoring sensor has changed by MI blinking as follows.
PBIB0093E
How to erase diagnostic test mode II (Self-diagnostic results)

1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-84, “How to set diagnostic test
mode II (Self-diagnostic results)”.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
EC-84
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK GI
In this mode, the MI on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to EL
section or see EC-319.
MA
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING
MI Condition EM
ON When the malfunction is detected.
OFF No malfunction. LC
I These DTC numbers are clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MI as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MI does not illuminate in diagnostic test mode FE
I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MI illu-
minates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are
displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These uni- CL
dentified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how
to read a code.
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
PBIA3905E
ST
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated
by the number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds
consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second) cycle. RS
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared. BT
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC “0000” refers to no
malfunction. (See EC-41.) HA
How to erase diagnostic test mode II (Self-diagnostic results)
The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to
EL
EC-84, “HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE”.
I If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory after approx 24 hours. SE
I Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
IDX
EC-85
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR
In this mode, the MI displays the condition of the fuel mixture (lean or rich) which is monitored by the heated
oxygen sensor 1.
MI Fuel mixture condition in the exhaust gas Air fuel ratio feedback control condition
ON Lean
Closed loop system
OFF Rich
*Remains ON or OFF Any condition Open loop system
*: Maintains conditions just before switching to open loop.
To check the heated oxygen sensor 1 function, start engine in the Diagnostic Test Mode II and warm it up until
engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of the gauge.
Next run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load conditions. Then make sure that the
MI comes ON more than 5 times within 10 seconds with engine running at 2,000 rpm under no-load.
OBD System Operation Chart

RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MI, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
I When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
I When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MI will come on. For details, refer to EC-69, “Two Trip Detection Logic”.
I The MI will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when
the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting,
the counter will reset.
I The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A)
without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel
Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driv-
ing pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS”
mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
I The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in “OK” for the 2nd trip.
SUMMARY CHART
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other
MI (goes off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A)
display)
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
*1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B)
(clear)
For details about patterns “B” and “C” under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-88.
For details about patterns “A” and “B” under “Other”, see EC-90.
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.
EC-86
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MI, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR GI
“MISFIRE” <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
SEF392SA
BT
*1: When the same malfunction is *4: The DTC and the freeze frame *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
detected in two consecutive trips, data will not be displayed any freeze frame data will be cleared HA
MI will light up. longer after vehicle is driven 80 at the moment OK is detected.
*2: MI will go off after vehicle is driven times (pattern C) without the same *7: When the same malfunction is
3 times (pattern B) without any malfunction. (The DTC and the detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st
malfunctions. freeze frame data still remain in trip freeze frame data will be EL
*3: When the same malfunction is ECM.) cleared.
detected in two consecutive trips, *5: When a malfunction is detected *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when
the DTC and the freeze frame for the first time, the 1st trip DTC
and the 1st trip freeze frame data
vehicle is driven once (pattern C) SE
data will be stored in ECM. without the same malfunction after
will be stored in ECM. DTC is stored in ECM.
IDX
EC-87
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
<Driving pattern B>
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
I The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
I The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
I The MI will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”)
<Driving pattern C>

Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows:
1. The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
I When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), “T” should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
I When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), “T” should be higher than or
equal to 70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F)
I The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1).
I The C counter will be counted up when (1) is satisfied without the same malfunction.
I The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80.
I The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
EC-88
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MI, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR GI
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
SEF393SA
BT
*1: When the same malfunction is *4: The DTC and the freeze frame *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after
detected in two consecutive trips, data will not be displayed any vehicle is driven once (pattern B) HA
MI will light up. longer after vehicle is driven 40 without the same malfunction.
*2: MI will go off after vehicle is driven times (pattern A) without the same *7: When the same malfunction is
3 times (pattern B) without any malfunction. detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st
malfunctions. (The DTC and the freeze frame trip freeze frame data will be EL
*3: When the same malfunction is data still remain in ECM.) cleared.
detected in two consecutive trips, *5: When a malfunction is detected
the DTC and the freeze frame for the first time, the 1st trip DTC
and the 1st trip freeze frame data
SE
data will be stored in ECM.
will be stored in ECM.
IDX
EC-89
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
<Driving pattern A>
AEC574
I The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
I The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
I The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
<Driving pattern B>

Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
I The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
I The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
I The MI will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”).
EC-90
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction GI

INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel MA
control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM
accepts input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators.
It is essential that both input and output signals are proper and EM
stable. At the same time, it is important that there are no malfunc-
tions such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunc-
tions with the engine. LC
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs inter-
MEF036D
mittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this
case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the
replacement of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A FE
roadtest with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected
should be performed. Follow the “Work Flow” on EC-92.
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with CL
a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
MT
what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the
SEF233G
example on EC-95 should be used. AT
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electroni-
cally controlled engine vehicle. TF
PD
FA
SEF234G
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-91
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction (Cont’d)
WORK FLOW
Flow chart
MBIB0159E
*1: If time data of “SELF-DIAG DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMIT- detected, perform EC-145,
RESULTS” is other than “0” or TENT INCIDENT”. “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
“[1t]”, perform EC-145, “TROUBLE *3: If the on board diagnostic system INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”.
DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMIT- cannot be performed, check main *5: EC-78, “Driving Pattern”
TENT INCIDENT”. power supply and ground circuit. *6: EC-141, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
*2: If time data of “SELF-DIAG Refer to EC-146, “POWER SUP- — SPECIFICATION VALUE”
RESULTS” is other than “0” or PLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM”.
“[1t]”, perform EC-145, “TROUBLE *4: If malfunctioning part cannot be
EC-92
Description for work flow GI
STEP DESCRIPTION
Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using the MA
STEP I
“DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET”, EC-94.
Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II or GST) the (1st trip) DTC and
the (1st trip) freeze frame data, then erase the DTC and the data. (Refer to EC-81, “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-
EM
RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”.) The (1st trip) DTC and the (1st trip) freeze frame data can be used
when duplicating the incident at STEP III & IV.
STEP II LC
If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-145, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”.
Study the relationship between the cause, specified by (1st trip) DTC, and the symptom described by the customer.
(The “Symptom Matrix Chart” will be useful. See EC-103.)
Also check related service bulletins for information.
Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs.
The “DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET” and the freeze frame data are useful to verify the incident. Connect CON- FE
STEP III SULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-145, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”.
If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V. CL
Try to detect the (1st trip) DTC by driving in (or performing) the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Check and read the
(1st trip) DTC and (1st trip) freeze frame data by using CONSULT-II or GST.
MT
During the (1st trip) DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
STEP IV
If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-145, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”. AT
In case the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” is not available, perform the “Overall Function Check” instead. The (1st
trip) DTC cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified “check” is an effective alternative.
The “NG” result of the “Overall Function Check” is the same as the (1st trip) DTC detection. TF
Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV.
If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PXXXX.
If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the BASIC INSPECTION. (Refer to EC-98.) If CONSULT-II is available, PD
STEP V
perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II and proceed to the “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECI-
FICATION VALUE”. (Refer to EC-141) (If malfunction is detected, proceed to “PERAIR/REPLACE”.) Then perform
inspections according to the Symptom Matrix Chart. (Refer to EC-103.) FA
Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes. Inspect
the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) “Harness Layouts”.
RA
Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT-II set in “DATA MONITOR
(AUTO TRIG)” mode.
Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CON- BR
SULT-II. Refer to EC-112, 136.
STEP VI
The “Diagnostic Procedure” in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit
inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to “Circuit Inspection” ST
in GI section.
Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
If malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform EC-145, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI- RS
DENT”.
Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions
and circumstances which resulted in the customer’s initial complaint. BT
Perform the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” and confirm the normal code [DTC No. P0000] is detected. If the inci-
STEP VII dent is still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a method different from the previous one.
Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) (1st trip) DTC in HA
ECM and TCM (Transmission control module). (Refer to EC-81, “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAG-
NOSTIC INFORMATION” and AT section.)
EL
SE
IDX
EC-93
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Description
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction
of engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make
troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about an incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a
customer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
SEF907L
Some conditions may cause the MI to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
I Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
I Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
EC-94
Worksheet sample GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
MTBL0017
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-95
DTC Inspection Priority Chart

If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following prior-
ity chart.
NOTE:
EC-154, “DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE”.
Priority Detected items (DTC)

I U1000 CAN communication line
I P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
I P0112 P0113 Intake air temperature sensor
I P0117 P0118 Engine coolant temperature sensor
I P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P1229 P2135 Throttle position sensor
I P0327 P0328 P0332 P0333 Knock sensor
I P0335 P1336 Crankshaft position sensor (OBD)
1
I P0340 Camshaft position sensor
I P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
I P0605 ECM
I P0705 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
I P1610-P1615 NATS
I P1706 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
I P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor
2 I P0031 P0032 P0051 P0052 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
I P0037 P0038 P0057 P0058 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
I P0132 P0133 P0134 P0152 P0153 P0154 P1143 P1144 P1163 P1164 Heated oxygen sensor 1
I P0138 P0139 P0158 P0159 P1146 P1147 P1166 P1167 Heated oxygen sensor 2
I P0550 Power steering pressure sensor
I P0740 P0745 A/T solenoid valves
I P1065 ECM power supply
I P1111 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
I P1122 Electric throttle control function
I P1124 P1126 P1128 Electric throttle control actuator
I P1805 Brake switch
3 I P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 Fuel injection system function
I P0300 - P0306 Misfire
I P0420 P0430 Three way catalyst function
I P0444 P0445 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
I P1121 Electric throttle control actuator
I P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)
EC-96
Fail-safe Chart GI
I When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
MA
P0102
Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0103 EM
P0117 Engine coolant temperature sen- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after
P0118 sor circuit turning ignition switch “ON” or “START”.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM. LC
Condition Engine coolant temperature decided
(CONSULT-II display)
Just as ignition switch is turned 40°C (104°F)
ON or Start
More than approx. 4 minutes 80°C (176°F)
after ignition ON or Start
FE
Except as shown above 40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
(Depends on the time) CL
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated,
the cooling fan operates while engine is running.
P0122 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle MT
P0123 opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0222 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than
P0223 the normal condition. AT
P2135 So, the acceleration will be poor.
P1121 Electric throttle control actuator While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle
(ECM detect the throttle valve is stops, the engine stalls. TF
stuck open.) The engine can restart in “N” or “P” position, and engine speed will not exceed
1,000 rpm or more.
P1122 Electric throttle control function ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is main- PD
tained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1124 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is main-
P1126 tained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. FA
P1128 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is main-
tained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring
RA
P1229 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is main-
tained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2122 Accelerator pedal position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle BR
P2123 opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P2127 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than
P2128 the normal condition.
P2138 So, the acceleration will be poor. ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-97
Basic Inspection
Preparation
I Make sure that the following parts are in (9) Engine compression
good order. (10) Throttle valve
(1) Battery I On air conditioner equipped models, checks
(2) Ignition system should be carried out while the air condi-
(3) Engine oil and coolant levels tioner is “OFF”.
(4) Fuses I When measuring “CO” percentage, insert
(5) ECM harness connector probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe.
(6) Vacuum hoses I Turn off headlamps, heater blower, rear win-
(7) Air intake system dow defogger.
(Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) I Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.
(8) Fuel pressure
Precaution:
Perform Basic Inspection without electrical or mechanical
loads applied;
I Headlamp switch is OFF,
I Air conditioner switch is OFF,
I Rear window defogger switch is OFF,
I Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
BEFORE STARTING
1. Check service records for any recent
repairs that may indicate a related
SEC297D
malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the fol-
lowing:
I Harness connectors for improper con-
nections
I Wiring harness for improper
connections, pinches, and cuts
I Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and
improper connections
I Hoses and ducts for leaks
I Air cleaner clogging
I Gasket
SEF976U
H
NG
1. Start engine and warm it up until E
Repair or replace compo-
engine coolant temperature indicator nents as necessary
points the middle of gauge. according to corresponding
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm. “Diagnostic Procedure”.
2. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for
about 2 minutes under no-load.
3. Make sure that no DTC is displayed
with CONSULT-II.
H OK H
q
A q
A
SEF977U
EC-98
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
q
A q
D
GI
H H
CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED.
NG
PERFORM THROTTLE
MA
E
VALVE CLOSED POSI-
With CONSULT-II TION LEARNING.
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for 1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-63, “Throttle
EM
about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or Valve Closed Position
three times under no-load, then run Learning”.
engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. LC
3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” OK
SEF978U mode with CONSULT-II. H
675±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
PERFORM IDLE AIR
Without CONSULT-II VOLUME LEARNING.
Refer to EC-63, “Idle Air
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for Volume Learning”.
about 2 minutes under no-load. Is “Idle Air Volume FE
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or Learning” carried out
three times under no-load, then run successfully?
engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
3. Check idle speed. Yes No CL
675±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position) H H
OK q
B q
C
q
C
MT
H
SEF058Y
1. Follow the construction AT
of “Idle Air Volume
Learning”.
2. Go to q D.
TF
H
NG
CHECK IGNITION TIMING. E ADJUST CAMSHAFT PD
1. Run engine at idle. POSITION SENSOR.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light. 1. Start engine and warm it
10±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position) up to normal operating
OK
temperature. FA
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “TARGET IGN
SEC536DA
TIM ADJ” in “WORK RA
SUPPORT”.
H 3. Touch start.
q
K 4. Adjust camshaft position
sensor using timing BR
light.
10°±5° BTDC
Without CON-
SULT-II
ST
OK 2. Adjust camshaft position
q
D F
sensor using timing
light. RS
10°±5° BTDC
NG
SEC537D H
BT
CHECK TIMING CHAIN
INSTALLATION.
Check timing chain instal- HA
lation.
Refer to “TIMING CHAIN”
in EM section.
EL
NG
H
q
D F Repair the timing chain
installation. SE
IDX
EC-99
q
B
H
CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN. NG Check the following.
E
I Check camshaft position
With CONSULT-II sensor and circuit. Refer
to EC-290.
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal
If NG, repair or replace.
operating temperature.
Then go to q D.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR”
mode with CONSULT-II. OK
H
675±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
CHECK ECM FUNCTION.
SEC536DA Without CONSULT-II 1. Substitute another
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal known-good ECM to
operating temperature. check ECM function.
2. Check idle speed. (ECM may be the cause
675±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position) of an incident, but this is
the rarely the case.)
OK 2. Perform initialization of
NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft
System) and registration
of NATS (Nissan Anti-
Theft System) ignition
key IDs. Refer to EC-82,
“NATS (Nissan Anti-
Theft System)”.
H
q
D
q
J
H H
CHECK IGNITION TIMING. NG PERFOR THROTTLE
E
1. Run engine at idle. VALVE CLOSED POSI-
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light. TION LEARNING.
10°±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position) 1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-63, “Throttle
OK Valve Closed Position
Learning”.
H
q
K H
PERFORM IDLE AIR
VOLUME LEARNING.
Refer to EC-63, “Idle Air
Volume Learning”.
Is “Idle Air Volume
Learning” carried out
successfully?
Yes No
H H
q
G q
H
q
H
H
1. Follow the construction
of “Idle Air Volume
Learning”.
2. Go to q D.
EC-100
q
G q
I
GI
H H
NG
CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN. E Check the following. MA
I Check camshaft position
With CONSULT-II sensor and circuit. Refer
to EC-290.
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal If NG, repair or replace. EM
operating temperature. Then go to q D.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR”
675±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position) H LC
Without CONSULT-II CHECK ECM FUNCTION.
SEC536DA 1. Substitute another
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal known-good ECM to
operating temperature. check ECM function.
2. Check idle speed. (ECM may be the cause
675±50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position) of a problem, but this is
the rarely the case.) FE
OK 2. Perform initialization of
NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft
System) and registration CL
of NATS (Nissan Anti-
Theft System) ignition
key IDs. Refer to EC-82,
“NATS (Nissan Anti- MT
Theft System)”.
SEC537D
H AT
q
D
H
NG
TF
CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN. E ADJUST CAMSHAFT
1. Run engine at idle. POSITION SENSOR.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light. 1. Start engine and warm it PD
10±5° BTDC (in “P” or “N” position) up to normal operating
temperature.
OK
With CONSULT-II FA
2. Select “TARGET IGN
TIM ADJ” in “WORK
SUPPORT”. RA
H 3. Touch start.
q
K 4. Adjust camshaft position
sensor using timing
light. BR
10°±5° BTDC
Without CON-
SULT-II
OK ST
q
J F 2. Adjust camshaft position
sensor using timing
light.
10°±5° BTDC RS
NG
H BT
CHECK TIMING CHAIN
INSTALLATION.
Check timing chain instal-
lation. Refer to EM section, HA
“TIMING CHAIN”.
If NG, repair the timing
chain installation. Then go
to qD.
EL
H OK
q
I SE
IDX
EC-101
q
K
With three way

catalyst
H
Set the diagnostic test mode II (Heated
oxygen sensor 1 monitor). Refer to EC-84.
H
Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about
2 minutes under no-load.
SAT652J
H
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 NG Check oxygen sensor and
E
SIGNAL. the circuit.
With CONSULT-II
OK
1. See “HO2S1 MNTR” in “DATA MONI-
TOR” mode.
2. Maintaining engine at 2,000 rpm under
no-load (engine is warmed up to nor-
mal operating temperature), check that
the monitor fluctuates between “LEAN”
and “RICH” more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
1 cycle: RICH → LEAN → RICH
2 cycles: RICH → LEAN → RICH →
LEAN → RICH
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
Without CONSULT-II
Make sure that malfunction indicator lamp

goes on and off more than 5 times during
10 seconds at 2,000 rpm.
OK
F
H
ERASE UNNECESSARY DTC.
After this inspection, unnecessary DTC
No. might be displayed.
Erase the stored memory in ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module).
Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-
RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION,
EC-81.
OK
H
INSPECTION END
EC-102
Symptom Matrix Chart GI

SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
SYMPTOM
MA
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
EM
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

LC
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

SYSTEM
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
— Basic engine control system Reference page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
OVERCHARGING
ENGINE STALL
OVERCOOLS
FE
CL
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM 1P 1X HA
Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 EC-492
Fuel pressure regulator system 2 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-66 MT
Injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 EC-486
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-302
Air Positive crankcase ventilation system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-514 AT
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 EC-62
EC-332
Electric throttle control actuator 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
EC-334 TF
EC-342
EC-348
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-62 PD
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-461
Main power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 EC-146
Cooling Cooling fan circuit 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 1 3 EC-394 FA
Air conditioner circuit 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 HA section
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-103
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
SYMPTOM




SYSTEM
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
— Engine control system Reference page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
OVERCHARGING
ENGINE STALL
OVERCOOLS
Engine con- Camshaft position sensor circuit 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 EC-290
trol Mass air flow sensor circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-173
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 1 1 2 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 EC-185
EC-268
EC-405
Throttle position sensor circuit 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
EC-407
EC-448
EC-434
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1 2 2 EC-441
EC-454
EC-205
EC-405
Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit 1 2 3 2 2 2 2
EC-353
EC-360
Intake valve timing control system 3 3 2 3 3 3 EC-327
Vehicle speed sensor circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-309
Knock sensor circuit 2 2 2 3 EC-280
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 EC-316
Start signal circuit 2 EC-483
Park/Neutral position switch circuit 3 3 3 3 3 EC-421
Variable Induction Air Control (VIAS) sys-
2 EC-479
tem
Electrical load signal circuit 2 3 3 EC-503
Power steering pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 EC-311
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
EC-104
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER GI
SYMPTOM

MA



EM


SYSTEM
LC
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
— Engine mechanical & other Reference page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
OVERCHARGING
ENGINE STALL
OVERCOOLS
FE
Fuel Fuel tank 5 FE section
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
CL
Vapor lock
5
Valve deposit
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, Low 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 MT
octane)
—
Air Air duct 5
Air cleaner AT
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — Electric throttle
control actuator) 5 5 5 5 5 5
Electric throttle control actuator, Throttle 5 5 5 5 5
TF
FE section
wire
Air leakage from intake manifold/
Collector/Gasket
— PD
Cranking Battery
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Alternator circuit EL section
Starter circuit 3 FA
PNP switch 4 AT section
Drive plate 6 EM section
Engine Cylinder head RA
Cylinder head gasket 4
Cylinder block
6
Piston
Piston ring
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 BR
Connecting rod
EM section
Bearing
Crankshaft 6 ST
Valve Timing chain 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
mechanism Camshaft 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Intake valve
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
RS
Exhaust valve
Exhaust EM section &
Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/Gasket 5 5 5 5 5
FE section BT
Three way catalyst* 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 FE section
Lubrication Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil filter/Oil
gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil
HA
Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap LC section
Thermostat 2
Water pump EL
5 5 5 5 4 5
Water gallery
Cooling fan 2 EC section
Coolant level (low)/Contaminated coolant MA section SE
NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System) EC-82 or EL
1 1
section
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. IDX
EC-105
Engine Control Component Parts Location
SEC666D
EC-106
(Cont’d) GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
SEC733D
EC-107
(Cont’d)
SEC734D
EC-108
(Cont’d) GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
SEC744D
EC-109
Circuit Diagram
TEC410M
EC-110
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
TEC450M
IDX
EC-111
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
PBIB0075E
ECM Terminals and Reference Value

PREPARATION
1. ECM is located behind the center console. For this inspection,
remove instrument lower driver panel.
2. Remove ECM harness protector.
SEC667D
3. Perform all voltage measurements with the connector con-

nected. Extend tester probe as shown to perform tests easily.
I Open harness securing clip to make testing easily.
I Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
I Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
MEC486B
ECM INSPECTION TABLE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between
each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
EC-112
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TERMINAL WIRE
GI
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC voltage)
NO. COLOR
BATTERY VOLTAGE MA
(11 - 14V)*1
Engine is running.
EM
Warm-up condition
Idle speed LC
5 BR/W Injector No. 1
6 GY/L Injector No. 2
SEC984C
7 BR/Y Injector No. 3
13 GY/R Injector No. 4 BATTERY VOLTAGE
14 BR Injector No. 5 (11 - 14V)*1 FE
15 GY Injector No. 6
Engine is running.
CL
Warm-up condition
MT
SEC985C
AT
Approximately 7.0V*1
TF
Engine is running.
Heated oxygen Warm-up condition

8 G/Y sensor 1 heater Engine speed is below 2,800 rpm. PD
(bank 2)
PBIB0519E FA
Engine is running. BATTERY VOLTAGE
Engine speed is above 2,800 rpm. (11 - 14V) RA
Approximately 7.0V*1
BR
Engine is running.
Heated oxygen Warm-up condition ST

9 Y/B sensor 1 heater Engine speed is below 2,800 rpm.
(bank 1)
RS
PBIB0519E
Engine is running. BATTERY VOLTAGE BT

Engine speed is above 2,800 rpm. (11 - 14V)
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-113
TERMINAL WIRE
NO. COLOR
Engine is running.
Warm-up condition
After keeping engine speed between 0 - 1.0V
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for one minute and
Heated oxygen at idle for one minute under no load
10 Y/R sensor 2 heater Engine speed is below 3,200 rpm
(bank 2)
Ignition switch “ON”
Engine stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE

Engine is running. (11 - 14V)
Engine speed is above 3,200 rpm

Engine is running.
Warm-up condition
After keeping engine speed between 0 - 1.0V
Heated oxygen at idle for one minute under no load
11 R/G sensor 2 heater Engine speed is below 3,200 rpm
(bank 1)
Engine stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE

Engine speed is above 3,200 rpm

0 - 0.1V*1
Engine is running.
Warm-up condition
Idle speed
18 Y/R Ignition signal No. 1
19 G Ignition signal No. 2
20 Y Ignition signal No. 3 SEC986C
21 R/B Ignition signal No. 4 0 - 0.2V*1

29 R/G Ignition signal No. 5
30 R Ignition signal No. 6
Engine is running.
Warm-up condition
SEC987C
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Throttle control Ignition switch “OFF”
26 P/L (11 - 14V)
motor relay
Ignition switch “ON” 0 - 1.0V
Idle speed (11 - 14V)
VIAS control sole-
27 LG/R
noid valve Engine is running.
0 - 1.0V
Engine speed is above 5,000 rpm.
EC-114
TERMINAL WIRE
GI
NO. COLOR
Ignition switch “ON” 0 - 1.0V MA
35 Y/G MI Engine is running. BATTERY VOLTAGE
Idle speed (11 - 14V) EM
For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch 0 - 1.0V

LC
“ON”
41 R/Y Fuel pump relay Engine is running.

BATTERY VOLTAGE
More than 5 seconds after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch “ON” FE
Engine is running.
Ignition switch “OFF” CL
0 - 1.0V
For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch
ECM relay
42 B/Y “OFF” MT
(Self shut-off)
Ignition switch “OFF”
BATTERY VOLTAGE
5 seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V) AT
switch “OFF”
Ignition switch “OFF” 0V
53 W/G Ignition switch
TF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE PD
(11 - 14V)*1
FA
Engine is running.
Idle speed RA
EVAP canister SEC990C

BR
54 W/B purge volume con-
trol solenoid valve BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)*1 ST
Engine is running.
RS
Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More
than 100 seconds after starting engine).
BT
SEC991C
HA
Engine is running.
0 - 1.0V
Cooling fan is operating at high speed.
55 L/B
Cooling fan relay EL
(High) Engine is running. BATTERY VOLTAGE
Cooling fan is not operating. (11 - 14V)
SE
IDX
EC-115
TERMINAL WIRE
NO. COLOR
Engine is running.
0 - 1.0V
Cooling fan relay Cooling fan is operating.
56 L
(Low) Engine is running. BATTERY VOLTAGE
Ignition switch “ON” Approximately 0V

59 R/W Start signal
Ignition switch “START” 9 - 14V
Approx. 0V
Snow mode switch is “OFF”
60 Y/G Snow mode switch
Ignition switch “ON” BATTERY VOLTAGE
Snow mode switch is “ON” (11 - 14V)
Approx. 2.6 - 2.7V*1
Engine is running.
Warm-up condition
Idle speed
Camshaft position SEC750D

63 B/W sensor (POS sig-
nal) Approx. 2.5 - 2.6V*1
Engine is running.
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
SEC751D

Approximately 0V
Gear position is Neutral.
80 R/PU PNP switch
Approximately 5V
Except the above gear position
EC-116
TERMINAL WIRE
GI
NO. COLOR
Approx. 0.3 - 0.6V*1 MA
Engine is running. (Warm-up condition) EM

Idle speed
LC
SEC746D
83 L Camshaft position
84 L sensor (REF signal) Approx. 0.3 - 0.6V*1
FE
Engine is running.
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm CL
SEC747D MT
Engine stopped More than 0.36V AT

Gear position is “D”
Accelerator pedal Accelerator pedal fully released
87 W TF
position sensor 1 Ignition switch “ON”
Engine stopped Less than 4.75V

Gear position is “D” PD
Accelerator pedal fully depressed
Engine is running.
FA
Refrigerant pres- Warm-up condition
88 R/G Both A/C switch and blower switch are 1.0 - 4.0V
sure sensor
“ON”
RA
(Compressor operates)
Engine is running.
89 B Sensors’ ground Approximately 0V BR
Warm-up condition
Idle speed
Engine is running. ST
0.75 - 1.2V
Warm-up condition
Idle speed
91 W/G
Mass air flow sen- RS
sor Engine is running.
1.7 - 2.4V
Warm-up condition
BT
Accelerator pedal
94 LG position sensor 2 Ignition switch “ON” Approximately 2.5V HA
power supply
Power supply for BATTERY VOLTAGE
95 W
ECM (Buck-up)
(11 - 14V)
EL
SE
IDX
EC-117
TERMINAL WIRE
NO. COLOR

Throttle position Accelerator pedal fully released
98 R/L
sensor 2 Ignition switch “ON”
Engine stopped More than 0.36V

Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Intake air tempera-
99 L/W Engine is running. Output voltage varies with
ture sensor
intake air temperature.
Accelerator pedal
100 R position sensor 2 Ignition switch “ON” Approximately 0V
ground
Sensors’ power
103 Y Ignition switch “ON” Approximately 5V
supply
Engine is running.
Approximately 0V
Brake pedal fully released
106 G/Y Stop lamp switch
Brake pedal fully depressed (11 - 14V)

Throttle position Accelerator pedal fully released
108 L

Engine is running.
Mass air flow sen-
109 B/W Approximately 0V
sor ground Warm-up condition
Idle speed
EC-118
TERMINAL WIRE
GI
NO. COLOR
1 - 2V MA
(AC range)
Engine is running.
EM
Warm-up condition
Idle speed LC
SEC748D
Crankshaft position
111 W
sensor (OBD) 3 - 4V
(AC range) FE
Engine is running. CL
MT
SEC749D
AT
Engine is running.
Heated oxygen 0 - Approximately 1.0V (Peri-
114 W
sensor 1 (bank 1) Warm-up condition odically change)
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. TF
Engine is running.
Heated oxygen 0 - Approximately 1.0V (Peri-
115 W
sensor 1 (bank 2) Warm-up condition odically change) PD
FA
117 G
Accelerator pedal Accelerator pedal fully released RA
position sensor 2 Ignition switch “ON”
Engine stopped Less than 2.37V BR

Engine is running. ST
0.5 - 4.5V
Power steering Steering wheel is being turned
118 BR/W
pressure sensor Engine is running. RS
0.4 - 0.8V
Steering wheel is not being turned
Approximately 0 - 4.8V BT
Engine coolant tem-
121 LG/B Engine is running. Output voltage varies with
perature sensor
engine coolant temperature.
HA
Engine is running.
Warm-up condition
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm EL
Heated oxygen quickly after the following conditions are
123 W 0 - Approximately 1.0V
sensor 2 (bank 2) met
After keeping the engine speed between SE
at idle for one minute under no load
IDX
EC-119
TERMINAL WIRE
NO. COLOR
Engine is running.
Warm-up condition
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
Heated oxygen quickly after the following conditions are
124 W 0 - Approximately 1.0V
sensor 2 (bank 1) met
After keeping the engine speed between
at idle for one minute under no load
Knock sensor
125 W (Bank 1) Engine is running.
Approximately 2.5V
126 W Knock sensor Idle speed
(Bank 2)
0 - 14V*1

Throttle control
151 L/W Engine stopped
motor (Open) Gear position is “D”
Accelerator pedal is depressing
PBIB1105E
Engine is running.
Warm-up condition
Engine speed is between 1,000 rpm and
4,200 rpm Approximately 0V
Intake valve timing
152 R control solenoid During high load condition
valve Vehicle speed is more than 8 km/h (5
MPH)
Those other than above (11 - 14V)
153 B
156 B Engine is running.
159 B ECM ground Engine ground
165 B Idle speed
168 B
0 - 14V*1

Throttle control
154 L/B Engine stopped
motor (Close) Gear position is “D”
Accelerator pedal is releasing
PBIB1105E
Throttle control
BATTERY VOLTAGE
157 G motor relay power Ignition switch “ON”
(11 - 14V)
supply
163 Power supply for BATTERY VOLTAGE
B/R Ignition switch “ON”
166 ECM (11 - 14V)
164 PU Data link connector
CONSULT-II or GST is disconnected. (11 - 14V)
EC-120
TERMINAL WIRE
GI
NO. COLOR
CAN communica-
Approximately 1.7 - 2.3V MA
171 W/R Ignition switch “ON” Output voltage varies with the
tion line
communication status.
Approximately 2.6 - 3.2V
EM
CAN communica-
174 G/B Ignition switch “ON” Output voltage varies with the
tion line
communication status.
LC
*1: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-121
CONSULT-II Function
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the
Work support
indications on the CONSULT-II unit.
Self-diagnostic results Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame
data can be read and erased quickly.*1
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Data monitor (SPEC) Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the
other data monitor items can be read.
Active test Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also
shifts some parameters in a specified range.
Function test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance.
DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
ECM part number ECM part number can be read.
*1: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
I Diagnostic trouble codes
I 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
I Freeze frame data
I 1st trip freeze frame data
I System readiness test (SRT) codes
I Test values
I Others
EC-122
CONSULT-II Function (Cont’d)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION GI
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
SELF-DIAGNOS-
DTC & SRT CON- MA
TIC
DATA FIRMATION
WORK RESULTS DATA
Item MONI- ACTIVE
SUP- MONI-
PORT FREEZE TOR
TOR TEST DTC EM
(SPEC) SRT WORK
DTC*1 FRAME
STATUS SUP-
DATA
PORT
Crankshaft position sensor
LC
x x x x
(OBD)
Camshaft position sensor x x x x
Mass air flow sensor x x x
Engine coolant temperature sen-
x x x x x
sor FE
Heated oxygen sensor 1 x x x x x
Heated oxygen sensor 2 x x x x x
Vehicle speed signal x x x x
CL
Accelerator pedal position sensor x x x
Throttle position sensor x x x MT
INPUT
Intake air temperature sensor x x x x

Knock sensor x
AT
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
Refrigerant pressure sensor x x

Closed throttle position switch
(accelerator pedal position sen- x x TF
sor signal)
Air conditioner switch x x
x x x PD
switch
Stop lamp switch x x x
Power steering pressure sensor x x x FA
Battery voltage x x
Electrical load signal x x RA
Injectors x x x
Power transistor (Ignition timing) x x x
Throttle control motor relay x x x BR
Throttle control motor x
EVAP canister purge volume
x x x x ST
control solenoid valve
OUTPUT
Air conditioner relay x x

Fuel pump relay x x x x RS
Cooling fan relay x x x x
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater x x x x
BT
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater x x x x
Intake valve timing control sole-
x x x x
noid valve HA
Calculated load value x x x
VIAS control solenoid valve x x x
EL
x: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame
data mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-73, “FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP SE
FREEZE FRAME DATA”.
IDX
EC-123
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to
data link connector, which is located under the drivers side
dash panel.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
SAT619K
4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
MBIB0233E
If “ENGINE” is not indicated, go to GI section, “CONSULT-II
Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit”.
SEF995X
6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service

procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual.
SEF824Y
EC-124
WORK SUPPORT MODE GI
Work item
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE MA
I FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START”
When releasing fuel pressure from
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE DURING IDLING.
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
fuel line EM
I THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED When learning the idle air volume
IN ECM.
LC
I THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
When clearing the coefficient of
SELF-LEARNING CONT MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL
self-learning control value
COEFFICIENT.
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* I IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* I IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition timing FE
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
CL
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE
Self diagnostic item
MT
Regarding items of “DTC and 1st trip DTC”, refer to EC-41, “INDEX FOR DTC”.
Freeze frame data and 1st trip freeze frame data AT

Freeze frame data
Description
item*1
TF
DIAG TROUBLE CODE I The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as “PXXXX”.
[PXXXX] (Refer to EC-41, “INDEX FOR DTC”.)
FUEL SYS-B1 I “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. PD
I One mode in the following is displayed.
“MODE 2”: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
“MODE 3”: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enrichment)
FA
FUEL SYS-B2
“MODE 4”: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
“MODE 5”: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
RA
CAL/LD VALUE [%] I The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP [°C] or I The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°F] BR
L-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] I “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
I The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule ST
than short-term fuel trim.
S-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] I “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
I The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel RS
schedule.
ENGINE SPEED [rpm] I The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
BT
VHCL SPEED [km/h] or I The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[mph]
B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] I The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. HA
INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or I The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°F] EL
*1: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
SE
IDX
EC-125
DATA MONITOR MODE
Monitored item
x: Applicable
CAN
ECM
MAIN DIAG
INPUT
Monitored item [Unit] SIG- SUP- Description Remarks
SIG-
NALS PORT
NALS
MNTR
I Accuracy becomes poor if engine
I Indicates the engine speed com-
speed drops below the idle rpm.
puted from the POS signal (1° sig-
ENG SPEED [rpm] x x I If the signal is interrupted while the
nal) of the camshaft position sen-
engine is running, an abnormal
sor.
value may be indicated.
I The signal voltage of the mass air I When the engine is stopped, a
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] x x
flow sensor is displayed. certain value is indicated.
I “Base fuel schedule” indicates the
B/FUEL SCHDL fuel injection pulse width pro-
x
[msec] grammed into ECM, prior to any
learned on board correction.
I When the engine is stopped, a
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] x I The mean value of the air-fuel certain value is indicated.
ratio feedback correction factor per I This data also includes the data
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%] x cycle is indicated. for the air-fuel ratio learning con-
trol.
I When the engine coolant tempera-
I The engine coolant temperature ture sensor is open or short-
COOLAN TEMP/S (determined by the signal voltage circuited, ECM enters fail-safe
x x
[°C] or [°F] of the engine coolant temperature mode. The engine coolant tem-
sensor) is displayed. perature determined by the ECM is
displayed.
HO2S1 (B1) [V] x x I The signal voltage of the heated
HO2S1 (B2) [V] x oxygen sensor 1 is displayed.
HO2S2 (B1) [V] x x I The signal voltage of the heated
HO2S2 (B2) [V] x oxygen sensor 2 is displayed.
I Display of heated oxygen sensor 1
signal during air-fuel ratio feedback
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) I After turning ON the ignition
x x control:
[RICH/LEAN] switch, “RICH” is displayed until
RICH ... means the mixture
air-fuel mixture ratio feedback con-
became “rich”, and control is being
trol begins.
affected toward a leaner mixture.
I When the air-fuel ratio feedback is
LEAN ... means the mixture
HO2S1 MNTR (B2) clamped, the value just before the
x became “lean”, and control is
[RICH/LEAN] clamping is displayed continuously.
being affected toward a rich mix-
ture.
I Display of heated oxygen sensor 2
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) signal:
x
[RICH/LEAN] RICH ... means the amount of oxy-
gen after three way catalyst is I When the engine is stopped, a
relatively small. certain value is indicated.
HO2S2 MNTR (B2) LEAN ... means the amount of
x
[RICH/LEAN] oxygen after three way catalyst is
relatively large.
I The vehicle speed computed from
VHCL SPEED SE
x x the vehicle speed signal is dis-
[km/h] or [mph]
played.
EC-126
CAN
GI
ECM
MAIN DIAG
INPUT
SIG-
NALS PORT
MA
NALS
MNTR
I The power supply voltage of ECM EM
BATTERY VOLT [V] x x
is displayed.
ACCEL SEN 1 [V] x x I The accelerator pedal position
ACCEL SEN 2 [V] x sensor signal voltage is displayed. LC
THRTL SEN 1 [V] x x I The throttle position sensor signal
THRTL SEN 2 [V] x voltage is displayed.
I The intake air temperature (deter-
INT/A TEMP SE [°C] mined by the signal voltage of the
x x
or [°F] intake air temperature sensor) is FE
indicated.
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of
the starter signal computed from CL
I After starting the engine, [OFF] is
START SIGNAL the signals of the crankshaft posi-
x x displayed regardless of the starter
[ON/OFF] tion sensor (POS), camshaft posi-
tion sensor (PHASE) and battery
signal. MT
voltage.
I Indicates idle position [ON/OFF]
CLSD THL POS computed by ECM according to
AT
x x
[ON/OFF] the accelerator pedal position sen-
sor signal.
TF
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of
AIR COND SIG
x x the air conditioner switch as deter-
[ON/OFF]
mined by the air conditioner signal. PD
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
P/N POSI SW
x x the park/neutral position (PNP)
[ON/OFF]
switch signal. FA
I [ON/OFF] condition of the power
PW/ST SIGNAL steering oil pressure switch as
[ON/OFF]
x x
determined by the power steering
RA
oil pressure signal is indicated.
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
BR
the electrical load signal.
ON ... Rear window defogger
LOAD SIGNAL
x x switch is ON and/or lighting switch ST
[ON/OFF]
is in 2nd position.
OFF ... Both rear window defogger
switch and lighting switch are OFF. RS
IGNITION SW I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
x
[ON/OFF] ignition switch.
BRAKE SW I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from BT
x
[ON/OFF] the stop lamp switch signal.
INJ PULSE-B1
[msec]
x I Indicates the actual fuel injection I When the engine is stopped, a HA
pulse width compensated by ECM certain computed value is indi-
INJ PULSE-B2
according to the input signals. cated.
[msec] EL
I Indicates the ignition timing com-
I When the engine is stopped, a
IGN TIMING [BTDC] x puted by ECM according to the
certain value is indicated.
input signals. SE
I “Calculated load value” indicates
CAL/LD VALUE [%] the value of the current airflow
divided by peak airflow. IDX
EC-127
CAN
ECM
MAIN DIAG
INPUT
SIG-
NALS PORT
NALS
MNTR
I Indicates the mass airflow com-
MASS AIRFLOW puted by ECM according to the
[g⋅m/s] signal voltage of the mass air flow
sensor.
I Indicates the EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve con-
trol value computed by the ECM
PURG VOL C/V [%]
according to the input signals.
I The opening becomes larger as
the value increases.
I The control condition of the VIAS
control solenoid valve (determined
by ECM according to the input sig-
nal) is indicated.
VIAS S/V [ON/OFF]
I OFF ... VIAS control solenoid
valve is not operating.
I ON ... VIAS control solenoid valve
is operating.
I The control condition of the intake
valve timing control solenoid valve
(determined by ECM according to
the input signals) is indicated.
INT/V SOL (B1) [%]
ON ... intake valve timing control is
operating.
OFF ... Intake valve timing control
is not operating.
I The air conditioner relay control
AIR COND RLY condition (determined by ECM
x
[ON/OFF] according to the input signals) is
indicated.
I Indicates the fuel pump relay con-
FUEL PUMP RLY
x trol condition determined by ECM
[ON/OFF]
according to the input signals.
I Indicates the throttle control motor
THRTL RELAY relay control condition determined
x*2
[ON/OFF] by the ECM according to the input
signals.
I Indicates the condition of the cool-
ing fan (determined by ECM
COOLING FAN according to the input signals).
[HI/LOW/OFF] HI ... High speed operation
LOW ... Low speed operation
OFF ... Stop
HO2S1 HTR (B1) I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of
[ON/OFF] heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
HO2S1 HTR (B2) determined by ECM according to
[ON/OFF] the input signals.
HO2S2 HTR (B1) I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of
[ON/OFF] heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
HO2S2 HTR (B2) determined by ECM according to
[ON/OFF] the input signals.
EC-128
CAN
GI
ECM
MAIN DIAG
INPUT
SIG-
NALS PORT
MA
NALS
MNTR
I Display the condition of idle air EM
volume learning
YET ... Idle air volume learning
IDL A/V LEARN
[YET/CMPLT]
has not been performed yet. LC
CMPLT ... Idle air volume learning
has already been performed suc-
cessfully.
TRVL AFTER MIL I Distance traveled while MI is acti-
[km] or [mile] vated.
I Indicates the heated oxygen sen-
FE
O2SEN HTR DTY sor 1 heater control value com-
[%] puted by the ECM according to the
input signals.
CL
I The signal voltage from the refrig-
AC PRESS SEN [V] x
erant pressure sensor is displayed. MT
Voltage [V]
Frequency I Only “#” is displayed if item is
[msec], [Hz] or [%] I Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or
unable to be measured. AT
I Figures with “#”s are temporary
DUTY-HI pulse width measured by the
ones. They are the same figures
DUTY-LOW probe.
as an actual piece of data which TF
PLS WIDTH-HI was just previously measured.
PLS WIDTH-LOW
CAN COMM PD
x
[OK/NG]
CAN CIRC 1
[OK/UNKWN]
x FA
CAN CIRC 2
x
[OK/UNKWN] RA
CAN CIRC 3
x I These items are not displayed in
[OK/UNKWN] I Indicates the communication con-
“SELECTION FROM MENU”
CAN CIRC 4 dition of CAN communication line. BR
x mode.
[OK/UNKWN]
CAN CIRC 5
[OK/UNKWN]
x ST
CAN CIRC 6
x
[OK/UNKWN] RS
CAN CIRC 7
x
[OK/UNKWN]
BT
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-129
DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE
Monitored item
ECM input Main sig-
Monitored item [Unit] Description Remarks
signals nals
I Indicates the engine speed computed
ENG SPEED [rpm] x x from the POS signal (1° signal) of the
camshaft position sensor.
I The signal voltage of the mass air I When engine is running specification
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] x x
flow sensor specification is displayed. range is indicated.
I “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
B/FUEL SCHDL injection pulse width programmed into I When engine is running specification
x
[msec] ECM, prior to any learned on board range is indicated.
correction.
I When engine is running specification
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] x I The mean value of the air-fuel ratio
range is indicated.
feedback correction factor per cycle is
I This data also includes the data for
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%] x indicated.
the air-fuel ratio learning control.
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
ACTIVE TEST MODE
Test item
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
I Engine: Return to the original
I Harness and connectors
trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
FUEL INJECTION I Fuel injectors
I Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM.
I Heated oxygen sensor 1
tion using CONSULT-II.
trouble condition
If trouble symptom disappears, see I Perform “Idle Air Volume Learn-
IGNITION TIMING I Timing light: Set
CHECK ITEM. ing”.
I Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-II.
I Engine: After warming up, idle the I Harness and connectors
engine. I Compression
POWER BAL- I A/C switch “OFF” I Fuel injectors
Engine runs rough or dies.
ANCE I Shift lever “N” I Power transistor
I Cut off each injector signal one at I Spark plugs
a time using CONSULT-II. I Ignition coils
I Ignition switch: ON I Harness and connectors
COOLING FAN* I Turn the cooling fan “ON” and Cooling fan moves and stops. I Cooling fan relay
“OFF” with CONSULT-II. I Cooling fan motor
I Engine: Return to the original I Harness and connectors
ENG COOLANT trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see I Engine coolant temperature sen-
TEMP I Change the engine coolant tem- CHECK ITEM. sor
perature using CONSULT-II. I Fuel injectors
I Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
FUEL PUMP Fuel pump relay makes the operat- I Harness and connectors
I Turn the fuel pump relay “ON”
RELAY ing sound. I Fuel pump relay
and “OFF” using CONSULT-II and
listen to operating sound.
I Ignition switch: ON
I Turn solenoid valve “ON” and Solenoid valve makes an operating I Harness and connectors
VIAS SOL VALVE
“OFF” with CONSULT-II and listen sound. I Solenoid valve
for operating sound.
EC-130
GI
I Engine: After warming up, run
engine at 1,500 rpm. MA
PURG VOL I Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according to I Harness and connectors
CONT/V volume control solenoid valve the opening percent. I Solenoid valve
opening percent using CONSULT- EM
II.
V/T ASSIGN trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
I Harness and connectors LC
I Intake valve timing control sole-
ANGLE I Change intake valve timing using CHECK ITEM.
noid valve
CONSULT-II.
*: Leaving cooling fan “OFF” with CONSULT-II while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE FE

SRT STATUS mode
For details, refer to EC-74, “SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE”. CL
SRT work support mode
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status. MT
DTC work support mode

AT
Test mode Test item Condition Reference page
HO2S1 (B1) P0133, P0153 EC-205
TF
HO2S1 (B1) P0134, P0154 EC-218
HO2S1
HO2S1 (B1) P1143, P1163 EC-353
Refer to corresponding PD
HO2S1 (B1) P1144, P1164 EC-360
trouble diagnosis for DTC.
HO2S2 (B1) P0139, P0159 EC-238
H02S2 HO2S2 (B1) P1146, P1166 EC-368
FA
HO2S2 (B1) P1147, P1167 EC-381
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-131
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE
(RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)
Description
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by
touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger):
I The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen in
real time.
In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be
displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM.
SEF705Y
At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONITOR”
in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording Data ...
xx%” as shown at right, and the data after the malfunction
detection is recorded. Then when the percentage reached
100%, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If “STOP” is
touched on the screen during “Recording Data ... xx%”, “REAL-
TIME DIAG” screen is also displayed.
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and
“Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION
MANUAL.
2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger):
SEF707X I DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed
automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunc-
tion is detected by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though
a malfunction is detected.
Operation
1. “AUTO TRIG”
I While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the
“DTC Confirmation Procedure”, be sure to select to “DATA
MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunc-
tion at the moment it is detected.
I While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II
should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode, espe-
cially in case the incident is intermittent.
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twist-
ing) the suspicious connectors, components and harness in the
“DTC Confirmation Procedure”, the moment a malfunction is
found the DTC/1st trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to “Incident
Simulation Tests” in GI section.)
2. “MANU TRIG”
I If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is
selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU TRIG”. By selecting
“MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data
can be utilized for further diagnosis, such as a comparison with
the value for the normal operating condition.
EC-132
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PBIB0197E
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-133
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function

DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with ISO 15031-4
has 8 different functions explained below.
ISO9141 is used as the protocol.
The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service
manual.
SEF139P
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function

This mode gains access to current emission-related data values, including analog
MODE 1 READINESS TESTS
inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
This mode gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by ECM dur-
MODE 2 (FREEZE DATA) ing the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-73, “FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST
TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA”.
This mode gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which were
MODE 3 DTCs
stored by ECM.
This mode can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This includes:
I Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 1)
I Clear diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 3)
MODE 4 CLEAR DIAG INFO I Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (MODE 1)
I Clear freeze frame data (MODE 2)
I Reset status of system monitoring test (MODE 1)
I Clear on board monitoring test results (MODE 6 and 7)
This mode accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of specific
MODE 6 (ON BOARD TESTS)
components/systems that are not continuously monitored.
This mode enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-related
MODE 7 (ON BOARD TESTS) powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal driving
conditions.
MODE 8 — This mode is not applicable on this vehicle.
This mode enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle information
MODE 9 (CALIBRATION ID)
such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.
GST INSPECTION PROCEDURE

2. Connect “GST” to data link connector, which is located under
the driver side dash panel near the fuse box cover.
SAT619K
EC-134
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function (Cont’d)
4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in GI
the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.) MA
EM
LC
SEF398S
5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service pro-

cedure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of the
tool maker. FE
CL
MT
SEF416S
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-135
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor

Mode
Remarks:
I Specification data are reference values.
I Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show
the specification data in spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN
TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM according to the signals input from the camshaft posi-
tion sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
ENG SPEED I Tachometer: Connect Almost the same speed as the
I Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indica- tachometer indication.
tion.
MAS A/F SE-B1 I Engine: After warming up Idle Approx. 1.3 - 1.7V
I Air conditioner switch: OFF
I Shift lever: N 2,500 rpm Approx. 1.7 - 2.4V
I No-load
B/FUEL SCHDL I Engine: After warming up Idle 5.0 - 5.5 msec
I Shift lever: N
I Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 5.0 - 5.5 msec
I No-load
A/F ALPHA-B1 I Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 75% - 125%
A/F ALPHA-B2 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S I Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
HO2S1 (B1) I Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S1 (B2) rpm 1.0V
HO2S2 (B1) I Engine: After warming up Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 (B2) I Keeping the engine speed rpm quickly. 1.0V
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for
one minute and at idle for one
minute under no load
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) I Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 LEAN +, RICH
HO2S1 MNTR (B2) rpm Changes more than 5 times
during 10 seconds.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) I Engine: After warming up Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 LEAN +, RICH
HO2S2 MNTR (B2) I Keeping the engine speed rpm quickly.
VEH SPEED SE I Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer Almost the same speed as the
indication. speedometer indication
BATTERY VOLT I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V
ACCEL SEN1 I Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
ACCEL SEN2* (engine stopped)
I Shift lever: D Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
THRTL SEN1 I Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.5V
THRTL SEN2* (Engine stopped)
START SIGNAL I Ignition switch: ON , START , ON OFF , ON , OFF

CLSD THL POS I Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
EC-136
Mode (Cont’d) GI
AIR COND SIG I Engine: After warming up, idle the Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF MA
engine
Air conditioner switch: ON ON
(Compressor operates.)
EM
P/N POSI SW I Ignition switch: ON Shift lever: P or N ON
Shift lever: Except above OFF
LC
PW/ST SIGNAL I Engine: After warming up, idle the Steering wheel is in neutral position. OFF
engine (Forward direction)
Steering wheel is turned. ON
LOAD SIGNAL I Ignition switch: ON Rear window defogger switch is ON ON
and/or lighting switch is in 2nd.
FE
Rear window defogger switch is OFF OFF
and lighting switch is OFF.
IGNITION SW I Ignition switch: ON , OFF , ON ON , OFF , ON CL
BRAKE SW I Ignition switch: ON Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON MT
INJ PULSE-B1 I Engine: After warming up Idle 3.0 - 4.0 msec
INJ PULSE-B2 I Shift lever: N
AT
I No-load
IGN TIMING I Engine: After warming up Idle 10°±5° BTDC
I Shift lever: N
TF
I Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC
I No-load
PD
CAL/LD VALUE I Engine: After warming up Idle 10% - 35%
I Shift lever: N
I No-load
2,500 rpm 10% - 35% FA
MASS AIRFLOW I Engine: After warming up Idle 3.0 - 9.0 g⋅m/s
I Shift lever: N RA
I Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 10.0 - 25.0 g⋅m/s
I No-load
PURG VOL C/V I Engine: After warming up Idle 0% BR
I Shift lever: N
I Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 65 - 85%
I No-load ST
VIAS S/V I Engine: After warming up Idle OFF
More than 5,000 rpm ON RS
INT/V SOL-B1 I Engine: Idle OFF
I Engine: After warning up ON
I Engine speed is between 1,000 rpm and 4,200 rpm
BT
I Vehicle speed is more than 8 km/h (5 MPH).
I During high load condition
HA
AIR COND RLY I Engine: After warming up, idle the Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
engine
Air conditioner switch: ON ON
(Compressor operates) EL
FUEL PUMP RLY I For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch ON ON
I Engine running or cranking
SE
I Except above conditions OFF
THRTL RELAY I Ignition switch: ON ON
IDX
EC-137
Mode (Cont’d)
COOLING FAN I Engine: After warming up, idle the Engine coolant temperature is 94°C OFF
engine (201°F) or less
Engine coolant temperature is LOW
I Vehicle stopped
between 95°C (203°F) and 99°C
(210°F)
Engine coolant temperature is 100°C HIGH
(212°F) or more
HO2S1 HTR (B1) I Engine: After warming up ON
HO2S1 HTR (B2) I Engine speed: Below 2,800 rpm
I Engine speed: Above 2,800 rpm OFF
HO2S2 HTR (B1) I Engine speed: Below 3,200 rpm after the following conditions are met. ON
HO2S2 HTR (B2) I Engine: After warming up
I Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for one minute
and at idle for one minute under no load
TRVL AFTER MIL I Ignition switch: ON Vehicle has traveled after MI has 0 - 65,280 km
turned ON. (0 - 40,565 mile)
O2SEN HTR DTY I Engine coolant temperature when engine started: More than 80° (176°F) Approx. 50%
I Engine speed: Below 2,800 rpm
AC PRESS SEN I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Approx. 1.6V
I Engine: Idle 1.0 - 2.0V
VEH SPEED SE I Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the CON- Almost the same speed as the
SULT-II value. CONSULT-II value
CAN COMM I Ignition switch: ON OK
CAN CIRC 1 OK
CAN CIRC 2 OK
CAN CIRC 3 UNKWN
CAN CIRC 4 OK
CAN CIRC 5 UNKWN
CAN CIRC 6 UNKWN
CAN CIRC 7 UNKWN
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ
from ECM terminals voltage signal.
EC-138
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor GI

Mode
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode. MA
CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1 EM

Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelera-
tor pedal with the ignition switch “ON” and with selector lever in “D” position.
The signal of “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise LC
after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from “ON” to “OFF”.
FE
CL
MT
PBIB0198E
ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), HO2S1 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1 AT
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S2 (B1)”, “HO2S1 (B1)” and
“INJ PULSE-B1” when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine suffi-
ciently. TF
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF241Y
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-139
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Mode (Cont’d)
PBIB0668E
EC-140
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION
VALUE TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
Description GI
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)”
mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONI- MA
TOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in
“DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or
more malfunctions. EM
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items: LC
I B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor-
rection)
I A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
I MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
Testing condition FE
I Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,017 miles)
I Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (0.98 - 1.04 bar, 1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2, 14.25 - 15.12 psi) CL
I Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
I Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F)
I Transmission: Warmed-up*1 MT
I Electrical load: Not applied*2
I Engine speed: Idle
*1: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” (A/T AT
fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
*2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are “OFF”. Steering wheel is straight
ahead. TF
PD
FA
RA
Inspection Procedure
NOTE:
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale
BR
display.
1. Perform EC-98, “Basic Inspection”. ST
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1/B2” and “MAS A/F
SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II. RS
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
5. If NG, go to EC-142, “Diagnostic Procedure”.
SEF601Z BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-141
Diagnostic Procedure
SEF613ZD
EC-142
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
SEF768Z
EC-143
SEF615ZA
EC-144
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT
INCIDENT TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
Description GI
Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the custom- MA
er’s complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I
occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred
may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indi- EM
cate the specific malfunctioning area.
Common I/I Report Situations LC

STEP in Work Flow Situation
II The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than “0” or “[1t]”.
III The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
IV (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure. FE
VI The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area.
CL
1 INSPECTION START MT
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-81, “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”.
E GO TO 2. AT
2 CHECK GROUND TERMINALS TF

Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
Refer to GI section, “Incident Simulation Tests”.
OK or NG PD
OK E GO TO 3.
NG E Repair or replace. FA
3 SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT RA

Perform GI section, “Incident Simulation Tests”.
OK or NG
BR
OK E INSPECTION END
NG E Repair or replace.
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-145
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
FOR ECM TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
Wiring Diagram
TEC243M
EC-146
Wiring Diagram (Cont’d)
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. GI
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. MA
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL
COLOR
ITEM CONDITION
(DC voltage) EM
NO.
Engine is running.
LC
0 - 1.0V
For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch
42 B/Y ECM relay (Self-shutoff) “OFF”

BATTERY VOLTAGE FE
A few seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch “OFF”
Ignition switch “OFF” 0V CL

53 W/G Ignition switch
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V) MT
163 BATTERY VOLTAGE
B/R Power supply for ECM Ignition switch “ON”
166 (11 - 14V)
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-147
TEC144M
EC-148
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) EM
NO.
156 B
159 B Engine is running. LC
ECM ground Engine ground
165 B Idle speed
168 B
FE
1 INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running? CL
Yes or No
Yes E GO TO 11.
MT
No E GO TO 2.
AT
2 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 53 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
SEC817C
Voltage: Battery voltage ST
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 4.
RS
NG E GO TO 3.
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BT

I Harness connectors M52, F7 HA
I Fuse block (J/B) connector M2
I 10A fuse
I Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse EL
E Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
SE
IDX
EC-149
4 CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 156, 159, 165, 168 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 6.
NG E GO TO 5.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

I Joint connector-7
I Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
E Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
6 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

1. Disconnect ECM relay.
SEC668D
2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminals 2 and 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB0071E
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 8.
NG E GO TO 7.
EC-150
GI
I Harness connectors E127, M21 MA
I 10A fuse
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and battery EM
LC
8 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 42 and ECM relay terminal 1.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
FE
OK E GO TO 10.
NG E GO TO 9. CL
9 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART MT

I Harness connectors M52, F7
I Harness for open or short between ECM and ECM relay
AT
TF
10 CHECK ECM RELAY
Refer to EC-153. PD
OK or NG
OK E GO TO EC-461.
FA
NG E Replace ECM relay.
RA
11 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1. Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON” and then “OFF”. BR
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 163, 166 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEC924D
Voltage: After turning ignition switch “OFF”, battery voltage will exist for a few seconds, then drop approximately 0V.
EL
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 15.
NG (Battery voltage does not exist.) E GO TO 12.
SE
NG (Battery voltage exists for more GO TO 14.
than a few seconds.) E IDX
EC-151
12 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
SEC668D
2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 7 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB0074E
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 14.
NG E GO TO 13.

I Harness connectors E127, M21
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and 10A fuse
14 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 163, 166 and ECM relay terminal 6.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 16.
NG E GO TO 15.

I Harness for open or short between ECM and ECM relay
EC-152
16 CHECK ECM RELAY
GI
Refer to EC-153, “Component Inspection”.
OK or NG MA
OK E GO TO 17.
NG E Replace ECM relay. EM
17 CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II

LC
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 156, 159, 165, 168 and engine ground.
4. Also check harness for short to power. FE
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 19.
CL
NG E GO TO 18.

MT
I Joint connector-7 AT
I Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
TF
19 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-145, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”.
PD
OK or NG
OK E INSPECTION END FA
RA
Component Inspection
ECM RELAY BR
1. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7. ST
Yes RS
terminals 1 and 2
OFF No
PBIB0077E
BT
3. If NG, replace ECM relay.
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-153
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION
LINE TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
Description
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many
electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with
2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wir-
ing. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
On Board Diagnosis Logic

This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
U1000 CAN communication line I ECM can not communicate to other con- I Harness or connectors
1000 trol units. (CAN communication line is open or
I ECM can not communicate for more shorted).
than the specified time.
DTC Confirmation Procedure

2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-156, “Diagnostic Procedure”.
EC-154
Wiring Diagram GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC258M
EC-155
1 INSPECTION START
2. Select “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Print out the CONSULT-II screen.
SEC575D
E Go to EL section.
EC-156
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1
HEATER TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
Description GI
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
MA
Camshaft position sensor Engine speed Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
Engine coolant temperature control EM
sensor
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine LC
speed and engine coolant temperature. The duty percent varies with engine coolant temperature when engine
is started.
OPERATION
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
FE
Above 2,800 OFF
Below 2,800 after warming up ON
CL
Mode MT
Specification data are reference values.
AT
HO2S1 HTR (B1) I Engine: After warming up ON
HO2S1 HTR (B2) I Engine speed: Below 2,800 rpm TF
PD
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause FA
P0031 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The current amperage in the heated oxy- I Harness or connectors
0031 heater control circuit low gen sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the (The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater cir- RA
(Bank 1) normal range. cuit is open or shorted.)
P0051 (An excessively low voltage signal is sent I Heater oxygen sensor 1 heater
0051 to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor BR
(Bank 2) 1 heater.)
P0032 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The current amperage in the heated oxy- I Harness or connectors ST
0032 heater control circuit high gen sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the (The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater cir-
(Bank 1) normal range. cuit is shorted.)
P0052 (An excessively high voltage signal is sent I Heater oxygen sensor 1 heater RS
0052 to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor
(Bank 2) 1 heater.)
BT
NOTE:
HA
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EL
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at
idle. SE
IDX
EC-157
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1
DTC Confirmation Procedure (Cont’d)
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
4. Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-162, “Diagnostic Proce-
dure”.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
6. Select “MODE 3” with GST.
I When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should
be performed twice as much as when using CONSULT-II
because GST cannot display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) con-
cerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is rec-
ommended.
EC-158
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1
Wiring Diagram GI
BANK 1
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC409M
EC-159
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
age to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 7.0V★
Engine is running.
Warm-up condition.
Engine speed is below 2,800 rpm.
9 Y/B
heater (bank 1)
PBIB0519E
Engine stopped. BATTERY VOLTAGE


EC-160
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1
BANK 2 GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC414M
EC-161
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 7.0V★
Engine is running.
Warm-up condition.
Engine speed is below 2,800 rpm.
8 G/Y
heater (bank 2)
PBIB0519E


1 CHECK HO2S1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
SEC671D
4. Check voltage between HO2S1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB0112E
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 3.
NG E GO TO 2.
EC-162
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1
GI
I Fuse block (J/B) connector E112
I 15A fuse EM
I Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 1 and fuse
LC
3 CHECK HO2S1 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows.
FE
CL
MT
MTBL1566
AT
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 4.
TF
NG E Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
PD
4 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-164, “Component Inspection”. FA
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 5.
RA
NG E Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
BR
E INSPECTION END
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-163
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER
1. Check resistance between HO2S1 terminals as follows.
Terminal No. Resistance
2 and 3 3.3 - 4.0Ω at 20°C (68°F)
1 and 2, 3, 4 Ω
4 and 1, 2, 3 (Continuity should not exist.)
2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 1.

CAUTION:
I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys-
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri-
cant.
SEF249Y
EC-164
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2
Description GI
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
MA
Engine coolant temperature Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater EM
Engine coolant temperature Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
sensor control
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air LC
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed,
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater FE
Above 3,200 OFF
I Below 3,200 rpm after the following conditions are met. CL
I Engine: After warming up
ON
I Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for
one minute and at idle for one minute under no load MT
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor AT

Mode
TF
HO2S2 HTR (B1) I Engine speed: Below 3,200 rpm after the following conditions are met. ON
HO2S2 HTR (B2) I Engine: After warming up
PD
I Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for one
minute and at idle for one minute under no load
FA
On Board Diagnosis Logic RA

BR
0037 heater control circuit low gen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater cir-
(Bank 1) normal range. cuit is open or shorted.)
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent I Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater
ST
P0057
0057 to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor
2 heater.)
(Bank 2) RS
0038 heater control circuit high gen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater cir-
(Bank 1) normal range. cuit is shorted.) BT
P0058 (An excessively high voltage signal is sent I Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater
to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor
0058
2 heater.)
HA
(Bank 2)
DTC Confirmation Procedure EL

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” SE
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at IDX
idle.
EC-165
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2
WITH CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for one minute.
SEF174Y dure”.
WITH GST
ture.
I When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should
cerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is rec-
ommended.
EC-166
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram GI
BANK 1
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC413M
EC-167
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Engine is running.
Warm-up condition
Engine speed: Below 3,200 rpm after the fol-
lowing conditions are met. 0 - 1.0V
Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and
Heated oxygen sensor 2 4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle for one
11 R/G
heater (bank 1) minute under no load

EC-168
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2
BANK 2 GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC340M
EC-169
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Engine is running.
Warm-up condition
Engine speed: Below 3,200 rpm after the fol-
lowing conditions are met. 0 - 1.0V
Heated oxygen sensor 2 4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle for one
10 Y/R
heater (bank 2) minute under no load

1 CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
SEC669D

4. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB0112E

OK or NG
OK E GO TO 3.
NG E GO TO 2.
EC-170
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2
GI
I 15A fuse EM
I Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse
LC
3 CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
FE
CL
MT
MTBL1567
Continuity should exist. AT
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 4. TF
PD
FA
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 5.
RA
5 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT BR

E INSPECTION END ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-171
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows.
Terminal No. Resistance
2 and 3 5.0 - 7.0Ω at 25°C (77°F)
1 and 2, 3, 4 Ω
4 and 1, 2, 3 (Continuity should not exist)

CAUTION:
cant.
SEF249Y
EC-172
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF
SENSOR TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
Component Description GI
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire MA
intake flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric
current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is controlled
by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film EM
is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the
greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain LC
the temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM
SEC266C detects the air flow by means of this current change.

Mode
FE
CL
MAS A/F SE-B1 I Engine: After warming up Idle Approx. 1.3 - 1.7V
I Shift lever: N 2,500 rpm Approx. 1.7 - 2.4V
I No-load
MT
CAL/LD VALUE I Engine: After warming up Idle 10% - 35%
I Shift lever: N AT
I Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 10% - 35%
I No-load
MASS AIRFLOW I Engine: After warming up Idle 3.0 - 9.0 g⋅m/s TF
I Shift lever: N
I Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 10.0 - 25.0 g⋅m/s
I No-load PD
On Board Diagnosis Logic FA

These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause RA
P0102 Mass air flow sensor cir- An excessively low voltage from the sen- I Harness or connectors
0102 cuit low input sor is sent to ECM when engine is run- (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
ning. I Intake air leaks BR
I Mass air flow sensor
P0103 Mass air flow sensor cir- An excessively high voltage from the sen- I Harness or connectors
ST
0103 cuit high input sor is sent to ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
RS
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
BT
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel
cut. HA
DTC Confirmation Procedure EL

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” SE
IDX
EC-173
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102
With CONSULT-II
3. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
SEF058Y
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.

With CONSULT-II
3. Wait at least 5 seconds.
If DTC is not detected, go to next step.
5. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
SEF058Y
With GST
EC-174
Wiring Diagram GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC146M
EC-175
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Engine is running.
1.3 - 1.7V
Warm-up condition
Idle speed
91 W/G Mass air flow sensor
Engine is running.
1.7 - 2.4V
Warm-up condition
Sensor power supply

(Mass air flow sensor)
Engine is running.
Sensor ground
(Mass air flow sensor) Warm-up condition
Idle speed
1 INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated?
P0102 or P0103
P0102 E GO TO 2.
P0103 E GO TO 3.
2 CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM

Check the following for connection.
I Air duct
I Vacuum hoses
I Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 3.
NG E Reconnect the parts.
EC-176
3 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS
GI
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. MA
EM
LC
SEC690C FE
E GO TO 4.
CL
4 CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect MAF sensor harness connector.
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEC688C
FA
3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminals 2, 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. RA
BR
ST
RS
PBIB0076E
BT
HA
EL
MTBL1568
OK or NG SE
OK E GO TO 6.
NG E GO TO 5. IDX
EC-177
I Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
I Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM relay
6 CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 109.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 7.
7 CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 8.
8 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

OK or NG
OK E GO TO 9.
NG E Replace mass air flow sensor.

E INSPECTION END
EC-178
Component Inspection GI
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. MA
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 91 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground. EM
Condition Voltage V
Ignition switch “ON” (Engine stopped.) Approx. 1.0 LC
PBIB0078E Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
1.3 - 1.7
operating temperature.)
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
1.7 - 2.4
normal operating temperature.)
Idle to about 4,000 rpm* 1.3 - 1.7 to Approx. 4.0
FE
*: Check for liner voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about
4,000 rpm. CL
4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
a. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
b. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and recon- MT
nect it again.
c. Perform steps 2 and 3 again.
5. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot film AT
for damage or dust.
6. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-179
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT
Component Description
The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sen-
sor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a sig-
nal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive
to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
SEC266C
<Reference data>
Intake air temperature
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
°C (°F)
−10 (14) 4.43 7.9 - 9.3
25 (77) 3.32 1.9 - 2.1
80 (176) 1.23 0.31 - 0.37
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal
99 (Intake air temperature sensor) and ground.
SEF012P CAUTION:
ground.

P0112 Intake air temperature An excessively low voltage from the sen- I Harness or connectors
0112 sensor circuit low input sor is sent to ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0113 Intake air temperature An excessively high voltage from the sen- I Intake air temperature sensor
0113 sensor circuit high input sor is sent to ECM.

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
dure”.
SEF058Y
EC-180
WITH GST GI
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-181
Wiring Diagram
TEC343M
EC-182
Diagnostic Procedure GI
1 CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

MA
2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor is built-into) harness connector.
EM
LC
FE
SEC688C
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. CL
4. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 5 and ground.
MT
AT
TF
PBIB0066E PD
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
FA
OK E GO TO 2.
RA
2 CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. BR
Refer to Wiring Diagram. ST
OK or NG RS
OK E GO TO 3.
NG E Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. BT
3 CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR HA

OK or NG
EL
OK E GO TO 4.
NG E Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
SE
IDX
EC-183
E INSPECTION END
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor terminals 3
and 5 under the following conditions.
Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
25 (77) 1.9 - 2.1
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor).
SEC266C
SEF012P
EC-184
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the MA
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine cool-
ant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sen-
sitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the EM
thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
LC
SEF594K
<Reference data>
Engine coolant tempera-
ture °C (°F) FE
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 CL
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
MT
121 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
SEF012P
CAUTION: AT
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the TF
ground.
PD
FA
RA
BR
DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
P0117 Engine coolant tempera- An excessively low voltage from the sen- I Harness or connectors
0117 ture sensor circuit low sor is sent to ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
ST
input I Engine coolant temperature sensor
P0118
An excessively high voltage from the sen-
RS
ture sensor circuit high
0118 sor is sent to ECM.
input
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-185
On Board Diagnosis Logic (Cont’d)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch
ture sensor circuit “ON” or “START”. CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT-II display)
Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start 40°C (104°F)
More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or
80°C (176°F)
Start
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates
while engine is running.

NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-186
Wiring Diagram GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC147M
EC-187
1 CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness connector.
SEC689C
4. Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF645R
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 2.
2 CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 1 and engine ground.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 4.
NG E GO TO 3.

I Harness for open or short between engine coolant temperature sensor and ECM
EC-188
4 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
GI
OK or NG MA
OK E GO TO 5.
NG E Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. EM

LC
E INSPECTION END
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
FE
1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. CL
MT
PBIB0353E
AT
<Reference data>
TF
ture °C (°F)
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 PD
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00 FA
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
121 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
RA
SEF012P
2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-189
DTC P0122, P0123 TP
Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds
to the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from
PBIB0145E these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to
make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driv-
ing condition.

Mode
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs for ECM terminal voltage signal.

P0122 Throttle position sensor 2 An excessively low voltage from the TP I Harness or connectors
0122 circuit low input sensor 2 is sent to ECM. (The TP sensor 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P0123 Throttle position sensor 2 An excessively high voltage from the TP I Electric throttle control actuator
0123 circuit high input sensor 2 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
EC-190
DTC P0122, P0123 TP
DTC Confirmation Procedure GI

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” MA
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. EM
LC
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. FE
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
CL
MT
SEF058Y
AT
WITH GST
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-191
DTC P0122, P0123 TP
Wiring Diagram
TEC399M
EC-192
DTC P0122, P0123 TP
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.
Engine is running.
LC
89 B Sensor ground Approximately 0V
Warm-up condition
Idle speed

Shift lever position is “D” FE
Accelerator pedal fully released
98 R/L Throttle position sensor 2
CL
Shift lever position is “D”
MT
103 Y Sensor power supply Ignition switch “ON” Approximately 5V
Ignition switch “ON” AT

Accelerator pedal fully released TF
108 L Throttle position sensor 1
Engine stopped Less than 4.75V PD

FA
1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS RA
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEC690C
HA
E GO TO 2.
EL
SE
IDX
EC-193
DTC P0122, P0123 TP
2 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
SEC182D

3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB0082E
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 3.
3 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and ground.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 4.
4 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 98 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 5.
EC-194
DTC P0122, P0123 TP
5 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
GI
OK or NG MA
OK E GO TO 7.
NG E GO TO 6. EM
6 REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

LC
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
4. Perform EC-63, “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
E INSPECTION END
FE
CL
E INSPECTION END
MT
AT
TF
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Perform EC-63, “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”. PD
4. Set selector lever to “D” position.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 108 (TP sensor 1 FA
signal), 98 (TP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the
following conditions.
RA
PBIB0179E Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
108 Fully released More than 0.36V
(Throttle position sensor BR
1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
98 Fully released Less than 4.75V ST

(Throttle position sensor
2) Fully depressed More than 0.36V
RS
6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the
next step.
7. Perform EC-63, “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learn- BT
ing”.
9. Perform EC-63, “Idle Air Volume Learning”. HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-195
DTC P0132, P0152
HO2S1 TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions.
The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM
adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel
ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V
to 0V.
SEF463R
SEF288D

Mode
HO2S1 (B2) rpm 1.0V
during 10 seconds.

To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the heated
oxygen sensor 1 output is not inordinately high.
SEF301UA
P0132 Heated oxygen sensor 1 An excessively high voltage from the sen- I Harness or connectors
0132 circuit high voltage sor is sent to ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted).
(Bank 1) I Heated oxygen sensor 1
P0152
0152
(Bank 2)
EC-196
DTC P0132, P0152

NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously MA
EM
LC
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. FE
5. Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes. CL
dure”.
MT
SEF174Y
AT
WITH GST
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. TF
3. Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes.
5. Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes. PD
I When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should FA
cerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is rec- RA
ommended.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-197
DTC P0132, P0152
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1
TEC408M
EC-198
DTC P0132, P0152
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.
Engine is running.
Heated oxygen sensor 1 0 - Approximately 1.0V LC
115 W
(bank 1) Warm-up condition (Periodically change)
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-199
DTC P0132, P0152
BANK 2
TEC412M
EC-200
DTC P0132, P0152
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.
Engine is running.
114 W
1 RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 FE
2. Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1.
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEC888C
PD
Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N⋅m (4.1 - 6.2 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
E GO TO 2.
FA
2 CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEC671D

3. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 4 and ground. HA
EL
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 4. SE
NG E GO TO 3.
IDX
EC-201
DTC P0132, P0152
I Joint connector-7
I Harness for open or short between HO2S1 and ground
4 CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

MTBL1569
2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
MTBL1570
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 5.
5 CHECK HO2S1 CONNECTOR FOR WATER

Check heated oxygen sensor 1 connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 6.
NG E Repair or replace harness or connectors.
6 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

OK or NG
OK E GO TO 7.

E INSPECTION END
EC-202
DTC P0132, P0152
With CONSULT-II MA
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% EM
in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the fol- LC
lowing steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
FE
CL
MT
SEF646Y
AT
6. Check the following.
I “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes
from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds. TF
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once. PD
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
FA
SEF647Y
RA
BR
ST
RS
SEF648Y BT
CAUTION: HA
I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread EL
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
SE
IDX
EC-203
DTC P0132, P0152
Component Inspection (Cont’d)
Without CONSULT-II
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 115 [HO2S1 (B1)
signal] or 114 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no load.
I The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more
than 5 times within 10 seconds.
I The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
I The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.
SEC184DA I The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V
CAUTION:
cant.
EC-204
DTC P0133, P0153
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the MA
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. EM
ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V LC
to 0V.
SEF463R
FE
CL
MT
SEF288D
AT
Mode
TF
PD
HO2S1 (B2) rpm 1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) I Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 LEAN +, RICH FA
during 10 seconds.
RA
To judge the malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1, this diagno- BR
sis measures response time of heated oxygen sensor 1 signal. The
time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel
feedback control constant, and heated oxygen sensor 1 tempera- ST
ture index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time
(heated oxygen sensor 1 cycling time index) is inordinately long or
not. RS
SEF010V BT
P0133 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The response of the voltage signal from I Harness or connectors
HA
0133 circuit slow response the sensor takes more than the specified (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
(Bank 1) time. I Heated oxygen sensor 1
I Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
EL
I Fuel pressure
I Injectors
I Intake air leaks
SE
P0153
0153 I Exhaust gas leaks
(Bank 2) I PCV valve
IDX
EC-205
DTC P0133, P0153

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
I Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S1 (B1) P0133” or
“HO2S1 (B2) P0153” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
4. Touch “START”.
5. Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 2,800 rpm after this step. If the
engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.
SEF338Z
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-

played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions con-
tinuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will
take approximately 20 to 50 seconds.)
ENG SPEED 1,550 - 2,500 rpm
Vehicle speed More than 80 km/h (50 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 5 - 16.7 msec
Selector lever Suitable position
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step

SEF339Z
2.
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-211, “Diagnostic
Procedure”.
SEF658Y
EC-206
DTC P0133, P0153
Overall Function Check GI

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be con- MA
firmed.
WITH GST EM
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 115 [HO2S1(B1)
signal] or 114 [HO2S1(B2) signal] and engine ground. LC
— The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more
than 5 times within 10 seconds. FE
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V
→ 0 - 0.3V
CL
MT
SEC184DA
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-207
DTC P0133, P0153
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1
TEC408M
EC-208
DTC P0133, P0153
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.
Engine is running.
115 W
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-209
DTC P0133, P0153
BANK 2
TEC412M
EC-210
DTC P0133, P0153
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.
Engine is running.
114 W
1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEC690C
PD
E GO TO 2.
FA
2 RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1. RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEC888C
HA
E GO TO 3.
EL
SE
IDX
EC-211
DTC P0133, P0153
3 CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (Manifold).
SEC502D
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 4.
4 CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK

Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 5.
EC-212
DTC P0133, P0153
5 CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
GI
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. MA
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
EM
LC
FE
SEF215Z
CL
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine? MT
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. AT
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
TF
PD
FA
RA
SEC688C BR
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Make sure that DTC P0102 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-81, “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”. ST
RS
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No BT
Yes E Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or DTC P0172, P0175 (Refer to EC-251
or EC-260).
HA
No E GO TO 6.
EL
SE
IDX
EC-213
DTC P0133, P0153
SEC671D

4. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 4 and ground.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 8.
NG E GO TO 7.

I Joint connector-7
EC-214
DTC P0133, P0153
GI
Refer to Wiring Diagram. MA
EM
LC
MTBL1571

FE
CL
MT
MTBL1572
3. Also check harness for short to power. AT
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 9.
TF
PD
OK or NG FA
OK E GO TO 9.
NG E Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1. RA

BR
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 11.
ST
NG E Replace mass air flow sensor.
RS
11 CHECK PCV VALVE
Refer to EC-514, “Component Inspection”. BT
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 12.
HA
NG E Replace PCV valve.

EL
OK or NG SE
OK E GO TO 13.
NG E Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1. IDX
EC-215
DTC P0133, P0153
E INSPECTION END
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100%
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the fol-
lowing steps.
SEF646Y

from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
I “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
SEF647Y
SEF648Y
EC-216
DTC P0133, P0153
CAUTION: GI
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. MA
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri- EM
cant.
LC
Without CONSULT-II
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 115 [HO2S1 (B1) FE
stant under no load. CL
I The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time. MT
1 time: 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V AT
2 times: 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V
CAUTION:
I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been TF
I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys- PD
cant. FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-217
DTC P0134, P0154
to 0V.
SEF463R
SEF288D

Mode
HO2S1 (B2) rpm 1.0V
during 10 seconds.

Under the condition in which the heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is
not input, the ECM circuits will read a continuous approximately
0.3V. Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output voltage is
within 200 to 400 mV range is monitored, and the diagnosis checks
that this time is not inordinately long.
SEF237U
P0134 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The voltage from the sensor is constantly I Harness or connectors
0134 circuit no activity detected approx. 0.3V. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0154
0154
(Bank 2)
EC-218
DTC P0134, P0154

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. MA
NOTE:
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least EM
TESTING CONDITION: LC
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
tery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “HO2S1 (B1) P0134” or “HO2S1 (B2) P0154” of FE
“HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Let it idle for at least 3 minutes. CL
NOTE:
engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 4. MT
PBIB0544E
AT
tinuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will TF
take approximately 10 to 60 seconds.)
PD
Vehicle speed More than 64 km/h (40 MPH)
FA
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step

PBIB0545E
2. RA
Procedure”. BR
ST
RS
SEC750C BT
Overall Function Check
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxy- HA
gen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be con-
firmed.
EL
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. SE
IDX
EC-219
DTC P0134, P0154
Overall Function Check (Cont’d)
— The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 to 0.4V.
SEC184DA
EC-220
DTC P0134, P0154
Wiring Diagram GI
BANK 1
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC408M
EC-221
DTC P0134, P0154
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Engine is running.
Heated oxygen sensor 1 0 - Approximately 1.0V
115 W
EC-222
DTC P0134, P0154
BANK 2 GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC412M
EC-223
DTC P0134, P0154
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Engine is running.
Heated oxygen sensor 1 0 - Approximately 1.0V
114 W
1 INSPECTION START
SEC690C
E GO TO 2.

SEC888C
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 4.
NG E GO TO 3.
EC-224
DTC P0134, P0154
GI
I Joint connector-7 MA
EM
LC
FE
MTBL1573 CL
Refer to Wiring Diagram. MT
AT
TF
MTBL1574
Continuity should not exist. PD
OK or NG
FA
OK E GO TO 5.
RA
Refer to EC-226, “Component Inspection”. BR
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 6.
ST
RS
E INSPECTION END
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-225
DTC P0134, P0154
With CONSULT-II
lowing steps.
SEF646Y

SEF647Y
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
cant.
EC-226
DTC P0134, P0154
Without CONSULT-II GI
signal] or 114 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and engine ground. MA
I The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more EM
LC
1 time: 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V
CAUTION:
I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been FE
I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys- CL
cant. MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-227
DTC P0138, P0158
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are
shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the sig-
nal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used
SEF327R for engine control operation.

Mode
HO2S2 (B1) I Engine: After warming up Revving engine from idle to 3,000 0 - 0.3V +, Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) I Engine: After warming up Revving engine from idle to 3,000 LEAN +, RICH

The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxy-
gen storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold)
causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of
heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the voltage is
unusually high during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
SEF305UA
P0138 Heated oxygen sensor 2 An excessively high voltage from the sen- I Harness or connectors
0138 circuit high voltage sor is sent to ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0158
0158
(Bank 2)
EC-228
DTC P0138, P0158

CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II LC
with CONSULT-II.
ture.
FE
CL
MT
AT
5. Let engine idle for two minutes. TF
dure”.
PD
FA
SEF174Y
RA
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera- BR
ture.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and ST
4. Let engine idle for two minutes.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. RS
7. Let engine idle for two minutes. BT
8. Select “Mode 3” with GST.
I When using GST, “DTC Confirmation Procedure” should HA
cerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II is rec- EL
ommended.
SE
IDX
EC-229
DTC P0138, P0158
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1
TEC411M
EC-230
DTC P0138, P0158
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.
Engine is running.
LC
Warm-up condition
Heated oxygen sensor 2 Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly
124 W after the following conditions are met. 0 - Approximately 1.0V
(bank 1)
4,000 rpm for one minute and at idle for one
minute under no load FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-231
DTC P0138, P0158
BANK 2
TEC336M
EC-232
DTC P0138, P0158
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.
Engine is running.
LC
Warm-up condition
(bank 2)
CL
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
SEC690C
RA
E GO TO 2.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-233
DTC P0138, P0158
SEC669D
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 4.
NG E GO TO 3.

I Joint connector-7
EC-234
DTC P0138, P0158
GI
EM
LC
MTBL1575

FE
CL
MT
MTBL1576
AT
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 5. TF
PD
FA
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 6.
NG E Replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
RA
6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT BR

E INSPECTION END ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-235
DTC P0138, P0158
With CONSULT-II
ture.
5. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select

“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
SEF662Y
6. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL

INJECTION” to ±25%.
SEF972YA
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.68V at least once

when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.48V at least once
when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
cant.
Without CONSULT-II
ture.
EC-236
DTC P0138, P0158
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 124 [HO2S2 (B1) GI
MA
EM
LC
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load

at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during FE
this procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.68V at step 6, step 7 is not neces-
sary.
CL
7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in “D” MT
position with “OD” OFF.
The voltage should be below 0.48V at least once during
SEC774D
this procedure. AT
CAUTION:
I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been TF
I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys- PD
cant. FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-237
DTC P0139, P0159
conditions.

Mode

gen storage capacity before the three way catalyst (manifold)
causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of
heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the switching
response of the sensor’s voltage is faster than specified during the
various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
SEF302U
P0139 Heated oxygen sensor 2 It takes more time for the sensor to I Harness or connectors
0139 circuit slow response respond between rich and lean than the (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
(Bank 1) specified time. I Heated oxygen sensor 2
P0159 I Fuel pressure
0159 I Injectors
(Bank 2) I Intake air leaks
EC-238
DTC P0139, P0159

CAUTION:
NOTE:
I “COMPLETED” will appear on CONSULT-II screen when all tests “COND1”, “COND2” and “COND3”
are completed. EM
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch
“OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
LC
Never stop engine during this procedure. If the engine is stopped, retry this procedure from step 2 in
“Procedure for COND1”.
WITH CONSULT-II
Procedure for COND1 FE
For the best results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F)
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. CL
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no
load.
4. Let engine idle one minute. MT
5. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” or “HO2S2 (B2) P0159” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
6. Touch “START”. AT
7. Let engine idle for at least 30 seconds.
8. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm 2 or 3 times quickly under no load.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step 2 in “Procedure for COND3”.
TF
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to the following step.
9. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed at “COND1” on the CONSULT-II PD
screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
approximately 60 seconds.)
ENG SPEED More than 1,000 rpm FA
B/FUEL SCHDL More than 1.0 msec
COOLANT TEMP/S 70 - 100°C RA
Selector level Suitable position
BR
ST
RS
BT
PBIB0552E
HA
NOTE:
I If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2 in “Procedure for COND1”. EL
I If “COMPLETED” already appears at “COND2” on CONSULT-II screen before “Procedure for
COND2” is conducted, it is unnecessary to conduct step 1 in “Procedure for COND2”.
SE
IDX
EC-239
DTC P0139, P0159
Procedure for COND2
1. While driving, release accelerator pedal completely with “OD”
OFF from the above condition [step 9] until “INCOMPLETE” at
“COND2” on CONSULT-II screen has turned to “COM-
PLETED”. (It will take approximately 4 seconds.)
NOTE:
If “COMPLETED” already appears at “COND3” on CONSULT-II
screen before “Procedure for COND3” is conducted, it is
unnecessary to conduct step 1 in “Procedure for COND3”.
PBIB0553E
Procedure for COND3

1. Stop vehicle and let it idle until “INCOMPLETE” of “COND3” on
CONSULT-II screen has turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
a maximum of approximately 6 minutes.)
RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-245, “Diagnostic Procedure”.
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the fol-
lowing.
a. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and leave the vehicle in a cool place
SEF668Y (soak the vehicle).
b. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “COOLANTEMP/S” in
“DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
c. Start engine and warm it up while monitoring
“COOLANTEMP/S” indication on CONSULT-II.
d. When “COOLANTEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F),
go to “Procedure for COND 1” step 3.

firmed.
WITH GST
ture.

at least 10 times.
A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 sec-
ond during this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not
necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in
“D” position with “OD” OFF.
A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 sec-
SEC774D
ond during this procedure.
EC-240
DTC P0139, P0159
8. If NG, go to EC-245, “Diagnostic Procedure”. GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-241
DTC P0139, P0159
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1
TEC411M
EC-242
DTC P0139, P0159
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.
Engine is running.
LC
Warm-up condition
(bank 1)
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-243
DTC P0139, P0159
BANK 2
TEC336M
EC-244
DTC P0139, P0159
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.
Engine is running.
LC
Warm-up condition
(bank 2)
CL
AT
TF
PD
FA
SEC690C
RA
E GO TO 2.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-245
DTC P0139, P0159
With CONSULT-II
SEF215Z
Without CONSULT-II
SEC688C
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-81, “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”.
Yes or No
Yes E Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-251 or
EC-260.
No E GO TO 3.
EC-246
DTC P0139, P0159
GI
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. MA
EM
LC
FE
SEC669D
4. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ground. CL
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. MT
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 5. AT
NG E GO TO 4.
TF
Check the following. PD
I Joint connector-7
E Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-247
DTC P0139, P0159
MTBL1577

MTBL1578
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 6.

OK or NG
OK E GO TO 7.

E INSPECTION END
With CONSULT-II
ture.
EC-248
DTC P0139, P0159
5. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF662Y

FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF972YA
TF
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.48V at least once PD
CAUTION: FA
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. RA
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri- BR
cant.
Without CONSULT-II ST
ture.
BT
signal] or 123 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and engine ground. HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-249
DTC P0139, P0159
at least 10 times.
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during
this procedure.
sary.
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in “D”
SEC774D
this procedure.
CAUTION:
cant.
EC-250
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION
SYSTEM FUNCTION TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
On Board Diagnosis Logic GI

With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensors 1. The MA
ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and light up the MI (2 trip detection logic). EM
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Heated oxygen sensors 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust Fuel injection control Fuel injectors LC
gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
P0171 Fuel injection system too I Fuel injection system does not operate I Intake air leaks FE
0171 lean properly. I Heated oxygen sensor 1
(Bank 1) I The amount of mixture ratio compensa- I Injectors
tion is too large. I Exhaust gas leaks CL
(The mixture ratio is too lean.) I Incorrect fuel pressure
P0174
I Lack of fuel
0174
I Mass air flow sensor MT
(Bank 2)
I Incorrect PCV hose connection
AT
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously TF
PD
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. FA
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT”
in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. RA
6. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. BR
The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this
stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-255, “Diagnostic
Procedure”. ST
7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system
has a malfunction, too.
8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine RS
starts, go to EC-255, “Diagnostic Procedure”. If engine does not
start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
SEF215Z BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-251
WITH GST
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then

restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
5. Select “MODE 3” with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected.
6. Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
7. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
8. Select “MODE 7” with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so,
go to EC-255, “Diagnostic Procedure”.
SEC688C
has a malfunction.
10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine
starts, go to EC-255, “Diagnostic Procedure”. If engine does not
start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
EC-252
Wiring Diagram GI
BANK 1
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC424M
EC-253
BANK 2
TEC425M
EC-254
1 CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK

MA
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
EM
LC
FE
SEC502D
OK or NG CL
OK E GO TO 2.
NG E Repair or replace. MT

AT
1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
2. Check PCV hose connection.
OK or NG TF
OK E GO TO 3.
NG E Repair or replace. PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-255
3 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (HO2S1) harness connector.
SEC671D
MTBL1579

MTBL1580
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 4.
4 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE

1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-66, “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE”.
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-66, “FUEL PRESSURE CHECK”.
At idling: 245 kPa (2.45 bar, 2.5 kg/cm2, 36 psi)
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 6.
NG E GO TO 5.
EC-256
GI
I Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-492, “FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT”.) MA
I Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-66, “FUEL PRESSURE CHECK”.)
I Fuel lines (Refer to MA section.)
I Fuel filter for clogging EM
E Repair or replace.
LC
With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3.0 - 9.0 g⋅m/sec: at idling
10.0 - 25.0 g⋅m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
FE
With GST
1. Install all removed parts. CL
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
10.0 - 25.0 g⋅m/sec: at 2,500 rpm MT
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 7.
AT
NG E Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor
circuit or engine grounds. Refer to EC-173, “DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR”.
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-257
7 CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
PBIB0133E
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
MEC703B
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 8.
NG E Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-486, “INJECTOR CIRCUIT”.
EC-258
8 CHECK INJECTOR
GI
1. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. MA
3. Disconnect injector harness connectors on bank 2 (for DTC P0171), bank 1 (for DTC P0174).
4. Remove injector gallery assembly. Refer to EM section.
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. EM
The injector harness connectors on bank 1 (for DTC P0171), bank 2 (for DTC P0174) should remain connected.
5. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
6. Prepare pans or saucers under each injector. LC
7. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors.
FE
CL
MT
SEF595Q
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each injector.
AT
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 9. TF
NG E Replace injectors from which fuel does not spray out. Always replace O-ring with new
ones.
PD
FA
E INSPECTION END
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-259
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)

With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensors 1. The
ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and light up the MI (2 trip detection logic).
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Heated oxygen sensors 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust Fuel injection control Fuel injectors
gas
P0172 Fuel injection system too I Fuel injection system does not operate I Heated oxygen sensor 1
0172 rich properly. I Injectors
(Bank 1) I The amount of mixture ratio compensa- I Exhaust gas leaks
P0175 tion is too large. I Incorrect fuel pressure
0175 (The mixture ratio is too rich.) I Mass air flow sensor
(Bank 2)

NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT”
in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
The 1st trip DTC P0172, P0175 should be detected at this
stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-264, “Diagnostic
Procedure”.
has a malfunction, too.
8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to EC-264, “Diagnostic Procedure”. If engine
does not start, remove ignition plugs and check for fouling, etc.
SEF215Z
WITH GST
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
5. Select “MODE 3” with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected.
6. Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
SEC688C
EC-260
8. Select “MODE 7” with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 GI
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so,
go to EC-264, “Diagnostic Procedure”.
9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system MA
has a malfunction.
10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to EC-264, “Diagnostic Procedure”. If engine EM
does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-261
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1
TEC424M
EC-262
BANK 2 GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC425M
EC-263
1 CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
SEC502D
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 2.

OK or NG
OK E GO TO 3.
EC-264
3 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
GI
2. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (HO2S1) harness connector. MA
EM
LC
SEC671D
FE
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows. CL
MT
AT
MTBL1581
Continuity should exist. TF
PD
FA
MTBL1582 RA
OK or NG
BR
OK E GO TO 4.
NG E Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. ST
4 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE RS

At idling: 245 kPa (2.45 bar, 2.5 kg/cm2, 36 psi)
BT
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 6. HA
NG E GO TO 5.
EL
I Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-492, “FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT”.)
SE
I Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-66, “FUEL PRESSURE CHECK”.)
E Repair or replace. IDX
EC-265
With CONSULT-II
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
10.0 - 25.0 g⋅m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
10.0 - 25.0 g⋅m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 7.
7 CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
PBIB0133E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
MEC703B
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 8.
NG E Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-486, “INJECTOR CIRCUIT”.
EC-266
8 CHECK INJECTOR
GI
1. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM section.
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. MA
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Disconnect injector harness connectors bank 2 (for DTC P0172), bank 1 (for P0175).
The injector harness connectors on bank 1 (for P0172), bank 2 (for P0175) should remain connected. EM
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each injectors.
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. LC
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.) E GO TO 9.
NG (Drips.) E Replace the injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.
FE
Refer to EC-145, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”. CL
E INSPECTION END
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-267
DTC P0222, P0223 TP
ing condition.

Mode
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.

P0222 Throttle position sensor 1 An excessively low voltage from the TP I Harness or connectors
0222 circuit low input sensor 1 is sent to ECM. (The TP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P0223 Throttle position sensor 1 An excessively high voltage from the TP I Electric throttle control actuator
0223 circuit high input sensor 1 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 1)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.

NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
EC-268
DTC P0222, P0223 TP
WITH CONSULT-II GI
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. MA
EM
LC
SEF058Y
WITH GST
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-269
DTC P0222, P0223 TP
Wiring Diagram
TEC398M
EC-270
DTC P0222, P0223 TP
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.
Engine is running.
Sensor ground LC
89 B Approximately 0V
(Throttle position sensor) Warm-up condition
Idle speed

CL
MT
Sensor power supply
(Throttle position sensor)
AT

Shift lever position is “D” TF
PD
Accelerator pedal fully depressed FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEC690C
HA
E GO TO 2. EL
SE
IDX
EC-271
DTC P0222, P0223 TP
2 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
SEC182D
PBIB0082E
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 3.
3 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and engine ground.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 4.
4 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 5.
EC-272
DTC P0222, P0223 TP
GI
OK or NG MA
OK E GO TO 7.
NG E GO TO 6. EM

LC
E INSPECTION END
FE
CL
E INSPECTION END
MT
AT
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR TF
FA
RA
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 108 (TP sensor 1
signal), 98 (TP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the BR
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
ST
1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V RS
98 Fully released Less than 4.75V
2) Fully depressed More than 0.36V BT
PBIB0179E

next step. HA
7. Perform EC-63, “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learn-
ing”.
8. Perform EC-63, “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning”. EL
SE
IDX
EC-273
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6
CYLINDER MISFIRE TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)

When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crank-
shaft position (CKP) sensor (OBD) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function
Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) Engine speed On board diagnosis of misfire
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.

1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)
On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to
overheating, the MI will blink.
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor (OBD) signal every 200 engine revo-
lutions for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MI will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MI will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MI will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MI will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MI will only light
when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor
signal every 1,000 engine revolutions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders.
P0300 Multiple cylinder misfire Multiple cylinder misfire. I Improper spark plug
0300 detected I Insufficient compression
P0301 No.1 cylinder misfire I Incorrect fuel pressure
0301 detected
No. 1 cylinder misfires. I The injector circuit is open or shorted
I Fuel injectors
P0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire I Intake air leak
No. 2 cylinder misfires.
0302 detected I The ignition signal circuit is open or
P0303 No. 3 cylinder misfire shorted
0303 detected I Lack of fuel
I Drive plate or flywheel
P0304 No. 4 cylinder misfire
No. 4 cylinder misfires. I Heated oxygen sensor 1
0304 detected
I Incorrect PCV hose connection
0305 detected
0306 detected

CAUTION:
NOTE:
EC-274
WITH CONSULT-II GI
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
4. Start engine again and drive at 1,500 to 3,000 rpm for at least
3 minutes. EM
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
NOTE:
Refer to the freeze frame data for the test driving conditions.
LC
PBIB0164E 5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-275, “Diagnostic Proce-
dure”.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
1 CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE
1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak. PD
3. Check PCV hose connection.
OK or NG
FA
OK E GO TO 2.
RA
2 CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING
Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents. BR
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 3. ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-275
3 PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
PBIB0133E
2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop?
Without CONSULT-II
When disconnecting each injector harness connector one at a time, is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary
engine speed drop?
SEC793C
Yes or No
Yes E GO TO 4.
No E GO TO 7.
4 CHECK INJECTOR
Does each injector make an operating sound at idle?
MEC703B
Yes or No
Yes E GO TO 5.
No E Check injector(s) and circuit(s). Refer to EC-486, “INJECTOR CIRCUIT”.
EC-276
5 CHECK IGNITION SPARK
GI
1. Disconnect ignition coil assembly from rocker cover.
2. Connect a known good spark plug to the ignition coil assembly. MA
3. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine.
4. Check for spark.
EM
LC
FE
SEF575Q
OK or NG CL
OK E GO TO 6.
NG E Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-461, “IGNITION SIG- MT
NAL”.
AT
6 CHECK SPARK PLUGS
Remove the spark plugs and check for fouling, etc.
TF
PD
FA
RA
SEF156I
OK or NG BR
OK E GO TO 7.
NG E Repair or replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to MA ST
section.
RS
7 CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE
Check compression pressure. Refer to EM section.
Standard: 1,226 kPa (12.26 bar, 12.5 kg/cm2, 178 psi)/200 rpm BT
Minimum: 1,030 kPa (10.30 bar, 10.5 kg/cm2, 149 psi)/200 rpm
Difference between each cylinder: 98 kPa (0.98 bar, 1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi)/200 rpm
OK or NG HA
OK E GO TO 8.
NG E Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets. EL
SE
IDX
EC-277
8 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
At idle: Approx. 245 kPa (2.45 bar, 2.5 kg/cm2, 36 psi)
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 9.
NG E Follow the construction of “FUEL PRESSURE CHECK”.
9 CHECK IGNITION TIMING

Check the following items. Refer to EC-98, “Basic Inspection”.
MTBL1583
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 10.
NG E Follow the “Basic Inspection”.

OK or NG
OK E GO TO 12.
NG E GO TO 11.

With CONSULT-II
Check mass air flow sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
10.0 - 25.0 g⋅m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
With GST
Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
10.0 - 25.0 g⋅m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 12.
12 CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART

Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-103, “Symptom Matrix Chart”.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 13.
EC-278
13 ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC
GI
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-81, “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED MA
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”.
E GO TO 14.
EM
LC
E INSPECTION END
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-279
DTC P0327, P0328, P0332,
P0333 KS TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine
knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from
the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure
is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
SEF598K

The MI will not light up for these self-diagnoses.
DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
P0327 Knock sensor circuit low An excessively low voltage from the sen- I Harness or connectors
0327 (bank 1) input sor is sent to ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0332 I Knock sensor
0332 (bank 2)
P0328
0328 (bank 1) Knock sensor circuit high An excessively high voltage from the sen-
P0333 input sor is sent to ECM.
0333 (bank 2)

NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
dure”.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-280
DTC P0327, P0328, P0332,
Wiring Diagram GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC153M
EC-281
DTC P0327, P0328, P0332,
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Engine is running.
125 W Knock sensor (bank 1) Approximately 2.5V
Idle speed
Engine is running.
126 W Knock sensor (bank 2) Approximately 2.5V
Idle speed
1 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
3. Check resistance between ECM terminal 125 (bank 1) or 126 (bank 2) and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ. Resistance: Approximately 530 - 590 kΩ [at
20°C (68°F)]
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 4.
NG E GO TO 2.
2 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II

1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
SEC889C
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 125 (bank 1) or 126 (bank 2) and knock sensor terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 3.
EC-282
DTC P0327, P0328, P0332,
3 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR
GI
OK or NG MA
OK E GO TO 5.
NG E Replace knock sensor. EM

LC
Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
FE
CL
MT
SEC690C
E GO TO 5. AT
5 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT TF

E INSPECTION END PD
FA
RA
Component Inspection BR
KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground. ST
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more
than 10 MΩ. RS
Resistance: Approximately 530 - 590 kΩ [at 20°C
(68°F)]
CAUTION: BT
SEF478Y Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or
physically damaged. Use only new ones.
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-283
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR
(OBD) TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
The crankshaft position sensor (OBD) is located on the cylinder
block rear housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate
at the end of the crankshaft. It detects the fluctuation of the engine
revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
SEF804Z Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
This sensor is not used to control the engine system. It is used only
for the on board diagnosis.

Mode
ENG SPEED I Tachometer: Connect Almost the same speed as the
I Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indica- tachometer indication.
tion.

P0335 Crankshaft position sen- I The proper pulse signal from the crank- I Harness or connectors
0335 sor (OBD) circuit shaft position sensor (OBD) is not sent (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
to ECM while the engine is running at I Crankshaft position sensor (OBD)
the specified engine speed.

NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
tery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch ON”.
WITH CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
dure”.
SEF058Y
EC-284
WITH GST GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-285
Wiring Diagram
TEC451M
EC-286
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.
Crankshaft position sen- Engine is running.

89 B Approximately 0V LC
sor (OBD) ground Idle speed
Approximately 1 - 2V★
Engine is running.
FE
Warm-up condition.
Idle speed
CL
SEC748D
Crankshaft position sen-
111 W MT
sor (OBD) Approximately 3 - 4V★
AT
Engine is running.

TF
SEC749D
PD
FA
1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEC690C
HA
E GO TO 2.
EL
SE
IDX
EC-287
2 CHECK CKP SENSOR (OBD) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (OBD) harness connector and ECM harness connector.
SEC732D
2. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (OBD) terminal 1 and ECM terminal 111.

OK or NG
OK E GO TO 4.
NG E GO TO 3.

I Harness connectors E201, E70
I Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (OBD) and ECM
4 CHECK CKP SENSOR (OBD) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (OBD) terminal 2 and ground.
3. Also check harness for and short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 6.
NG E GO TO 5.

I Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (OBD) and ECM
EC-288
6 CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT
GI
1. Disconnect harness connectors E201, E70.
2. Check harness continuity between harness connector E70 terminal 10 and ground. MA
4. Then reconnect harness connectors. EM
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 8.
LC
NG E GO TO 7.

I Harness connectors E127, M21 FE
I Joint connector-7
I Harness for open or short between harness connector E70 and ground CL
MT
8 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (OBD)
OK or NG
AT
OK E GO TO 9.
NG E Replace crankshaft position sensor (OBD). TF
9 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT PD

E INSPECTION END FA
RA
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (OBD)
BR
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (OBD) harness connec- ST
tor.
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. RS
SEF960N
BT
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Resistance: Approximately 512 - 632Ω [at 20°C (68°F)] HA
6. If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor (OBD).
EL
SE
IDX
SEF231W
EC-289
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION
(CMP) SENSOR TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
The camshaft position sensor (CMPS) is a basic component of the
ECM. It monitors engine speed and piston position. It sends signals
to the ECM to control fuel injection, ignition timing and other func-
tions.
The camshaft position sensor has a rotor plate and a wave-form-
ing circuit. The rotor plate has 360 slits for 1° signal and 6 slits for
120° signal. Light Emitting Diodes (LED) and photo diodes are built
into the wave-forming circuit.
When the rotor plate passes between the LED and the photo diode,
SEC695C the following happens:
Slits in the rotor plate continually cut the transmitted light to the
photo diode from the LED. This generates rough-shaped pulses
converted into on-off pulses by the wave forming circuit sent to the
ECM.
SEF614B

Specification data are reference values, and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the
ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals such as the body ground.
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
1.0 - 4.0V*1
Engine is running. (Warmed-up condition)
Idle speed
SEC750D
63 B/W
(POS signal) 1.0 - 4.0V*1
SEC751D
EC-290
TER-
GI
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
MA
Approximately 0.3 -
0.6V*1
EM

LC
Idle speed
SEC746D
83 Camshaft position sensor
84
L
(REF signal)
FE
Approximately 0.3 -
0.6V*1
CL
MT
AT
SEC747D
TF
On Board Diagnosis Logic PD

Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when .... FA
(Possible Cause)
No.
P0340 A) Either 1° or 120° signal is not sent to ECM for the I Harness or connectors
0340 first few seconds during engine cranking. (The camshaft position sensor circuit is open or RA
........................................................................................... shorted.)
I Camshaft position sensor
B) Either 1° or 120° signal is not sent to ECM during I Starter motor (Refer to EL section.)
engine running. I Starting system circuit (Refer to EL section.) BR
........................................................................................... I Dead (Weak) battery
C) Either 1° or 120° signal is not in the normal pattern
during engine running. ST
Perform “Procedure for malfunction A” first. If DTC cannot be RS
confirmed, perform “Procedure for malfunction B and C”.
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously BT
TESTING CONDITION: HA
tery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
EL
SE
IDX
EC-291
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2) Crank engine at least 2 seconds.
(If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to “START” for at
least 2 seconds.)
3) If DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-294.
Without CONSULT-II
SEF013Y
1) Crank engine for at least 2 seconds.
(If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to “START” for at
least 2 seconds.)
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then
turn “ON”.
3) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with
ECM.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B AND C

With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
4) If DTC is detected, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,
EC-294.
Without CONSULT-II
1) Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then
turn “ON”.
3) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with
ECM.
EC-292
Wiring Diagram GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC145M
EC-293
INSPECTION START
H
CHECK STARTING SYSTEM. No Check starting system.
E
Does the engine turn over? (Refer to EL section.)
(Does the starter motor operate?)
Yes
H
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground
SEC690C screws.
OK
H
E
1. Disconnect camshaft position sensor I Harness connectors
harness connector. M52 , F7
3. Check voltage between terminal q3 and between camshaft posi-
ground with CONSULT-II or tester. tion sensor and ECM
Voltage: Battery voltage I Harness for open or short
between camshaft posi-
OK tion sensor and ECM
SEC696C
relay
connectors.
H
E
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. power in harness or con-
2. Check harness continuity between termi- nectors.
nal q
4 and engine ground.
If OK, check harness for short to power.
OK
H
SEC697C
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit, short to
E
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. ground or short to power in
2. Check harness continuity between harness or connectors.
CMPS terminals q1 ,q2 and ECM termi-
nals.
CMPS ECM ter-

Continuity
terminal minal
120° sig-
nal
q
1 83 , q
q 84 Yes
(REF sig-
nal)
1° signal
(POS sig- q
2 q
63 Yes
nal)

and short to power.
OK
H
q
A
EC-294
q
A GI
H
CHECK COMPONENT. NG Replace camshaft position MA
E
(Camshaft position sensor). sensor.
EC-295. EM
OK
H
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT. LC
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-145.
H
INSPECTION END FE
CL
MT
AT
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR TF
ture.
2. Check voltage between the following ECM terminals and PD
ground with DC range.
ECM terminal Reference illustration FA
1° signal q
63 q
A
(POS signal)
SEC827C
120° signal q
83 , q
84 q
B
RA
(REF signal)
CAUTION: BR
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring voltage.
Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a
ground other than ECM terminals such as the body ground. ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-295
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
1.0 - 4.0V*1
Idle speed
SEC750D
63 B/W
(POS signal) 1.0 - 4.0V*1
SEC751D
Approximately 0.3 -
0.6V*1
Idle speed
SEC746D
83 Camshaft position sensor
L
84 (REF signal) Approximately 0.3 -
0.6V*1
SEC747D
If NG, replace camshaft position sensor.
EC-296
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY
CATALYST FUNCTION TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)

The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of heated oxygen
sensors 1 and 2. MA
A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.
As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor EM
2 switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of heated oxygen sensors 1 and 2
approaches a specified limit value, the three way catalyst (mani- LC
fold) malfunction is diagnosed.
SEF484YF
P0420 Catalyst system efficiency I Three way catalyst (manifold) does not I Three way catalyst (manifold)
FE
0420 below threshold operate properly. I Exhaust tube
(Bank 1) I Three way catalyst (manifold) does not I Intake air leaks
have enough oxygen storage capacity. I Fuel injectors CL
P0430 I Fuel injector leaks
0430 I Spark plug
(Bank 2) I Improper ignition timing MT
AT
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously TF
PD
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
I Open engine hood before conducting the following proce-
FA
dure.
I Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified min- RA
utes below.
ture. BR
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load. ST
RS
BT
5. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUP-
PORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
6. Rev engine up to 2,500 to 3,500 rpm and hold it for 3 consecu- HA
tive minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely.
If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “COMPLT”, go to step 9
7. Wait 5 seconds at idle. EL
SE
PBIB0566E IDX
EC-297
8. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until
“INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It will take
approximately 5 minutes).
If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C
(158°F) and then retest from step 1.
(soak the vehicle).
PBIB0567E

“DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
go to step 3.
SEF013Y
9. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.

10. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected.
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-299, “Diagnostic Pro-
cedure”.
SEF535Z

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way
catalyst (Manifold). During this check, a DTC might not be con-
firmed.
CAUTION:
WITH GST
ture.
EC-298
5. Set voltmeters probes between ECM terminals 115 [HO2S1 (B GI
1) signal], 114 [HO2S1 (B 2) signal] and engine ground, and
ECM terminals 124 [HO2S2 (B 1) signal], 123 [HO2S2 (B 2)
signal] and engine ground. MA
6. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
EM
LC
SEC184DA
7. Make sure that the voltage switching frequency (high & low)
between ECM terminals 124 and engine ground, or 123 and
engine ground is very less than that of ECM terminals 115 and
engine ground, or 114 and engine ground. FE
Switching frequency ratio = A/B
A: Heated oxygen sensor 2 voltage switching frequency
B: Heated oxygen sensor 1 voltage switching frequency
CL
This ratio should be less than 0.75.
If the ratio is greater than above, it means three way catalyst MT
does not operate properly. Go to EC-299, “Diagnostic Proce-
dure”.
SEC672D
NOTE: AT
If the voltage at terminal 35 or 36 does not switch periodically
more than 5 times within 10 seconds at step 7, perform trouble
diagnosis for “DTC P0133, P0153” first. (See EC-205.) TF
PD
1 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM
Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.
OK or NG
FA
OK E GO TO 2.
NG E Repair or replace. RA
2 CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK BR

2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold).
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEC502D
OK or NG
EL
OK E GO TO 3.
NG E Repair or replace. SE
IDX
EC-299
3 CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 4.
4 CHECK IGNITION TIMING

Check the following items. Refer to EC-98, “Basic Inspection”.
MTBL1584
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 5.
NG E Follow the EC-98, “Basic Inspection”.
5 CHECK INJECTORS
1. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 5, 6, 7, 13, 14, 15 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEC743D
Battery voltage should exist.
3. Refer to Wiring Diagram for Injectors, EC-487.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 6.
NG E Perform EC-488, “Diagnostic Procedure”.
EC-300
6 CHECK IGNITION SPARK
GI
2. Disconnect ignition coil assembly from rocker cover. MA
3. Connect a known good spark plug to the ignition coil assembly.
4. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine.
5. Check for spark. EM
LC
FE
SEF575Q CL
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 7.
MT
NG E Check ignition coil with power transistor and their circuit. Refer to EC-461, “IGNITION SIG-
NAL”.
AT
7 CHECK INJECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. TF
2. Remove injector assembly.
Refer to EM section.
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. PD
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector. FA
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.) E GO TO 8.
RA
NG (Drips.) E Replace the injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.
BR
Trouble is fixed. E INSPECTION END
ST
Trouble is not fixed. E Replace three way catalyst (Manifold).
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-301
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Camshaft position sensor Engine speed EVAP canister purge EVAP canister purge vol-
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air flow control ume control solenoid
valve
Accelerator pedal position sensor Closed throttle position
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Heated oxygen sensors 1
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.

This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas-
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a
ON/OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP
canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
SEF337U

Mode
PURG VOL C/V I Engine: After warming up Idle 0%
I Shift lever: N
I Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 65 - 85%
I No-load

P0444 EVAP canister purge vol- An excessively low voltage signal is sent I Harness or connectors
0444 ume control solenoid to ECM through the valve (The solenoid valve circuit is open or
valve circuit open shorted.)
I EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
I Harness or connectors
EVAP canister purge vol-
P0445 An excessively high voltage signal is sent (The solenoid valve circuit is shorted.)
ume control solenoid
0445 to ECM through the valve I EVAP canister purge volume control
valve circuit shorted
solenoid valve
EC-302

NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION: EM
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery
voltage is more than 11V at idle.
LC
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds.
dure”. CL
MT
SEF058Y
AT
WITH GST
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-303
Wiring Diagram
TEC418M
EC-304
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
LC
Engine is running.
Idle speed
FE
EVAP canister purge vol-
PBIB0050E
54 W/B ume control solenoid CL
valve Approximately 10V★
MT
Engine is running.
Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More than AT

100 seconds after starting engine)
PBIB0520E
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-305
1 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.
SEC785C
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEC815C
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 3.
NG E GO TO 2.

I 10A fuse
I Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and fuse
EC-306
3 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
GI
SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. MA
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 54 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. EM
OK or NG LC
OK (With CONSULT-II) E GO TO 4.
OK (Without CONSULT-II) E GO TO 5.
FE
4 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. CL
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
MT
AT
TF
PD
PBIB0147E
FA
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 6. RA
NG E GO TO 5.
BR
5 CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
OK or NG
ST
OK E GO TO 6.
NG E Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. RS
6 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT BT

E INSPECTION END HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-307
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume con-
trol solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Condition Air passage continuity between A and
(PURG VOL CONT/V value) B
PBIB0149E 100.0% Yes
0.0% No
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume con-
trol solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Air passage continuity between A and
Condition
B
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
No supply No
PBIB0150E
EC-308
DTC P0500 VSS TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
Description GI
NOTE:
If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer MA
to EC-154, “DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE”.
The vehicle speed sensor is installed in the transaxle. It contains a pulse generator which provides a vehicle
speed signal to the combination meter. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM through CAN EM
communication line.
On Board Diagnosis Logic LC
P0500 Vehicle speed sensor The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from I Harness or connectors
0500 vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM even (The CAN communication line is open or
when vehicle is being driven. shorted.)
I Harness or connectors FE
(The vehicle speed signal circuit is open
or shorted.)
I Combination meter CL
I Vehicle speed signal
DTC Confirmation Procedure MT

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. AT
NOTE:
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least TF
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted PD
in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected
to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
FA
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with RA
CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULT-II should exceed
10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear posi-
tion. BR
If NG, go to EC-310, “Diagnostic Procedure”.
If OK, go to following step.
ST
4. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
RS
BT
5. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive
seconds. HA
ENG SPEED More than 1,350 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F) EL
Selector lever Suitable position SE
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-310, “Diagnostic Proce- IDX

SEF196Y dure”.
EC-309
DTC P0500 VSS TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle
speed signal circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be
confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Lift up drive wheels.
2. Start engine.
3. Read vehicle speed signal in “MODE 1” with GST.
The vehicle speed signal on GST should be able to exceed 10
km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
1 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
Refer to EL section.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 2.
2 CHECK COMBINATION METER

Check combination meter function.
E INSPECTION END
EC-310
DTC P0550 PSP
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power
steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This MA
sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load
into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the EM
throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and
adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
LC
SEC735D

Mode
FE
CL
PW/ST SIGNAL I Engine: After warming up, idle the Steering wheel is in neutral position. OFF
engine (Forward direction)
Steering wheel is turned. ON MT
AT
The MI will not light up for this diagnosis.
TF
P0550 Power steering pressure An excessively low or high voltage from I Harness or connectors
0550 sensor circuit the sensor is sent to ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Power steering pressure sensor PD
NOTE: FA
10 seconds before conducting the next test. RA
WITH CONSULT-II
BR
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. ST
dure”.
RS
WITH GST
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-311
DTC P0550 PSP
Wiring Diagram
TEC342M
EC-312
DTC P0550 PSP
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.
Sensor ground Engine is running.

89 B (Power steering pressure Approximately 0V
LC
sensor) Idle speed
Sensor power supply

103 Y (Power steering pressure Ignition switch “ON” Approximately 5V
sensor)
FE
Engine is running.
0.5 - 4.0V
Power steering pressure Steering wheel is being turned.
118 BR/W
sensor
CL
Engine is running.
0.4 - 0.8V
Steering wheel is not being turned.
MT
AT
TF
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. PD
FA
RA
BR
SEC690C ST
E GO TO 2. RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-313
DTC P0550 PSP
2 CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect PSP sensor harness connector.
SEC735D
3. Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB0085E
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 3.
3 CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 3 and ground.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 4.
4 CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 118 and PSP sensor terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 5.
EC-314
DTC P0550 PSP
5 CHECK PSP SENSOR
GI
OK or NG MA
OK E GO TO 6.
NG E Replace PSP sensor. EM

LC
E INSPECTION END
Component Inspection FE
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. CL
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 118 and ground under
the following conditions. MT
Condition Voltage
Steering wheel is being turned fully. 0.5 - 4.0V AT
SEC736D Steering wheel is not being turned. 0.4 - 0.8V
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-315
DTC P0605 ECM TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the
engine.
SEF093X

This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic.
P0605 Engine control module A) ECM calculation function is malfunc- I ECM
0605 tioning.
B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunc-
tioning.
C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunc-
tioning.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters fail-safe mode when malfunction A is detected.
Detected items Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
Malfunction A ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening
(approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “PRO-
CEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B”. If there is no malfunction on “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B”,
perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C”.
NOTE:
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II
3. If 1st DTC is detected, go to EC-318, “Diagnostic Procedure”.
SEF058Y
With GST
EC-316
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B GI
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second. MA
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds, and then
turn “ON”. EM
dure”.
LC
SEF058Y
With GST
FE
CL
MT
AT
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
With CONSULT-II TF
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds, and then PD
turn “ON”.
4. Repeat step 3 for 32 times.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-318, “Diagnostic Proce- FA
dure”.
SEF058Y
RA
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-317
1 INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-316.
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
With GST
2. Select MODE 4 with GST.
See EC-316.
Yes or No
Yes E GO TO 2.
No E INSPECTION END
2 REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-82, “NATS (Nissan Anti-theft
System)”.
E INSPECTION END
EC-318
DTC P0650 MI TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
Malfunction Indicator (MI) is located on the instrument panel. When the ignition switch is turned ON without
engine running, MI will light up. This is a bulb check. When the engine is started, MI should go off. If MI remains MA
on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EM

The MI will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
LC
P0650 Malfunction indicator (MI) I An excessively high voltage is sent to I Harness or connectors
0650 control circuit ECM through the MI circuit under the (MI circuit is open or shorted.)
condition that calls for MI light up. I MI
I An excessively low voltage is sent to
ECM through the MI circuit under the FE
condition that calls for MI not to light up.
FAIL-SAFE MODE CL
ECM enters fail-safe mode when both DTC P0650 and another DTC, which calls for MI to light up, are detected
at the same time. MT
MI circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut. AT
NOTE: TF
10 seconds before conducting the next test. PD
FA
RA
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second. BR
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
ST
EC-321.
RS
BT
SEF058Y
WITH GST HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-319
Wiring Diagram
TEC422M
EC-320
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and body ground. GI
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.

LC
35 Y/G MI Engine is running. BATTERY VOLTAGE
FE
1 CHECK MIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect combination meter harness connector. CL
4. Check voltage between combination meter terminal 46 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEC737D
FA
OK or NG
RA
OK E GO TO 3.
NG E GO TO 2.
BR
ST
I 10A fuse
I Harness for open or short between fuse block (J/B) and combination meter
RS
E Repair harness or connectors.
BT
3 CHECK MIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. HA
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and combination meter terminal 3.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. EL
OK or NG SE
OK E GO TO 5.
NG E GO TO 4. IDX
EC-321
I Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter

Check continuity between combination meter terminals 46 and 3 under the following conditions.
SEC777D
MTBL1599
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 6.
NG E Replace combination meter.

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-145.
OK or NG
OK E Replace combination meter. Refer to EL section.
EC-322
DTC P1065 ECM POWER
SUPPLY TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition
switch is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC MA
memory, the air fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory,
the idle air volume learning value memory, etc.
EM
LC
SEF093X

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause FE
P1065 ECM power supply circuit ECM back up RAM system does not func- I Harness or connectors
1065 tion properly. [ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is
open or shorted.] CL
I ECM
MT
AT
NOTE: TF
10 seconds before conducting the next test. PD
FA
RA
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second. BR
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds, and then ST
turn “ON”.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 four times.
RS
dure”.
BT
SEF058Y
WITH GST
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-323
DTC P1065 ECM POWER
Wiring Diagram
TEC244M
EC-324
DTC P1065 ECM POWER
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.
Power supply for ECM BATTERY VOLTAGE

95 W
(Buck-up)
(11 - 14V)
LC
1 CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. FE
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 95 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PBIB0087E
PD
OK or NG
FA
OK E GO TO 3.
NG E GO TO 2.
RA
Check the following. BR
I 10A fuse ST
I Harness for open or short between ECM and battery
E Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. RS

BT
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 4. HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-325
DTC P1065 ECM POWER
4 PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
See EC-323.
With GST
2. Select MODE 4 with GST.
See EC-323.
Yes or No
Yes E GO TO 5.
No E INSPECTION END
5 REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-82, “NATS (Nissan Anti-theft
System)”.
E INSPECTION END
EC-326
DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID
Description GI
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
MA
Camshaft position sensor Engine speed Intake valve tim- Intake valve timing con-
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature ing control trol solenoid valve EM
The intake valve timing control system is utilized to When ECM sends ON signal to intake valve timing
LC
control intake valve opening and closing timing. control solenoid valve, oil pressure is transmitted to
Engine coolant temperature signals, engine speed, camshaft sprocket. Then, intake side camshaft is
amount of intake air, vehicle speed and throttle posi- advanced.
tion are used to determine intake valve timing.
The intake camshaft sprocket position is regulated FE
by oil pressure controlled by the intake valve timing
control.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
SEC776D
BT
Operation
Intake valve timing con- HA
Intake valve opening
Engine operating condition trol Valve overlap Engine valve timing
and closing time
solenoid valve
I Engine coolant temperature is EL
between 70°C (158°F) to 119°C
(246°F) and engine speed is
between 1,000 rpm and 4,200 rpm. ON Advance Increased q
II
I During high load condition SE
I Vehicle speed is more than 8 km/h
(5 MPH).
Those other than above OFF Normal Normal q

I IDX
EC-327

Mode
I Engine: Idle OFF
I Engine: After warning up

INT/V SOL-B1 I Engine speed is between 1,000 rpm and 4,200 rpm
ON
I Vehicle speed is more than 8 km/h (5 MPH).
I During high load condition

P1111 Intake valve timing con- An improper voltage is sent to the ECM I Harness or connectors
1111 trol solenoid valve circuit through intake valve timing control sole- (Solenoid valve circuit is open or
noid valve. shorted.)
I Intake valve timing control solenoid valve

NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
dure”.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
Following the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
EC-328
Wiring Diagram GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC419M
EC-329
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Engine is running.
Intake valve timing control solenoid is operat- Approximately 0V
Intake valve timing control ing.

152 R
solenoid valve Engine is running.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Intake valve timing control solenoid is not (11 - 14V)
operating.
1 CHECK IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
SEC793C
4. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEC794C
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 3.
NG E GO TO 2.
EC-330
2 DETECT MALFUNCTION PART
GI
I Harness connectors M52, F7 MA
I 10A fuse
I Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and fuse EM
LC
3 CHECK IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 152 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminal 1. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
FE
OK or NG
CL
OK E GO TO 4.
MT
4 CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
AT
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 5. TF
NG E Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
PD
Refer to EC-145, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT.
FA
E INSPECTION END
RA
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE BR
1. Check oil passage visually for any metal debris.
2. Supply intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals with ST
battery voltage.
3. Make sure that inside plunger protrudes.
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. RS
SEC795C
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-331
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
ACTUATOR TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throttle
valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle
valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.

P1121 Electric throttle control A) Electric throttle control actuator does I Electric throttle control actuator
1121 actuator not function properly due to the return
spring malfunction.
B) Throttle valve opening angle in fail-
safe mode is not in specified range.
C) ECM detect the throttle valve is stuck
open.
This self-diagnosis has the one trip
detection logic.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction A or B is detected in the two consecutive trips, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the
MI lights up.
When the malfunction C is detected even in the 1st trip, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
Malfunction A The ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position.
The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less.
Malfunction C While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in “N” or “P” position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.

NOTE:
I Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B”
first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
“PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C”.
If there is no malfunction on “PROCEDURE FOR MAL-
FUNCTION A AND B”, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MAL-
FUNCTION C”.
I If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition witch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
3. Shift selector lever to “D” position and wait at least 2 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds, and then
turn “ON”.
dure”.
SEF058Y
EC-332
ACTUATOR TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
With GST GI
MA
EM
LC
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second. FE
3. Shift selector lever to “D” position and wait at least 2 seconds.
4. Shift selector lever to “N” or “P” position. CL
MT
SEF058Y
AT
With GST
TF
PD
1 CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
1. Remove the intake air duct.
2. Perform 63, “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”. FA
3. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing.
RA
BR
ST
RS
SEC183D
OK or NG
BT
OK E GO TO 2.
NG E Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. HA
2 REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR EL

SE
E INSPECTION END IDX
EC-333
Description
NOTE:
If DTC P1122 is displayed with DTC P1121 or 1126, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1121
or P1126. Refer to EC-332 or EC-342.
Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed-
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.

P1122 Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not I Harness or connectors
1122 performance problem operate properly. (Throttle control motor circuit is open or
shorted.)
(Throttle control motor relay circuit is
open or shorted.)
I Electric throttle control actuator
I Throttle control motor relay
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the
return spring.

NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-334
Wiring Diagram GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC404M
EC-335
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Throttle control motor Ignition switch “OFF”
26 P/L (11 - 14V)
relay
0 - 14V★

Throttle control motor
(Open) Shift lever position is “D”
Accelerator pedal is depressed
PBIB0534E

153 B Engine is running. Approximately 0V
ground
0 - 14V★

(Close) Shift lever position is “D”
Accelerator pedal is released
PBIB0533E
Throttle control motor BATTERY VOLTAGE

157 G Ignition switch “ON”
power supply (11 - 14V)
SEC690C
E GO TO 2.
EC-336
2 CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
GI
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 153 and engine ground. MA
3. Also check harness for short to power. EM
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 3.
LC
NG E Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
3 CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 157 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester. FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEC740D
PD
FA
MTBL1585
OK or NG
RA
OK E GO TO 11.
NG E GO TO 4.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-337
4 CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect throttle control motor relay.
SEC185D
3. Check voltage between throttle control motor relay terminals 2, 3 and ground.
PBIB0097E
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 6.
NG E GO TO 5.

I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between throttle control motor relay and fuse
6 CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 157 and throttle control motor relay terminal 5.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 8.
NG E GO TO 7.
EC-338
GI
I Harness for open or short between ECM and throttle control motor relay
E Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. EM
8 CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT LC

1. Check continuity between ECM terminal 26 and throttle control motor relay terminal 1.
OK or NG
FE
OK E GO TO 10.
NG E GO TO 9.
CL
MT
AT
TF
10 CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Refer to EC-341, “Component Inspection”. PD
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 14.
FA
NG E Replace throttle control motor relay.
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-339
11 CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
SEC182D
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
MTBL1586
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 12.

2. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing.
SEC183D
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 13.
NG E Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside.
EC-340
13 CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
GI
OK or NG MA
OK E GO TO 14.
NG E GO TO 15. EM

LC
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 15.
FE
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. CL
4. Perform EC-63, “Idle Air Volume Learning”. MT
E INSPECTION END
AT
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
TF
1. Apply 12V direct current between relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5.
PD
Yes
terminals 1 and 2 FA
PBIB0098E
3. If NG, replace throttle control motor relay. RA
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
2. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6. BR
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
ST
ing”.
RS
PBIB0095E BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-341
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
RELAY TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
Power supply for the Throttle Control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch
is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not pro-
vided to the ECM.

Mode
THRTL RELAY I Ignition switch: ON ON

P1124 Throttle control motor ECM detect the throttle control motor relay I Harness or connectors
1124 relay circuit short is stuck ON. (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
shorted.)
P1126 Throttle control motor ECM detects a voltage of power source for (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
1126 relay circuit open throttle control motor is excessively low. open.)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MI lights up.
return spring.

NOTE:

TESTING CONDITION:
EC-342
With CONSULT-II GI
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-345, “Diagnostic Procedure”. MA
EM
LC
SEF058Y
With GST
FE
CL
MT
AT
With CONSULT-II TF
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. PD
FA
SEF058Y
RA
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-343
Wiring Diagram
TEC405M
EC-344
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Throttle control motor Ignition switch “OFF”
(11 - 14V)
LC
26 P/L
relay
Throttle control motor BATTERY VOLTAGE

157 G Ignition switch “ON”
power supply (11 - 14V)
FE
1 CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CL
2. Disconnect throttle control motor relay.
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEC185D
FA
3. Check voltage between throttle control motor relay terminals 2, 3 and ground.
RA
BR
ST
RS
PBIB0097E
BT
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 3. HA
NG E GO TO 2.
EL
I 15A fuse SE
I Harness for open or short between throttle control motor relay and fuse
E Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. IDX
EC-345
3 CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 157 and throttle control motor relay terminal 5.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 5.
NG E GO TO 4.

5 CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Check continuity between ECM terminal 26 and throttle control motor relay terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 7.
NG E GO TO 6.

7 CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY

OK or NG
OK E GO TO 8.
NG E Replace throttle control motor relay.

E INSPECTION END
EC-346
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
1. Apply 12V direct current between relay terminals 1 and 2. MA
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5.
Conditions Continuity EM
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
LC
PBIB0098E
3. If NG, replace throttle control motor relay.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-347
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL
MOTOR TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed-
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.

P1128 Throttle control motor cir- ECM detects short both circuits between I Harness or connectors
1128 cuit short ECM and throttle control motor. (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
(Throttle control motor)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
return spring.

NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-348
Wiring Diagram GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC406M
EC-349
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 14V★

(Open) Shift lever position is “D”
Accelerator pedal is depressed
PBIB0534E
0 - 14V★

(Close) Shift lever position is “D”
Accelerator pedal is released
PBIB0533E
SEC690C
E GO TO 2.
EC-350
2 CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
GI
2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. MA
EM
LC
FE
SEC182D
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. CL
MT
AT
TF
MTBL1587
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. PD
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 3.
FA
3 CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

RA
OK or NG BR
OK E GO TO 4.
NG E GO TO 5. ST

RS
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 5. BT
HA
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. EL
4. Perform EC-63, “Idle Air Volume Learning”. SE
E INSPECTION END
IDX
EC-351
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
2. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
ing”.
PBIB0095E
EC-352
DTC P1143, P1163
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the MA
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. EM
ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V LC
to 0V.
SEF463R
FE
CL
MT
SEF288D
AT
Mode
TF
PD
HO2S1 (B2) rpm 1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) I Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 LEAN +, RICH FA
during 10 seconds.
RA
To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sen- BR
sor 1 is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is suffi-
ciently high and whether the “lean” output is sufficiently low. When
both the outputs are shifting to the lean side, the malfunction will ST
be detected.
RS
SEF300U BT
HA
P1143 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The maximum and minimum voltage from I Heated oxygen sensor 1
1143 lean shift monitoring the sensor are not reached to the specified I Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
(Bank 1) voltages. I Fuel pressure EL
P1163 I Injectors
1163 I Intake air leaks
(Bank 2) SE
IDX
EC-353
DTC P1143, P1163

CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
I Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
I Before performing following procedure, confirm that bat-
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S1 (B1) P1143” of
“HO2S1” or “HO2S1 (B2) P1163” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK
SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
NOTE:
PBIB0546E engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.

tinuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will
take approximately 50 seconds or more.)
Vehicle speed Less than 100 km/h (62 MPH)
PBIB0547E If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step

2.

Procedure”.
SEC769C
EC-354
DTC P1143, P1163
Overall Function Check GI

gen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be con- MA
firmed.
EM
LC
WITH GST
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 115 [HO2S1 (B1) FE
3. Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm
constant under no load. CL
I The minimum voltage is over 0.1V at least one time.
4. If NG, go to EC-355, “Diagnostic Procedure”. MT
SEC184DA
AT
1 RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
SEC690C
E GO TO 2. RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-355
DTC P1143, P1163
Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1.
SEC888C
E GO TO 3.
EC-356
DTC P1143, P1163
GI
With CONSULT-II
EM
LC
FE
SEF215Z CL
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Without CONSULT-II AT
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
SEC688C
ST
7. Make sure that DTC P0000 is displayed. RS
Is it difficult to start engine? BT
Yes or No
Yes E Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174. Refer to EC-251.
No E GO TO 4.
HA
4 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER EL

OK or NG SE
OK E GO TO 5.
IDX
EC-357
DTC P1143, P1163
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 6.

For circuit, refer to EC-198, “Wiring Diagram”.
E INSPECTION END
With CONSULT-II
lowing steps.
SEF646Y

SEF647Y
EC-358
DTC P1143, P1163
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. FE
I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
CL
MT
AT
Without CONSULT-II
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 115 [HO2S1 (B1) TF
stant under no load. PD
FA
SEC184DA I The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. RA
1 time: 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V
CAUTION: BR
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ST
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri- RS
cant.
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-359
DTC P1144, P1164
to 0V.
SEF463R
SEF288D

Mode
HO2S1 (B2) rpm 1.0V
during 10 seconds.

To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sen-
sor 1 is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is suffi-
ciently high and “lean” output is sufficiently low. When both the
outputs are shifting to the rich side, the malfunction will be
detected.
SEF299U
P1144 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The maximum and minimum voltages from I Heated oxygen sensor 1
1144 rich shift monitoring the sensor are beyond the specified volt- I Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
(Bank 1) ages. I Fuel pressure
P1164 I Injectors
1164
(Bank 2)
EC-360
DTC P1144, P1164

CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
I Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). LC
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Stop engine and wait at least 5 seconds. FE
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S1 (B1) P1144” or
“HO2S1 (B2) P1164” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode with CONSULT-II. CL
MT
AT
NOTE: TF
engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.
PD
FA
PBIB0548E
RA
tinuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will BR
take approximately 50 seconds or more.)
ENG SPEED 1,500 - 2,500 rpm ST
Vehicle speed Less than 100 km/h (62 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 5 - 16.7 msec RS
PBIB0549E If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step BT

2.
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-361
DTC P1144, P1164
Procedure”.
SEC772C

firmed.
WITH GST
3. Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm
constant under no load.
— The maximum voltage is below 0.8V at least one time.
— The minimum voltage is below 0.32V at least one time.
SEC184DA
SEC690C
E GO TO 2.
EC-362
DTC P1144, P1164
GI
Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1.
MA
EM
LC
SEC888C FE
E GO TO 3. CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-363
DTC P1144, P1164
With CONSULT-II
SEF215Z
Without CONSULT-II
SEC688C
Yes or No
No E GO TO 4.
EC-364
DTC P1144, P1164
4 CHECK HO2S1 CONNECTOR FOR WATER
GI
3. Check connectors for water.
EM
LC
FE
SEC671D
Water should not exist. CL
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 5.
MT

AT
OK or NG TF
OK E GO TO 6.
NG E Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1. PD

FA
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 7. RA
BR
Refer to EC-145, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”. ST
For circuit, refer to EC-198, “Wiring Diagram”.
E INSPECTION END
RS
BT
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EL
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”. SE
lowing steps.
IDX
EC-365
DTC P1144, P1164
SEF646Y

SEF647Y
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Without CONSULT-II
SEC184DA
EC-366
DTC P1144, P1164
I The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. GI
1 time: 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V , 0 - 0.3V , 0.6 - 1.0V
CAUTION: MA
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. EM
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri- LC
cant.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-367
DTC P1146, P1166
conditions.

Mode

gen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes
the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated
oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the minimum voltage of
sensor is sufficiently low during the various driving condition such
as fuel-cut.
SEF972Z
P1146 Heated oxygen sensor 2 The minimum voltage from the sensor is I Harness or connectors
1146 minimum voltage monitor- not reached to the specified voltage. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
(Bank 1) ing I Heated oxygen sensor 2
P1166 I Fuel pressure
1166 I Injectors
(Bank 2)
EC-368
DTC P1146, P1166

CAUTION:
NOTE:
are completed. EM
I If “DTC confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch
“OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
LC
Never stop engine during this procedure. If the engine is stopped, retry procedure from step 2 in
“Procedure for COND1”
WITH CONSULT-II
Procedure for COND1 FE
For the best results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. CL
load.
4. Let engine idle for one minute. MT
5. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1146” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
6. Touch START”.
7. Let engine idle for at least 30 seconds. AT
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step 2 in Procedure for COND3”.
TF
9. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed at “COND1” on the CONSULT-II
screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take PD
FA
COOLANT TEMP/S 70 - 100°C
Selector lever Suitable position RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
PBIB0555E
HA
NOTE:
I If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2 in “Procedure for COND1”.
I If “COMPLETED” already appears at “COND2” on CONSULT-II screen before “Procedure for EL
SE
IDX
EC-369
DTC P1146, P1166
Procedure for COND2
1. While driving, release accelerator pedal completed with “OD”
“COND2” on CONSULT-II screen has turned to “COMPLETED”
(It will take approximately 4 seconds.)
NOTE:
If “COMPLETE” already appears at “COND3” on CONSULT-II
PBIB0556E
Procedure for COND3

CONSULT-II screen has turned to COMPLETED”. (It will take
RESULTS”.
lowing.
SEC775C (soak the vehicle).
“DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II

firmed.
WITH GST
ture.

at least 10 times.
this procedure.
necessary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage.
Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in
“D” position with “OD” OFF.
SEC774D
this procedure.
EC-370
DTC P1146, P1166
8. If NG, go to EC-375, “Diagnostic Procedure”. GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-371
DTC P1146, P1166
Wiring Diagram
BANK 1
TEC411M
EC-372
DTC P1146, P1166
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.
Engine is running.
LC
Warm-up condition.
(bank 1)
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-373
DTC P1146, P1166
BANK 2
TEC336M
EC-374
DTC P1146, P1166
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.
Engine is running.
LC
Warm-up condition.
(bank 2)
CL
AT
TF
PD
FA
SEC690C
RA
E GO TO 2.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-375
DTC P1146, P1166
With CONSULT-II
SEF215Z
Without CONSULT-II
SEC688C
Yes or No
No E GO TO 3.
EC-376
DTC P1146, P1166
GI
EM
LC
FE
SEC669D
4. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ground. CL
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 5. AT
NG E GO TO 4.
TF
I Joint connector-7
I Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and ground
E Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-377
DTC P1146, P1166
MTBL1588
MTBL1589
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 6.

OK or NG
OK E GO TO 7.

E INSPECTION END
With CONSULT-II
ture.
4. Let engine idle one minute.
EC-378
DTC P1146, P1166
5. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF662Y

FE
CL
MT
AT
SEF972YA
TF
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.48V at least once PD
CAUTION:
I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been FA
I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys- RA
cant.
BR
Without CONSULT-II ST
ture.
4. Let engine idle for one minute. BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-379
DTC P1146, P1166
at least 10 times.
this procedure.
sary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or
SEC774D
this procedure.
CAUTION:
cant.
EC-380
DTC P1147, P1167
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. MA
nal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. EM
conditions. LC

Mode
FE
CL
MT
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) I Engine: After warming up Revving engine from idle to 3,000 LEAN +, RICH AT
TF
PD
FA
On Board Diagnosis Logic RA

between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxy- BR
gen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes
the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated
oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of ST
the sensor is sufficiently high during the various driving condition
such as fuel-cut.
RS
SEF259VA
BT
P1147 Heated oxygen sensor 2 The maximum voltage from the sensor is I Harness or connectors HA
1147 maximum voltage moni- not reached to the specified voltage. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
(Bank 1) toring I Heated oxygen sensor 2
P1167 I Fuel pressure EL
1167 I Injectors
(Bank 2) I Intake air leaks
SE
IDX
EC-381
DTC P1147, P1167

CAUTION:
NOTE:
are completed.
I If “DTC confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Never stop engine during this procedure. If the engine is stopped, retry procedure from step 2 in
“Procedure for COND1”
WITH CONSULT-II
Procedure for COND1
For the best results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
load.
5. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” or “HO2S2 (B2) P1167” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
7. Let engine idle for at least 30 seconds.
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step 2 in “Procedure for COND3”.
9. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed at “COND1” on the CONSULT-II
screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
COOLANT TEMP/S 70 - 100°C
PBIB0557E
NOTE:
I If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2 in Procedure for COND1”.
I If “COMPLETED” already appears at “COND2” on CONSULT-II screen before “Procedure for
EC-382
DTC P1147, P1167
Procedure for COND2 GI
1. While driving, release accelerator pedal completed with “OD”
“COND2” on CONSULT-II screen has turned to “COMPLETED” MA
(It will take approximately 4 seconds.)
NOTE:
If “COMPLETE” already appears at “COND3” on CONSULT-II EM
LC
PBIB0558E
Procedure for COND3

CONSULT-II screen has turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take FE
RESULTS”. CL
lowing. MT
SEC778C (soak the vehicle).
b. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “COOLANTEMP/S” in AT
“DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II
“COOLANTEMP/S” indication on CONSULT-II. TF
PD
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxy- FA
firmed.
RA
WITH GST
ture. BR
4,000 rpm for at least one minute under no load. ST
signal] or 123 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and engine ground. RS
BT
at least 10 times. HA
this procedure. EL
necessary.
7. Keep vehicle idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or SE
SEC774D
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during IDX
this procedure.
EC-383
DTC P1147, P1167
EC-384
DTC P1147, P1167
Wiring Diagram GI
BANK 1
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC411M
EC-385
DTC P1147, P1167
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Engine is running.
Warm-up condition.
(bank 1)
EC-386
DTC P1147, P1167
BANK 2 GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC336M
EC-387
DTC P1147, P1167
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Engine is running.
Warm-up condition.
(bank 2)
SEC690C
E GO TO 2.
EC-388
DTC P1147, P1167
GI
With CONSULT-II
EM
LC
FE
SEF215Z CL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. AT
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
SEC688C
ST
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. RS
Yes or No BT
No E GO TO 3. HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-389
DTC P1147, P1167
SEC669D

OK or NG
OK E GO TO 5.
NG E GO TO 4.

I Joint connector-7
I Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and ground
EC-390
DTC P1147, P1167
GI
EM
LC
MTBL1590
FE
CL
MTBL1591
MT
AT
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 6.
TF
6 CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 PD

OK or NG
FA
OK E GO TO 7.
RA
BR
E INSPECTION END
ST
RS
BT
Component Inspection HA
With CONSULT-II EL
ture.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. SE
4. Let engine idle for one minute. IDX
EC-391
DTC P1147, P1167
5. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select
SEF662Y

SEF972YA
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.68V at least once when

the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.48V at least once when
the “FUEL INJECTION” is -25%.
CAUTION:
cant.
Without CONSULT-II
ture.
EC-392
DTC P1147, P1167
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load GI
at least 10 times.
The voltage should be above 0.68V at least once during MA
this procedure.
sary. EM
position with “OD” OFF. LC
SEC774D
this procedure.
CAUTION:
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a FE
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool CL
cant.
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-393
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
(OVERHEAT) TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
System Description
Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed sensor E

Engine coolant temperature sensor E ECM E Cooling fan relays
Air conditioner “ON” signal

Air conditioner switch E
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, and air
conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF].
Operation
SEC775D
CONSULT-II Reference Value In Data Monitor

Mode
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Engine coolant temperature is 94°C
OFF
(201°F) or less.
I After warming up engine, idle the
engine. Engine coolant temperature is between
COOLING FAN LOW
I Air conditioner switch “OFF” 95°C (203°F) and 99°C (210°F)
I Vehicle stopped
Engine coolant temperature is 100°C
HIGH
(212°F) or more.
Air conditioner switch: “OFF” OFF
I Engine: After warming up, idle the
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: “ON”
engine ON
EC-394
ECM Terminals and Reference Value GI

CAUTION: MA
EM
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO. LC
Cooling fan relay (Low
56 L
speed) Engine is running.
Approximately 0V
Cooling fan is operating. FE
Engine is running.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Cooling fan is not operating. (11 - 14V) CL
Cooling fan relay Cooling fan is operating at low speed.
55 L/B
(High speed)
Engine is running.
Cooling fan is operating at high speed.

Approximately 0V MT
On Board Diagnosis Logic AT

This diagnosis continuously monitors the engine coolant temperature.
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, the engine coolant temperature TF
will rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
detected by the ECM and the MIL lights on. PD
Diagnostic trouble Check Items
Malfunction is detected when ...
code No. (Possible Cause)
FA
P1217 I Cooling fan does not operate properly (Overheat). I Harness or connectors
1217 I Cooling fan system does not operate properly (Over- (The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted)
heat). I Cooling fan RA
I Engine coolant was not added to the system using I Thermostat
the proper filling method. I Improper ignition timing
I Engine coolant temperature sensor BR
I Blocked radiator
I Blocked front end (Improper fitting of nose
mask) ST
I Crushed vehicle frontal area (Vehicle frontal
is collided but not repaired)
I Blocked air passage by improper installation RS
of front fog lamp or fog lamps.
I Improper mixture ratio of coolant
I Damaged bumper BT
For more information, refer to “MAIN 12
CAUSES OF OVERHEATING”, EC-403.
HA
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant following the procedure in the MA EL
section (“Changing Engine Coolant”, “ENGINE MAINTENANCE”). Also, replace the engine oil.
a. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute like pour-
ing coolant by kettle. Be sure to use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA section SE
(“Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio”, “RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS”).
b. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
IDX
EC-395

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan.
During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious
burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by
turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape.
Then turn the cap all the way off.
AEC640
With CONSULT-II
1) Check the coolant level and mixture ratio (using coolant tester)
in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level and
mixture ratio.
I If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to “Diagnos-
tic Procedure”, EC-398.
I If the coolant mixture ratio is out of the range of 45 to 55%
(varies depending on destinations), replace the coolant in the
following procedure LC section, “Changing Engine Coolant”.
SEF646X 2) Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to “Diagnos-
4) Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
5) If the results are NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-398.
Without CONSULT-II
1) Check the coolant level and mixture ratio (using coolant tester)
in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level and
SEC163BA mixture ratio.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to “Diagnos-
I If the coolant mixture ratio is out of the range of 45 to 55%
(varies depending on destinations), replace the coolant in the
following procedure LC section, “Changing Engine Coolant”.
2) Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to “Diagnos-
3) Start engine.
Be careful not to overheat engine.
4) Set temperature control lever to full cold position.
5) Turn air conditioner switch “ON”.
6) Turn blower fan switch “ON”.
7) Run engine at idle for a few minutes with air conditioner oper-
ating.
Be careful not to overheat engine.
8) Make sure that cooling fan operates. Refer to “OPERATION”
table of Cooling fan, EC-394.
If NG, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-398.
EC-396
Wiring Diagram GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC151M
EC-397
INSPECTION START
H
Do you have CONSULT-II? No GO TO q A Without CON-
E
SULT-II.
Yes
H
CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED NG GO TO q C . Check cooling
E
OPERATION. fan low speed control cir-
SEC698C cuit.
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect cooling fan relay-2 and -3.
3. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE
TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2
operate at low speed.
OK
H
CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED NG GO TO q D . Check cooling
E
OPERATION. fan high speed control cir-
SEF646X cuit.
With CONSULT-II
2. Reconnect cooling fan relay-2 and -3.
4. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE
TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
operate at high speed.
OK
H
GO TO q
B.
SEF111X
EC-398
q
A
GI
H MA
CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED NG GO TO q C . Check cooling
E
OPERATION. fan low speed control cir-
cuit. EM
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
2. Start engine and let it idle. LC
3. Set temperature lever at full cold posi-
SEC698C tion.
4. Turn air conditioner switch “ON”.
5. Turn blower fan switch “ON”.
operate at low speed. FE
OK
H
CL
CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED NG GO TO q D . Check cooling
E
OPERATION. fan high speed control cir-
Without CONSULT-II
cuit. MT
1. Turn ignitions witch “OFF”.
SEC163BA 2. Reconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
3. Turn air conditioner switch and blower AT
fan switch “OFF”.
4. Disconnect engine coolant temperature
sensor harness connector.
TF
5. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant
temperature sensor harness connector.
6. Restart engine and make sure that cool-
PD
ing fans-1 and -2 operate at high speed.
H
OK FA
GO TO q
B.
SEC322D
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-399
q
B
H
CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK. NG Check the following for
E
Apply pressure to the cooling system with leak.
a tester, and check if the pressure drops. I Hose
Testing pressure: I Radiator
157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi) I Water pump (Refer to LC
CAUTION: section, “Water Pump”.)
Higher than the specified pressure may If NG, repair or replace.
SLC754A cause radiator damage.
Pressure should not drop.
OK
H
CHECK RADIATOR CAP. NG Replace radiator cap.
E
Apply pressure to cap with a tester and
check radiator cap relief pressure.
Radiator cap relief pressure:
For the Middle East:
78 - 98 kPa (0.78 - 0.98 bar, 0.8 -
1.0 kg/cm2, 11 - 14 psi)
SLC755A Except above:
108 - 127 kPa (1.08 - 1.27 bar, 1.1
- 1.3 kg/cm2, 16 - 18 psi)
OK
H
CHECK THERMOSTAT. NG Replace thermostat.
E
1. Remove thermostat.
2. Check valve seating condition at normal
room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
3. Check valve opening temperature and
SLC343 valve lift.
Valve opening temperature:
76.5°C (170°F) [standard]
Valve lift:
More than 10 mm/90°C (0.39 in/194°F)
4. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F)
below valve opening temperature. For
details, refer to LC section, “Thermo-
stat”.
OK
H
CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERA- NG Replace engine coolant
E
TURE SENSOR. temperature sensor.
EC-189.
OK
H
CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES.
If the cause cannot be isolated, go to
“MAIN 12 CAUSES OF OVERHEATING”,
EC-403.
H
CHECK INSPECTION END
EC-400
q
C GI
H
NG
CHECK COOLING FAN POWER SUPPLY E
Check the following. MA
CIRCUIT. I 10A fuse
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. I 40A fusible links
2. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1. I Harness for open or
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. short between cooling EM
4. Check voltage between cooling fan fan relay-1 and fuse
relay-1 terminals q1 ,q3 ,q6 and ground I Harness for open or
with CONSULT-II or tester. short between cooling
Battery voltage fan relay-1 and battery LC
If NG, repair open circuit or
SEC699C OK short to ground to short to
nectors.
H
NG FE
CHECK COOLING FAN GROUND CIR- E
Repair open circuit or short
CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT to ground or short to power
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. in harness or connectors.
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness
connector and cooling fan motor-2 har- CL
ness connector.
5 and cooling
MT
fan motor-1 terminal q1 , cooling fan
SEC700C Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. AT
4. Also check harness for short to ground
and short to power.
7 and cooling TF
fan motor-2 terminal q1 , cooling fan
and short to power.
OK FA
H
NG
CHECK COOLING FAN OUTPUT SIGNAL E
CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT. I Harness connectors
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. E127 , M21 RA
2. Check harness continuity between ECM I Harness connectors
terminal q
56 and cooling fan relay-1 ter- M52 , F7
minal q
2 . Refer to Wiring Diagram. I Harness for open or BR
Continuity should exist. short between cooling
3. Also check harness for short to ground fan relay-1 and ECM
and short to power. If NG, repair open circuit or
OK
short to ground or short to ST
nectors.
H
CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY-1.
NG
Replace cooling fan relay.
RS
E
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-404
H
OK BT
NG
CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND E
Replace cooling fan motors.
-2.
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-404. HA
H
OK
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT.
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
EL
H
OK SE
INSPECTION END
IDX
EC-401
q
D
H
NG
CHECK COOLING FAN POWER SUPPLY CIR- Check the following.
E
CUIT. I Harness for open or short
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. between cooling fan relays-2
2. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3. and -3 and 10A fuse
4. Check voltage between cooling fan relays-2 between cooling fan relays-2
and -3 terminals q 1 ,q6 and ground with and fusible link
CONSULT-II or tester. If NG, repair harness or con-
Battery voltage nectors.
SEC780C OK
H
NG
CHECK COOLING FAN GROUND CIRCUIT Repair open circuit or short to
E
FOR OPEN AND SHORT ground or short to power in
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. harness or connectors.
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness con-
nector and cooling fan motor-2 harness con-
nector.
3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan
relay-2 terminal q7 and cooling fan motor-1
terminal q2 , cooling fan relay-2 terminal q3
and cooling fan motor-1 terminal q 3 , cooling
fan relay-2 terminal q5 and body ground.
SEC698C 4. Also check harness for short to ground and
short to power.
5. Check harness continuity between cooling fan
relay-3 terminal q7 and cooling fan motor-2
terminal q2 , cooling fan relay-3 terminal q3 ,
cooling fan relay-2 terminal q5 .
6. Also check harness for short to ground and
short to power.
OK
H
NG
CHECK COOLING FAN OUTPUT SIGNAL CIR- Check the following.
E
CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT. I Harness connectors E127 ,
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. M21
2. Check harness continuity between ECM termi- I Harness connectors M52 ,
SEC700C nal q55 and cooling fan relay-2 terminal q
2 , F7
cooling fan relay-3 terminal q2 . I Harness for open or short
Refer to Wiring Diagram. between cooling fan relay-2
Continuity should exist. and -3 and ECM
3. Also check harness for short to ground and If NG, repair open circuit or
short power. short to ground or short to
power in harness or connec-
OK tors.
H
NG
CHECK COOLING FAN RELAYS-2 AND -3. Replace cooling fan relays.
E
Refer to “Component Inspection”, EC-404.
OK
H
NG
CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS. Replace cooling fan motors.
E
OK
H
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTER-
MITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-145.
OK
H
INSPECTION END
EC-402
Main 12 Causes of Overheating GI

MA
OFF 1 I Blocked radiator I Visual No blocking —
I Blocked condenser
I Blocked radiator grille EM
I Blocked bumper
FLUIDS AND LUBRI- LC
4 I Radiator cap I Pressure tester 108 - 127 kPa See “System Check”, FE
(1.08 - 1.27 bar, 1.1 - 1.3 “ENGINE COOLING SYS-
kg/cm2, 16 - 18 psi) TEM” in LC section.
59 - 98 kPa (0.59 - 0.98 CL
bar, 0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2,
9 - 14 psi) (Limit)
MT
ON*2 5 I Coolant leaks I Visual No leaks See “System Check”,
TEM” in LC section. AT
ON*2 6 I Thermostat I Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot. See “Thermostat” and
COOLING SYSTEM” in TF
LC section.
ON*1 7 I Cooling fan I Visual (Coupling) Operating See “TROUBLE DIAGNO-
I CONSULT-II SIS FOR DTC P1217”,
PD
EC-394.
OFF 8 I Combustion gas leak I Color checker chemical Negative — FA
gauge when driving
RA
I Coolant overflow to res- I Visual No overflow during driving See “Changing Engine
ervoir tank and idling Coolant”, “ENGINE MAIN- BR
ervoir tank to radiator reservoir tank NANCE” in MA section. ST
OFF 11 I Cylinder head I Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- See “Inspection”, “CYLIN-
gauge mum distortion (warping) DER HEAD” in EM sec- RS
tion.
12 I Cylinder block and pis- I Visual No scuffing on cylinder See “Inspection”, “CYLIN-
tons walls or piston DER BLOCK” in EM sec- BT
tion.
*1: Engine running at idle for coupling type. Turn ignition switch ON for electrical cooling fan.
HA
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to “OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS” in LC section. EL
SE
IDX
EC-403
COOLING FAN RELAYS-1, -2 AND -3
3 and q
5 ,q
6 and q
7 .
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and Yes
2
SEF745U
If NG, replace relay.
COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2

1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
check operation.
Terminals
Speed (+) (−)
Cooling fan motor Low 1 4
High 1, 2 3, 4
SEF734W Cooling fan motor should operate.

EC-404
DTC P1225 TP
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds MA
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve EM
the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The LC
ing condition.
FE
CL
MT
AT
The MI will not light up for this self-diagnosis. TF
P1225 Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning value is I Electric throttle control actuator PD
1225 learning performance excessively low. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
problem
FA
RA
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously BR
TESTING CONDITION: ST
RS
BT
WITH CONSULT-II
HA
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. EL
dure”.
SE
WITH GST
SEF058Y IDX
EC-405
DTC P1225 TP
SEC183D
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 2.

E INSPECTION END
EC-406
DTC P1226 TP
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds MA
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve EM
the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The LC
ing condition.
FE
CL
MT
AT
The MI will not light up for this self-diagnosis. TF
P1226 Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning is not per- I Electric throttle control actuator PD
1226 learning performance formed successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
problem
FA
RA
NOTE:
BR
conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least ST
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat- RS
BT
WITH CONSULT-II
HA
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds. EL
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4, 32 times.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-408, “Diagnostic Proce- SE
dure”.
WITH GST IDX

SEF058Y Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
EC-407
DTC P1226 TP
SEC183D
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 2.

E INSPECTION END
EC-408
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER

MA
P1229 Sensor power supply cir- ECM detects a voltage of power source for I Harness or connectors
1229 cuit short sensor is excessively low or high. (The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is EM
shorted.)
(APP sensor circuit is shorted.)
(MAF sensor circuit is shorted.) LC
(Power steering pressure sensor circuit
is shorted.)
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
shorted.)
(TP sensor 1 and 2) FE
I Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP
sensor 1)
I MAF sensor CL
I Power steering pressure sensor
I Refrigerant pressure sensor
I ECM pin terminal MT
FAIL-SAFE MODE
AT
TF
return spring.
PD
FA
RA
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously BR
TESTING CONDITION:
ST
tery voltage is more than 10V at idle. RS
BT
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. HA
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-411, “Diagnostic Procedure”. EL
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. SE
SEF058Y IDX
EC-409
Wiring Diagram
TEC407M
EC-410
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.
103 Y Sensors’ power supply Ignition switch “ON” Approximately 5V

LC
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEC690C
PD
E GO TO 2.
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-411
2 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
SEC182D
PBIB0082E
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 4.
NG E GO TO 3.
3 CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR SHORT

I Harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
MTBL1602
I ECM pin terminal.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 4.
NG E Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-412
4 CHECK COMPONENTS
GI
I Accelerator pedal position sensor (Refer to EC-460, “Component Inspection”.) MA
I Mass air flow sensor (Refer to EC-179, “Component Inspection”.)
I Power steering pressure sensor (Refer to EC-315, “Component Inspection”.)
OK or NG EM
OK E GO TO 7.
NG E Replace malfunctioning component. LC

OK or NG
OK E GO TO 6. FE
NG E GO TO 5.
CL
1. Replace electric throttle control actuator. MT
4. Perform EC-63, “Idle Air Volume Learning”. AT
E INSPECTION END
TF
PD
E INSPECTION END
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-413
The crankshaft position sensor (OBD) is located on the transmis-
sion housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the flywheel or drive
plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
SEF804Z changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
This sensor is not used to control the engine system.
It is used only for the on board diagnosis.
SEC732D

CAUTION:
age to the ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than the ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (AC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 1 - 2V★
Engine is running.
Warm-up condition.
Idle speed
SEC748D
Crankshaft position sen-
111 W 3 - 4V★
sor (OBD)
(AC range)
Engine is running.
SEC749D
EC-414

Malfunction is detected when a chipping of the flywheel or drive
plate gear tooth (cog) is detected by the ECM. MA
POSSIBLE CAUSE
I Harness or connectors EM
I Crankshaft position sensor (OBD)
I Drive plate/Flywheel
LC

NOTE: FE
conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least
5 seconds before conducting the next test. CL
MT
AT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II. TF
2. Start engine and run it for at least 2 minutes at idle speed.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “Diagnostic Procedure”,
EC-417. PD
With GST
FA
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
SEF058Y
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-415
Wiring Diagram
TEC451M
EC-416

MA
EM
LC
FE
SEC690C CL
E GO TO 2.
MT
2 CHECK CKPS (OBD) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
AT
1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (OBD) and ECM harness connectors.
TF
PD
FA
RA
SEC732D
2. Check continuity between ECM terminal 111 and sensor terminal 1. BR
OK or NG ST
OK E GO TO 4.
NG E GO TO 3. RS
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BT

I Harness connectors E127, M21 HA
I Harness for open or short between ECM and crankshaft position sensor (OBD)
EL
SE
IDX
EC-417
4 CHECK CKPS (OBD) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Reconnect ECM harness connectors.
2. Check harness continuity between CKPS (OBD) terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 6.
NG E GO TO 5.

I Harness for open between crankshaft position sensor (OBD) and ECM
6 CHECK IMPROPER INSTALLATION

1. Loosen and retighten the fixing bolt of the crankshaft position sensor (OBD).
2. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, again.
Is a 1st trip DTC P1336 detected?
Yes or No
Yes E GO TO 7.
No E INSPECTION END
EC-418
7 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (OBD)
GI
1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (OBD) harness connector.
2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. MA
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
EM
LC
FE
SEF960N CL
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEF504V
Resistance: Approximately 512 - 632Ω [at 20°C (68°F)] FA
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 8.
RA
NG E Replace crankshaft position sensor (OBD).
8 CHECK CKPS (OBD) SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

BR
1. Disconnect harness connectors E201, E70.
2. Check harness continuity between harness connector E70 terminal 10 and engine ground. ST
OK or NG RS
OK E GO TO 10.
NG E GO TO 9. BT

HA
I Harness connectors E127, M21 EL
I Joint connector-7
I Harness for open between harness connector F38 and engine ground SE
IDX
EC-419
10 CHECK GEAR TOOTH
Visually check for chipping flywheel or drive plate gear tooth (cog).
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 11.
NG E Replace the flywheel or drive plate.

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-145.
E INSPECTION END
EC-420
DTC P1706 PNP
SWITCH TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
When the shift lever position is “P” or “N”, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is “ON”.
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the “ON” signal) exists. MA
Mode EM
LC
P/N POSI SW I Ignition switch: ON Shift lever: P or N ON
Shift lever: Except above OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic FE
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause CL
P1706 Park/neutral position The signal of the park/neutral position I Harness or connectors
1706 switch (PNP) switch is not changed in the pro- (PNP switch circuit is open or shorted.)
cess of engine starting and driving. I Park/neutral position (PNP) switch MT
AT
CAUTION: TF
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously PD
FA
RA
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. BR
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the fol-
lowing conditions. ST
Position (Selector lever) Known-good signal
“N” and “P” position ON RS
Except the above position OFF
If NG, go to EC-425, “Diagnostic Procedure”. BT

SEF212Y
If OK, go to following step.
4. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. HA
5. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive
seconds.
EL
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL More than 5 msec SE
VHCL SPEED SE More than 64 km/h (40 MPH)
IDX
SEF213Y
EC-421
DTC P1706 PNP
dure”.

Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral
position (PNP) switch circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 80 (PNP switch signal)
and body ground under the following conditions.
Condition (Gear position) Voltage V (Known-good data)
“P” and “N” position Approximately 0
Except the above position Battery voltage

PBIB0169E
EC-422
DTC P1706 PNP
Wiring Diagram GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC420M
EC-423
DTC P1706 PNP
TEC421M
EC-424
DTC P1706 PNP
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.

Approximately 0V LC
Shift lever position is “P” or “N”.
80 R/PU PNP switch
Except the above gear position (11 - 14V)
FE
1 INSPECTION START CL
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
MT
Yes E GO TO 2.
No E GO TO 3.
AT
2 CHECK PNP SWITCH SIGNAL
TF
2. Select “A/T”, then “DATA MONITOR” mode while CONSULT-II.
3. Select “P/N POSI SW” signal and check its indication under the following conditions.
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
PBIB0102E
RS
BT
MTBL1597
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 5.
HA
NG E GO TO 4.
EL
SE
IDX
EC-425
DTC P1706 PNP
3 CHECK PNP SWITCH SIGNAL
Confirm that the PNP switch signal is sent to TCM correctly.
Refer to AT section.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 5.
NG E GO TO 4.
4 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT

Check the PNP switch circuit.
E INSPECTION END
5 CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
SEC298D
3. Disconnect park/neutral position relay-3 harness connector.
SEC185D
4. Check harness continuity between TCM terminal 48 and park/neutral position relay-3 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 6.
EC-426
DTC P1706 PNP
6 CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
GI
1. Check harness continuity between park/neutral position relay-3 terminal 1, 6 and ground.
OK or NG EM
OK E GO TO 7.
NG E Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. LC
7 CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-III
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 80 and park/neutral position relay-3 terminal 7.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. FE
OK or NG CL
OK E GO TO 9.
NG E GO TO 8. MT

AT
I Harness connectors F7, M52
I Harness connectors M21, E127 TF
I Harness for open between ECM and park/neutral position relay-3
PD
9 CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION RELAY-3
FA
OK or NG
OK E RA
NG E
BR
ST
E INSPECTION END
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-427
DTC P1805 BRAKE
Description
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed.
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.

Mode
BRAKE SW I Ignition switch: ON Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON

The MI will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
P1805 Brake switch A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM I Harness or connectors
1805 for an extremely long time while the (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or
vehicle is driving. shorted.)
I Stop lamp switch
FALI-SAFE MODE
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Vehicle condition Driving condition
When engine is idling Normal
When accelerating Poor acceleration

WITH CONSULT-II
2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II.
dure”.
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-428
DTC P1805 BRAKE
Wiring Diagram GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC249M
EC-429
DTC P1805 BRAKE
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Engine is running.
Approximately 0V
Brake pedal fully released
106 G/Y Stop lamp switch
Brake pedal depressed (11 - 14V)
1 CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.
MTBL1593
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 4.
NG E GO TO 2.
EC-430
DTC P1805 BRAKE
2 CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
GI
1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
MA
EM
LC
SEC194D FE
2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
CL
MT
AT
TF
PBIB0117E
Voltage: Battery voltage PD
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 4. FA
NG E GO TO 3.
RA
I 10A fuse BR
I Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and battery
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-431
DTC P1805 BRAKE
4 CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
SEC194D
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 6.
NG E GO TO 5.

I Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch
6 CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH

OK or NG
OK E GO TO 7.
NG E Replace stop lamp switch.

E INSPECTION END
STOP LAMP SWITCH
SEC194D
EC-432
DTC P1805 BRAKE
2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 GI
under the following conditions.
MA
Brake pedal fully released Should not exist.
Brake pedal depressed Should exist.
EM
If NG, adjust brake pedal installation, refer to BR section, and
perform step 2 again.
LC
PBIB0118E
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-433
DTC P2122, P2123 APP
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accel-
erator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal
PBIB0146E from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on
these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor.
The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut.

Mode
I Shift lever position is “D” Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V

(engine stopped)
I Shift lever position is “D” Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.

P2122 Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP I Harness or connectors
2122 sensor 1 circuit low input sensor 1 is sent to ECM. (The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P2123 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP I Accelerator pedal position sensor
2123 sensor 1 circuit high input sensor 1 is sent to ECM. (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
EC-434

NOTE:
LC
WITH CONSULT-II
CL
MT
SEF058Y
AT
WITH GST
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-435
Wiring Diagram
TEC401M
EC-436
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.

LC
Accelerator pedal position Accelerator pedal fully released
87 W
Engine stopped Less than 4.75V FE

Sensor ground Engine is running. CL

89 B (Accelerator pedal posi- Approximately 0V
Warm-up condition.
tion sensor 1) Idle speed
MT
Sensor power supply
94 LG (Accelerator pedal posi- Ignition switch “ON” Approximately 2.5V
tion sensor 2) AT
Sensor ground
100 R (Accelerator pedal posi- Ignition switch “ON” Approximately 0V TF
tion sensor 2)
Sensor power supply

103 Y (Accelerator pedal posi- Ignition switch “ON” Approximately 5V
PD
tion sensor 1)
Ignition switch “ON” FA

Accelerator pedal position Accelerator pedal fully released RA
117 G

BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-437
SEC690C
E GO TO 2.
2 CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector.
SEC182D
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 7 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEC673D
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 4.
NG E GO TO 3.
EC-438
GI
I Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor MA
EM
4 CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
LC
3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 9 and ground.
OK or NG
FE
OK E GO TO 6.
NG E GO TO 5.
CL
MT
I Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
E Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. AT
6 CHECK APP SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT TF
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 87 and APP sensor terminal 8.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 8.
FA
NG E GO TO 7.
RA
ST
8 CHECK APP SENSOR
RS
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 10. BT
NG E GO TO 9.
HA
9 REPLACE APP SENSOR
1. Replace the accelerator pedal position sensor.
EL
E INSPECTION END
IDX
EC-439
E INSPECTION END
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 87 (APP sensor 1
signal), 117 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the
PBIB0184E (Accelerator pedal posi-
tion sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
(Accelerator pedal posi-
4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next

step.
ing”.
EC-440
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accel- MA
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal EM
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The LC
these signals.
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The
ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. FE
CL
MT
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor AT

Mode
Specification data are reference values. TF
ACCEL SEN1 I Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36 PD

FA
(engine stopped)
RA
On Board Diagnosis Logic BR

ST
P2127 Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP I Harness or connectors
2127 sensor 2 circuit low input sensor 2 is sent to ECM. (The APP sensor 2 circuit is open or RS
shorted.)
P2128 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP I Accelerator pedal position sensor
2128 sensor 2 circuit high input sensor 2 is sent to ECM. (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) BT
FAIL-SAFE MODE
HA
EL
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. SE
IDX
EC-441

NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITH GST
EC-442
Wiring Diagram GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC402M
EC-443
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

87 W

Engine is running.
89 B Sensors’ ground Approximately 0V
Warm-up condition.
Idle speed
Sensor power supply
tion sensor 2)
Sensor ground
100 R (Accelerator pedal posi- Ignition switch “ON” Approximately 0V
tion sensor 2)

117 G

SEC690C
E GO TO 2.
EC-444
2 CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEC182D FE
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 10 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEC674D PD
Voltage: Approximately 2.5V
OK or NG
FA
OK E GO TO 4.
NG E GO TO 3.
RA
E Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. ST
4 CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

RS
3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 12 and ground. BT
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. HA
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 6.
EL
NG E GO TO 5.
SE
IDX
EC-445
6 CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 117 and APP sensor terminal 11.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 8.
NG E GO TO 7.

8 CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK E GO TO 10.
NG E GO TO 9.

E INSPECTION END

E INSPECTION END
EC-446
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. MA
signal), 117 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the EM
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage LC
PBIB0184E

(Accelerator pedal posi- FE

step.
CL
ing”.
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-447
DTC P2135 TP
ing condition.

Mode

P2135 Throttle position sensor Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM I Harness or connector
2135 circuit range/performance compared with the signals from TP sensor (The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open
problem 1 and TP sensor 2. or shorted.)
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.
EC-448
DTC P2135 TP

NOTE:
LC
WITH CONSULT-II
CL
MT
SEF058Y
AT
WITH GST
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-449
DTC P2135 TP
Wiring Diagram
TEC400M
EC-450
DTC P2135 TP
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.
Engine is running.
Sensor ground LC
89 B Approximately 0V
(Throttle position sensor) Warm-up condition.
Idle speed

CL
MT
Sensor power supply
(Throttle position sensor)
AT

Shift lever position is “D” TF
PD
Accelerator pedal fully depressed FA
Diagnostic Procedure RA
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEC690C
EL
E GO TO 2.
SE
IDX
EC-451
DTC P2135 TP
2 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
SEC182D
PBIB0082E
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 4.
3 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and engine ground.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 4.
4 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4, ECM terminal 98 and elec-
tric throttle control actuator terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 5.
EC-452
DTC P2135 TP
GI
OK or NG MA
OK E GO TO 7.
NG E GO TO 6. EM

LC
E INSPECTION END
FE
CL
E INSPECTION END
MT
AT
TF
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 108 (TP sensor 1 FA
signal), 98 (TP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the
RA
PBIB0179E Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
(Throttle position sensor BR
1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
98 Fully released Less than 4.75V ST

2) Fully depressed More than 0.36V

RS
next step.
7. Perform EC-63, “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learn- BT
ing”.
9. Perform EC-63, “Idle Air Volume Learning”. HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-453
DTC P2138 APP
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accel-
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
these signals.
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The
ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut.

Mode

(engine stopped)

P2138 Accelerator pedal position Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM I Harness or connector
2138 sensor circuit range/ compared with the signals from APP sen- (The APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open
performance problem sor 1 and APP sensor 2. or shorted.)
I Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 and
2
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
EC-454
DTC P2138 APP

NOTE:
LC
WITH CONSULT-II
CL
MT
SEF058Y
AT
WITH GST
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-455
DTC P2138 APP
Wiring Diagram
TEC403M
EC-456
DTC P2138 APP
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.

LC
87 W
Engine stopped Less than 4.75V FE

Sensor ground Engine is running. CL

89 B (Accelerator pedal posi- Approximately 0V
Warm-up condition.
tion sensor 1) Idle speed
MT
Sensor power supply
tion sensor 2) AT
Sensor ground
100 R (Accelerator pedal posi- Ignition switch “ON” Approximately 0V TF
tion sensor 2)
Sensor power supply

103 Y (Accelerator pedal posi- Ignition switch “ON” Approximately 5V
PD
tion sensor 1)
Ignition switch “ON” FA

Accelerator pedal position Accelerator pedal fully released RA
117 G

BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-457
DTC P2138 APP
SEC690C
E GO TO 2.
2 CHECK APP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

SEC182D
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminals 7, 10 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB0084E
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 4.
NG E GO TO 3.
EC-458
DTC P2138 APP
GI
I Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor MA
EM
4 CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
LC
3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminals 9, 12 and ground.
OK or NG
FE
OK E GO TO 6.
NG E GO TO 5.
CL
MT
E Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. AT
6 CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT TF
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 87 and APP sensor terminal 8, ECM terminal 117 and APP sensor terminal 11.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 8.
FA
NG E GO TO 7.
RA
ST
8 CHECK APP SENSOR
RS
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 10. BT
NG E GO TO 9.
HA
EL
E INSPECTION END
IDX
EC-459
DTC P2138 APP
signal), 117 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the
PBIB0184E


step.
ing”.
EC-460
IGNITION SIGNAL TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the MA
power transistor. The power transistor turns on and off the ignition
coil primary circuit. This on-off operation induces the proper high
voltage in the coil secondary circuit. EM
LC
SEC781C
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-461
Wiring Diagram
TEC415M
EC-462
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.
Engine is running.
LC
Ignition switch “OFF” 0 - 1.0V
ECM relay For a few seconds after turning ignition switch

42 B/Y “OFF”
(Self shut-off)
Ignition switch “OFF” FE
BATTERY VOLTAGE
More than a few seconds passed after turning (11 - 14V)
ignition switch “OFF”
CL
163 B/R BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM Ignition switch “OFF”
166 B/R (11 - 14V)
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-463
TEC416M
EC-464
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.
0 - 0.1V★
LC
Engine is running.
Warm-up condition.
Idle speed
FE
18 Y/R Ignition signal No. 1 PBIB0521E
19 G Ignition signal No. 2
20 Y Ignition signal No. 3 0 - 0.2V★ CL
Engine is running. MT
Warm-up condition.
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm AT
PBIB0522E
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-465
TEC417M
EC-466
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
NO.
0 - 0.1V★
LC
Engine is running.
Warm-up condition.
Idle speed
FE
21 R/B Ignition signal No. 4 PBIB0521E
29 R/G Ignition signal No. 5
30 R Ignition signal No. 6 0 - 0.2V★ CL
Engine is running. MT
Warm-up condition.
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm AT
PBIB0522E
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-467
1 CHECK ENGINE START
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, and restart engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II) E GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULT-II) E GO TO 3.
No E GO TO 4.
2 CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

With CONSULT-II
PBIB0133E
OK or NG
OK E INSPECTION END
NG E GO TO 13.
EC-468
GI
Without CONSULT-II
1. Let engine idle. MA
2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 18, 19, 20, 21, 29, 30 and ground with an oscilloscope.
EM
LC
FE
SEC828C
3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as shown below. CL
MT
AT
PBIB0521E TF
OK or NG
OK E INSPECTION END
PD
NG E GO TO 13.
FA
4 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 163, 166 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
PBIB0135E
OK or NG HA
OK E GO TO 5.
NG E Go to EC-146, “POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM”. EL
SE
IDX
EC-469
5 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
4. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB0624E
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 11.
NG E GO TO 6.
6 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

SEC668D
3. Check harness continuity between ECM relay terminal 3 and condenser terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 8.
NG E GO TO 7.

I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and condenser
EC-470
8 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
GI
Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 5 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
MA
EM
LC
SEC741D FE
OK or NG
CL
OK E GO TO 10.
NG E GO TO 9.
MT
AT
I 15A fuse
I Harness for open or short between ECM relay and battery
TF
E Repair or replace harness or connectors.
PD
10 CHECK ECM RELAY
Refer to EC-145, “Component Inspection”. FA
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 20.
RA
NG E Replace ECM relay.
BR
11 CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector. ST
3. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring diagram.
Continuity should exist. RS
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 12.
BT
NG E Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector.
HA
12 CHECK CONDENSER
Refer to EC-474, “Component Inspection”. EL
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 13.
SE
NG E Replace condenser.
IDX
EC-471
13 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
3. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
SEC783C
SEC784C
5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF107S
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 15.
NG E GO TO 14.

I Harness connectors F25, F121
I Harness for open or short between ignition coil and ECM relay
EC-472
15 CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
GI
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and engine ground. MA
3. Also check harness for short to power. EM
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 17.
LC
NG E GO TO 16.

I Harness connectors F25, F121 FE
I Harness for open or short between ignition coil and ground
CL
17 CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
MT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 18, 19, 20, 21, 29, 30 and ignition coil terminal 3.
AT
OK or NG
TF
OK E GO TO 19.
NG E GO TO 18.
PD
FA
I Harness for open or short between ECM and ignition coil
RA
BR
19 CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
OK or NG ST
OK E GO TO 20.
NG E Replace ignition coil with power transistor. RS
20 CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT BT

E INSPECTION END
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-473
ECM RELAY
1. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
OFF No
PBIB0077E
3. If NG, replace ECM relay.
CONDENSER
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance: Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F)
MBIB0031E
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.
Terminal No. Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
3 and 1 Except 0 or
3 and 2
Except 0
1 and 2
MBIB0032E
EC-474
SNOW MODE SWITCH TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
To turn on the switch, push the lower side of it. The indicator light
of the switch will illuminate and the transmission shifts into the MA
snow driving mode.
I This mode is used for standing starts on slippery (snowy,
sandy) roads. EM
I When the selector lever is in the D position, the transmission
shifts from 1st to 5th gear automatically from standing starts or
when accelerating from low speed. LC
SEC222D

CAUTION: FE
CL
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage) MT
NO.
Snow mode switch is snow position.

Battery voltage (11 - 14V) AT
60 Y/G Snow mode switch Snow switch is “ON”.
Approximately 0V TF
Except above switch position
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-475
Wiring Diagram
TEC332M
EC-476
INSPECTION START
MA
H
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION. OK CHECK SNOW INDICA-
E
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. TOR LAMP. EM
2. Check voltage as follows. 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check snow indicator
Snow mode switch ECM terminal q
60 voltage lamp as follows.
AUTO 0V
LC
Snow mode Snow indica-
SEC188D SNOW 11 - 14 V (Battery voltage) switch tor lamp
AUTO OFF
NG SNOW ON
A F NG
q
OK
H FE
INSPECTION END
H
NG
CL
CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR SNOW Check the following.
E
MODE SWITCH. I 7.5A fuse
2. Disconnect snow mode switch harness M20 , B19 MT
connector. I Harness for open or short
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. between snow mode
4. Check voltage between snow mode switch and fuse. AT
switch terminal q2 and ground. If NG, repair open circuit,
Battery voltage short to ground or short to
OK nectors. TF
H
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I. NG Check the following.
E PD
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. I Harness connector B19 ,
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. M20
3. Check harness continuity between snow I Harness connector M52 ,
mode switch terminal q 1 and ECM ter- F7
FA
minal q60 . I Harness for open or short
Refer to Wiring Diagram. between snow mode
Continuity should exist. switch and ECM
4. Check harness continuity between ECM If NG, repair open circuit, RA
terminal q 60 and snow mode switch ter- short to ground or short to
minal q6 . Refer to wiring diagram. power in harness or con-
Continuity should exist. nectors.
BR
and short to power.
If OK, reconnect ECM harness connector.
OK
ST
H
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. NG Check the following.
E
1. Check harness continuity between snow I Harness connector B19 , RS
mode switch harness connector terminal M20
q7 and ground. I Harness for open or short
Refer to Wiring Diagram. between snow mode
Continuity should exist. switch and ground. BT
If OK, check harness for short to power. If NG, repair open circuit,
short to power in harness
OK or connectors. HA
H
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR EL
H
SE
INSPECTION END
IDX
EC-477
q
A
H
CHECK SNOW INDICATOR LAMP INPUT NG Repair open circuit, short
E
SIGNAL CIRCUIT. to ground or short to power
1. Check continuity between snow mode in harness or connectors.
switch terminal q
1 and q 6 . Refer to
wiring diagram.
and short to power.
OK
H
CHECK SNOW INDICATOR LAMP NG Check the following.
E
GROUND. I Harness connectors
1. Check harness continuity between B19 , M20
snow mode switch terminal q 7 and I Harness for open or
ground. Refer to wiring diagram. short between snow
Continuity should exist. mode switch and ground
OK
or connectors.
H
CHECK SNOW INDICATOR LAMP. NG Replace snow indicator
E
Refer to EL or AT section. lamp or snow mode switch
assembly.
OK
H
INSPECTION END
EC-478
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL
SYSTEM (VIAS) TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
Description GI
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
MA
ECM func-
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
tion
EM
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position VIAS con-
LC
VIAS control solenoid valve
Ignition switch Start signal trol

FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
SEC802C
RS
When the engine is running at low or medium speed, the ECM
sends the signal to the VIAS control solenoid valve then power
valve is fully closed. Under this condition, the effective suction port BT
length is equivalent to the total length of the intake manifold collec-
tor’s suction port including the intake valve. This long suction port
provides increased air intake which results in improved suction HA
efficiency and higher torque generation.
The surge tank and one-way valve are provided. When engine is
running at high speed, the ECM does not send the signal to the
EL
VIAS control solenoid valve, thus enabling power valve to be fully
opened. This signal introduces the intake manifold vacuum into the SE
power valve actuator and therefore opens the power valve to two
suction passages together in the collector.
Under this condition, the effective port length is equivalent to the IDX
EC-479
Description (Cont’d)
length of the suction port provided independently for each cylinder.
This shortened port length results in enhanced engine output with
reduced suction resistance under high speeds.
Power valve
The power valve is installed in intake manifold collector and used
to control the suction passage of the variable induction air control
system. It is set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the
power valve actuator operated by the vacuum stored in the surge
tank. The vacuum in the surge tank is controlled by the VIAS con-
trol solenoid valve.
SEC803C
VIAS control solenoid valve

The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum
signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from
the ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the
intake manifold is for high speed. When the ECM sends an ON
signal the coil pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum
signal to the power valve actuator.
SEC804C

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
VIAS control solenoid
27 LG/R
valve Engine is running.
0 - 1.0V
EC-480
Wiring Diagram GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC161M
EC-481
INSPECTION START
H
E
With CONSULT-II
2. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE
SEC805C TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve “ON”
and “OFF”, and make sure that power
valve actuator rod moves.
Without CONSULT-II
2. Rev engine quickly up to above 5,000
rpm and make sure that power valve
actuator rod moves.
NG
H
CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID NG Check the following.
E
SEC806C VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT. I Harness connectors
1. Stop engine. M52 , F7
2. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve I 10A fuse
harness connector. I Harness continuity
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. between fuse and VIAS
4. Check voltage between terminal q1 and control solenoid valve
ground with CONSULT-II or tester. If NG, repair harness or
Voltage: Battery voltage connectors.
OK
H
CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID NG Repair open circuit or short
E
VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR to ground or short to power
OPEN AND SHORT. in harness or connectors.
SEC804C 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
terminal q27 and terminal q
2 . Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
and short to power.
OK
H
RETEST OVERALL FUNCTION. OK INSPECTION END
E
1. Reconnect harness connectors discon-
nected.
2. Perform CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
again.
SEC807C NG
H
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT. NG Repair or replace harness
E
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR or connectors.
OK
H
Replace VIAS control solenoid valve as
intake manifold collector assembly.
EC-482
START SIGNAL TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor GI

Mode
Specification data are reference values. MA
START SIGNAL I Ignition switch: ON , START , ON OFF , ON , OFF EM
LC
CAUTION:
TER- FE
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Ignition switch “ON” Approximately 0V CL
59 R/W Start signal
Ignition switch “START” 9 - 12V
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-483
Wiring Diagram
TEC163M
EC-484
INSPECTION START
MA
H
OK
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION.
E
INSPECTION END EM
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. LC
2. Check “START SIGNAL” in “DATA
PBIB0182E
MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
IGN “ON” OFF

IGN “START” ON
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- FE
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to “START”. CL
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal
q
59 and ground.
Voltage:
Ignition switch “START” MT
Battery voltage (9 - 12V)
SEC824C Except above
Approximately 0V AT
NG
H
Check if 7.5A fuse is OK. NG Replace 7.5A fuse. TF
E
OK
H PD
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG Check the following.
E
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and M52 , F7 FA
7.5A fuse. I Harness for open or short
3. Check harness continuity between ECM between ECM and fuse
terminal q59 and fuse block. block
Refer to Wiring Diagram. If NG, repair open circuit,
RA
Continuity should exist. short to ground or short to
If OK, check harness for short to ground power in harness or con-
and short to power. nectors. BR
OK
H
CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT. ST
RS
H
INSPECTION END
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-485
INJECTOR CIRCUIT TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is
energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The
amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration.
Pulse duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The
ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel
needs.
SEF375Z

Mode
B/FUEL SCHDL I Engine: After warming up Idle 5.0 - 5.5 msec
I Shift lever: N
I No-load
INJ PULSE-B1 I Engine: After warming up Idle 3.0 - 4.0 msec
INJ PULSE-B2 I Shift lever: N
I No-load
EC-486
Wiring Diagram GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC162M
EC-487
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)★
Engine is running.
Warm-up condition.
Idle speed
5 BR/W Injector No. 1

6 GY/L Injector No. 2
PBIB0529E
7 BR/Y Injector No. 3
13 GY/R Injector No. 4 BATTERY VOLTAGE
14 BR Injector No. 5 (11 - 14V)★
15 GY Injector No. 6
Engine is running.
Warm-up condition.
PBIB0530E
1 INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to “START”.
Is any cylinder ignited?
Yes or No
Yes E GO TO 2.
No E GO TO 3.
EC-488
GI
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. MA
EM
LC
FE
PBIB0133E
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. CL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound. MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
MEC703B
Clicking noise should be heard. RA
OK or NG
OK E INSPECTION END
BR
NG E GO TO 3.
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-489
3 CHECK INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect injector harness connector.
SEC793C
4. Check voltage between injector terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB0289E
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 5.
NG E GO TO 4.

I 10A fuse
I Harness for open or short between injector and fuse
5 CHECK INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between injector terminal 1 and ECM terminals 5, 6, 7, 13, 14, 15.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 7.
NG E GO TO 6.
EC-490
GI
I Harness connectors F101, F12 MA
I Harness for open or short between ECM and injector
EM
7 CHECK INJECTOR
LC
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 8.
NG E Replace injector.
FE
CL
E INSPECTION END
MT
AT
INJECTOR
TF
1. Disconnect injector harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
Resistance: 13.5 - 17.5Ω [at 20°C (68°F)] PD
FA
SEC809C
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-491
FUEL PUMP TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
System Description
E Fuel
ECM E pump
Ignition switch Start signal relay
E
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several sec-

Condition Fuel pump operation
onds after the ignition switch is turned on to improve
engine storability. If the ECM receives a 120° signal Ignition switch is turned to ON.
Operates for
from the camshaft position sensor, it knows that the 5 seconds.
engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. Engine running and cranking Operates.
If the 120° signal is not received when the ignition
switch is on, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump When engine is stopped Stops in 1 second.
operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby Except as shown above Stops.
improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive
the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump
relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
The fuel pump with a fuel damper is an in-tank type (the pump and
damper are located in the fuel tank).
SEF609V

Mode
I Ignition switch is turned to ON (Operates for 5 seconds).

I Engine running and cranking ON
FUEL PUMP RLY I When engine is stopped (Stops in 1 second)
Except as shown above OFF
EC-492
ECM Terminals and Reference Value GI

CAUTION: MA
EM
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO. LC
For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch 0 - 1.0V

“ON”
41 R/Y Fuel pump relay Engine is running. FE
5 seconds after turning ignition switch “ON” (11 - 14V) CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-493
Wiring Diagram
TEC164M
EC-494
INSPECTION START
MA
H
OK
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION.
E
INSPECTION END EM
2. Pinch fuel feed hose with fingers.
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt
on the fuel feed hose for 5 seconds
LC
after ignition switch is turned “ON”.
SEC810C
NG
H
E
I 15A fuse FE
2. Disconnect fuel pump relay. I Harness for open or short
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. between fuse and fuel
1 , pump relay CL
q3 and ground with CONSULT-II or If NG, repair harness or
tester. connectors.
Voltage: Battery voltage MT
OK
SEC684CA
H
NG
AT
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT-I. Check the following.
E
2. Disconnect fuel tank gauge unit (fuel C2 , B37
pump) harness connector. I Harness for open or short
TF
3. Check harness continuity between termi- between fuel pump and
nal q
6 and body ground. body ground
Refer to Wiring Diagram. If NG, repair open circuit, PD
Continuity should exist. short to power in harness
If OK, check harness for short to or connectors.
power. FA
OK
SEF479P H RA
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT-II. NG Check the following.
E
2. Check harness continuity between relay M20 , B19
BR
terminal q5 and fuel pump terminal q
4 . I Harness connectors
Refer to Wiring Diagram. B137 , C2
If OK, check harness for short to between fuel pump and ST
ground and short to power. fuel pump relay
OK short to ground or short to RS
nectors.
H BT
SEF608V
q
A
(Go to next page.)
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-495
q
A
H
E
2. Check harness continuity between ECM M52 , F7
terminal q
41 and fuel pump relay terminal I Harness for open or short
q2 . between ECM and fuel
Refer to Wiring Diagram. pump relay
SEF073Y
nectors.
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace fuel pump relay.
E
(Fuel pump relay).
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect fuel pump relay, fuel pump
harness connector and ECM harness
connector.
3. Turn fuel pump relay “ON” and “OFF” in
“ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II
and check operating sound.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
Without CONSULT-II
EC-497.
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace fuel pump.
E
(Fuel pump).
EC-497.
OK
H
H
INSPECTION END
EC-496
FUEL PUMP RELAY
3 and q
5 . MA
12V direct current supply EM
Yes
between terminals q 1 and q
2
LC
SEF511P
FUEL PUMP
1. Disconnect fuel pump harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals q 4 and q
6 . FE
Resistance: 0.2 - 5.0Ω at 25°C (77°F)
If NG, replace fuel pump.
CL
MT
SEF607V
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-497
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the
air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan sys-
tem.
SEC742D
SEF099X
EC-498
Wiring Diagram GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC341M
EC-499
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Engine is running.
Refrigerant pressure sen-
88 R/G Warm-up condition. 1.0 - 4.0V
sor Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON”.
Sensor ground Engine is running.

89 B (Refrigerant pressure sen- Approximately 0V
Warm-up condition.
sor) Idle speed
1 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION
2. Turn A/C switch and blower switch “ON”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 88 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB0187E
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V
OK or NG
OK E INSPECTION END
NG E GO TO 2.
EC-500
2 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
GI
1. Turn A/C switch and blower switch “OFF”.
2. Stop engine. MA
3. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
EM
LC
FE
SEC742D
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. CL
5. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
MT
AT
TF
PD
PBIB0085E
FA
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 4. RA
NG E GO TO 3.
BR
Check the following. ST
I Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor RS
BT
4 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
HA
3. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground.
EL
OK or NG
SE
OK E GO TO 6.
NG E GO TO 5.
IDX
EC-501
I Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
6 CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN ANDSHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 88 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 8.
NG E GO TO 7.

I Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor

OK or NG
OK E Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.
EC-502
ELECTRICAL LOAD
SIGNAL TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
Description GI
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger switch signal, etc.) is transferred
through the CAN communication line from combination meter to ECM. MA
Mode EM
LC
LOAD SIGNAL I Ignition switch: ON Rear window defogger switch is ON ON
and/or lighting switch is 2nd.
Rear window defogger switch is OFF OFF
and lighting switch is OFF.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-503
ELECTRICAL LOAD
Wiring Diagram
TEC426M
EC-504
ELECTRICAL LOAD
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC371M
EC-505
ELECTRICAL LOAD
1 CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I
With CONSULT-II
With GST
2. Connect CONSULT-II or GST and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Select “LOAD SIGNAL” and check indication under the following conditions.
PBIB0103E
MTBL1594
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) E GO TO 2.
OK (Without CONSULT-II) E GO TO 3.
NG E GO TO 4.
EC-506
ELECTRICAL LOAD
2 CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II
GI
With CONSULT-II
Check “LOAD SIGNAL” indication under the following conditions. MA
EM
LC
FE
PBIB0103E
CL
MT
MTBL1595
AT
OK or NG
OK E INSPECTION END
TF
NG E GO TO 5.
3 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FUNCTION PD

1. Start engine.
2. Turn “ON” the rear window defogger switch. FA
3. Check the rear windshield. Is the rear windshield heated up?
Yes or No
Yes E GO TO 4. RA
No E Check rear window defogger circuit. Refer to EL section.
BR
4 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1. Stop engine. ST
2. Disconnect rear window defogger relay.
3. Disconnect combination meter harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between rear window defogger relay terminal 5 and combination meter terminal 27. RS
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. BT
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 6.
HA
NG E GO TO 5.

EL
I Harness connectors E127, M21 SE
I Harness for open or short between rear window defogger relay and combination meter
IDX
EC-507
ELECTRICAL LOAD
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 10.
NG E Replace combination meter.
7 CHECK HEADLAMP FUNCTION

1. Start engine.
2. Lighting switch “ON” at 2nd position.
3. Check that headlamp high beams are illuminated.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 8.
NG E Check headlamp circuit. Refer to EL section.
8 CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect combination meter harness connector.
3. Disconnect combination switch harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between combination switch terminals 6, 7 and combination meter terminal 26.
SEC761D
MTBL1596
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 10.
NG E GO TO 9.

I Diode E108
I Harness for open or short between combination switch and combination meter
E Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power.
EC-508
ELECTRICAL LOAD
GI
OK or NG MA
OK E GO TO 11.
NG E Replace combination meter. EM

LC
E INSPECTION END
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-509
DATA LINK
CONNECTORS TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
Wiring Diagram
TEC423M
EC-510
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
Description GI
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
PBIB0491E
AT
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the TF
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the engine PD
operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is propor-
tionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and FA
idling.
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-511
Description (Cont’d)
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
SEC665D
EC-512
EVAP CANISTER
Check EVAP canister as follows: MA
1. Block port C. Orally blow air through port A.
Check that air flows freely through port B.
2. Block port A. Orally blow air through port C. EM
Check that air flows freely through port B.
LC
SEF917W
FUEL CHECK VALVE

1. Blow air through connector on fuel tank side.
A considerable resistance should be felt and a portion of air flow FE
should be directed toward the EVAP canister side.
2. Blow air through connector on EVAP canister side.
Air flow should be smoothly directed toward fuel tank side. CL
3. If fuel check valve is suspected of not properly functioning in
steps 1 and 2 above, replace it.
MT
SEF631V
AT
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL
FILLER CAP)
1. Wipe clean valve housing. TF
PD
FA
SEF989X
RA
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
Pressure:
16.0 - 20.0 kPa (0.16 - 0.200 bar, 0.163 - 0.204 BR
kg/cm2, 2.32 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum:
−6.0 to −3.5 kPa (−0.060 to −0.035 bar, −0.061 to ST
−0.036 kg/cm2, −0.87 to −0.51 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
RS
SEF943S BT
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-513
POSITIVE CRANKCASE
VENTILATION TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
PBIB0492E
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to con-
duct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake manifold. During partial
throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the
blow-by gas through the PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the
valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of
ventilating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet
tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air passes through the
hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle
condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by
flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection
in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all condi-
tions.
SEC481D
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE
With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover.
A properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes
through it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a fin-
ger is placed over valve inlet.
SEC137A
EC-514
POSITIVE CRANKCASE
VENTILATION TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE GI
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any
hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace. MA
EM
LC
ET277
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-515
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
Fuel Pressure Regulator

Fuel pressure
kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi)
Approximately
At idle
245 (2.45, 2.5, 36)
A few seconds after ignition Approximately

switch is turned OFF to ON 294 (2.94, 3.0, 43)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing

Idle speed rpm
No-load*1 Target idle speed 675±50

(in “N” position)
Air conditioner: ON
750 rpm or more
(in “N” position)
Ignition timing 10°±5° BTDC

*1: Under the following conditions:
I Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
I Electrical load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defog-
ger)
Mass Air Flow Sensor

Supply voltage V Battery voltage (11 - 14)
0.75 - 1.5 at idle*

Output voltage at idle V
1.7 - 2.4 at 2,500 rpm*
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running
under no-load.
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor

Temperature °C (°F) Resistance
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 kΩ
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 kΩ
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 kΩ
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 3.3 - 4.0Ω
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 5.0 - 7.0Ω
Fuel Pump
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Ω 0.2 - 5.0
EC-516
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) TB48DE A/T (WITH EURO-OBD)
EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid GI

Valve
MA
Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] Ω 31 - 35
Injector EM
Resistance [at 20°C (77°F)] Ω 14.0 - 15.0
LC
Ignition Coil with Power Transistor
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
3 (+) - 2 (−) Except 0 or

FE
1 (+) - 3 (−)
Except 0
1 (+) - 2 (−)
CL
Condenser
MT
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] MΩ Above 1
Throttle Control Motor AT
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 - 15 Ω

TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-517
QUICK-GLOW SYSTEM TD
Circuit Diagram
EXCEPT FOR COLD AREAS
TEC364M
EC-518
FOR COLD AREAS GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC365M
EC-519
Wiring Diagram
FOR COLD AREAS
TEC366M
EC-520
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC367M
EC-521
TEC368M
EC-522
ENGINE ROOM FAN MOTOR ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT TD
Wiring Diagram GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC369M
EC-523
Electrical Components Inspection

COOLING FAN MOTOR
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector.
DEC013

check operation.
Terminal
Cooling fan motor
! @
q
1 q
2
Operated
q
3 q
4
SEF624V
COOLING FAN RELAY
DEC014

3 and q
5 ,q
6 and q
7 .
Yes
terminals q
1 and q 2
SEC202B
EC-524
Electrical Components Inspection (Cont’d)
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SWITCH-1 GI
1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature switch-1 harness con-
nector.
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
DEC015
AT
2. Check operation as shown in the figure.
Coolant temperature
°C (°F)
Operation Continuity TF
Increased to 87 - 93
OFF , ON ON: Exists.
(189 - 199) PD
Decreased to 82 - 84
ON , OFF OFF: Does not exist.
(180 - 183)
FA
SEC503D
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-525
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM ZD30DDTi
Circuit Diagram
TEC452M
EC-526
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY ZD30DDTi
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC352M
EC-527
DTC 0102 MASS AIR FLOW SEN ZD30DDTi
Wiring Diagram
TEC353M
EC-528
DTC 0104 VEHICLE SPEED SEN ZD30DDTi
Wiring Diagram GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC354M
EC-529
DTC 0208 OVER HEAT ZD30DDTi
Wiring Diagram
TEC355M
EC-530
1 INSPECTION START
MA
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes E GO TO 2.
EM
No E GO TO 3.
LC
2 CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
2. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF646X
3. Make sure that cooling fan-1 operates.

PD
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 12.
NG E GO TO 4.
FA
3 CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION RA

Without CONSULT-II
2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. BR
3. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates.
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
MEC475B
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 12.
SE
NG E GO TO 4.
IDX
EC-531
4 CHECK COOLING FAN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1.
SEF690V

4. Check voltage between cooling fan relay-1 terminals 1, 3, 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEC533D
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 6.
NG E GO TO 5.

I 10A fuse or 20A fuse
I 40A fusible links
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and fuse
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and battery
EC-532
6 CHECK COOLING FAN GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
GI
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector. MA
EM
LC
FE
SEF691V
3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 1, cooling fan relay-1 terminal CL
7 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 3, cooling fan motor-1 terminals 2, 4 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 7. AT
TF
7 CHECK COOLING FAN OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 14 and cooling fan relay-1 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. PD
OK or NG
FA
OK E GO TO 9.
NG E GO TO 8. RA
8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BR

I Harness connectors M52, F7 ST
I Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and ECM
RS
9 CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY-1
BT
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 10. HA
NG E Replace cooling fan relay.
EL
SE
IDX
EC-533
10 CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR-1
Supply battery voltage between the following terminals and check operation.
SEF645V
MTBL1304
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 11.
NG E Replace cooling fan motor.

Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”.
E INSPECTION END
12 CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK

Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 98 kPa (0.98 bar, 1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi)
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
SLC754A
Pressure should not drop.

OK or NG
OK E GO TO 14.
NG E GO TO 13.
EC-534
GI
Check the following for leak.
I Hose MA
I Radiator
I Water pump (Refer to LC section, “Water Pump”.)
E Repair or replace. EM
14 CHECK RADIATOR CAP LC

Apply pressure to cap with a tester and check radiator cap relief pressure.
FE
CL
MT
SLC755A AT
Radiator cap relief pressure:
59 - 98 kPa (0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 14 psi)
TF
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 15.
PD
NG E Replace radiator cap.
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-535
15 CHECK THERMOSTAT
1. Remove thermostat.
2. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
3. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift.
SLC343
Valve opening temperature:

82°C (180°F) [standard] (Models for cold areas)
76.5°C (170°F) [standard] (Models for except cold areas)
Valve lift:
More than 10 mm/95°C (0.394 in/203°F)
4. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature. For details, refer to LC section, “Thermostat”.
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 16.
NG E Replace thermostat.
16 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor.
2. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
SEF304X
OK or NG
OK E GO TO 17.
NG E Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
EC-536
17 CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES
GI
If the cause cannot be isolated, go to “MAIN 12 CAUSES OF OVERHEATING”, EC-538.
E INSPECTION END MA
EM
LC
Component Inspection FE
COOLING FAN RELAY-1
3 and q
5 ,q
6 and q
7 .
CL
terminals 1 and 2
Yes MT

AT
SEC202B
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-537
Main 12 Causes of Overheating

OFF 1 I Blocked radiator I Visual No blocking —
I Blocked condenser
I Blocked radiator grille
I Blocked bumper
FLUIDS AND LUBRI-
4 I Radiator cap I Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa (0.59 - 0.98 See “System Check”,
bar, 0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, “ENGINE COOLING SYS-
9 - 14 psi) (Limit) TEM” in LC section.
ON*2 5 I Coolant leaks I Visual No leaks See “System Check”,
TEM” in LC section.
ON*2 6 I Thermostat I Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot. See “Thermostat” and
COOLING SYSTEM” in
LC section.
ON*1 7 I Cooling fan I Visual Operating See “DTC 0208 OVER
HEAT”.
OFF 8 I Combustion gas leak I Color checker chemical Negative —
gauge when driving
I Coolant overflow to res- I Visual No overflow during driving See “Changing Engine
ervoir tank and idling Coolant”, “ENGINE MAIN-
ervoir tank to radiator reservoir tank NANCE” in MA section.
OFF 11 I Cylinder head I Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- See “Inspection”, “CYLIN-
gauge mum distortion (warping) DER HEAD” in EM sec-
tion.
12 I Cylinder block and pis- I Visual No scuffing on cylinder See “Inspection”, “CYLIN-
tons walls or piston DER BLOCK” in EM sec-
tion.
*1: Engine running at idle.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to “OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS” in LC section.
EC-538
DTC 0402 P9⋅FUEL TEMP SEN ZD30DDTi
Wiring Diagram GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC356M
EC-539
DTC 0403 ACCEL POS SENSOR ZD30DDTi
Wiring Diagram
TEC453M
EC-540
DTC 0403 ACCEL POS SENSOR ZD30DDTi
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC454M
EC-541
DTC 0902 ECM RLY ZD30DDTi
Wiring Diagram
TEC358M
EC-542
DTC 1003 EGR VOLUME CONT/V ZD30DDTi
Wiring Diagram GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC359M
EC-543
MI (MIL) & DATA LINK CONNECTORS ZD30DDTi
Wiring Diagram
TEC396M
EC-544
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX TD42Ti
Alphabetical & Numerical Index for DTC GI

ALPHABETICAL INDEX FOR DTC
X: Applicable —: Not applicable MA
Items
DTC Trip MIL illumination Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
ACCEL POS SENSOR 0403 1 — EC-635 EM

COOLANT TEMP SEN 0103 1 — EC-610
CRANK POS SEN (TDC) 0407 1 — EC-641 LC

ECM 2 0301 1 — EC-621
ECM 10 0802 1 — EC-647
ECM 11 0804 1 — EC-649
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING 0505 — — — FE
MAY BE REQUIRED.
F/INJ TIMG FB 0201 1 X EC-615

CL
INTAIR TEMP SEN 0401 1 — EC-629
NEEDLE LIFT SEN 0304 1 — EC-623

MT
NUMERICAL INDEX FOR DTC
X: Applicable —: Not applicable
AT
Items
DTC Trip MIL illumination Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
0103 COOLANT TEMP SEN 1 — EC-610 TF

0201 F/INJ TIMG FB 1 X EC-615
0301 ECM 2 1 — EC-621 PD

0304 NEEDLE LIFT SEN 1 — EC-623
0401 INTAIR TEMP SEN 1 — EC-629
FA
0403 ACCEL POS SENSOR 1 — EC-635
0407 CRANK POS SEN (TDC) 1 — EC-641
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
RA
0505 FURTHER TESTING — — —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
0802 ECM 10 1 — EC-647

BR
0804 ECM 11 1 — EC-649
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-545
PRECAUTION TD42Ti
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR

BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS system composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL Y61 is as follows (The compo-
sition varies according to the destination and optional equipment.):
I For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steer-
ing wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
I For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of front side air bag module (located in the outer side of front
seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring
harness, warning lamp (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
I To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
I Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the RS section.
I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow harness connector.
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD)

System of Engine
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
I Be sure to turn the ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect the negative battery cable before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc.
will cause the MIL to light up.
I Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
I Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-
locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to EL section, “Description”, “HARNESS CONNEC-
TOR”.
I Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with
a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
I Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM before
returning the vehicle to the customer.
EC-546
PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION TD42Ti
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
SEC837D
EC-547
Precautions
I Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness
connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect nega-
tive battery cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM
because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition
switch is turned off.
SEF289H
I When connecting ECM harness connector, tighten secur-

ing bolt until the gap between orange indicators disap-
pears.
: 3.0 - 5.0 N⋅m (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
SEF308Q
I When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
SEF291H
I Before replacing ECM, perform Terminals and Reference

Value inspection and make sure ECM functions properly.
Refer to EC-596.
MEF040D
I If MIL illuminates or blinks irregularly when engine is

running, water may have accumulated in fuel filter. Drain
water from fuel filter. If this does not correct the
malfunction, perform specified trouble diagnostic proce-
dures.
I After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform
“OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK” or “DTC (Diagnostic
Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC CONFIRMA-
TION PROCEDURE” if the repair is completed. The “OVER-
ALL FUNCTION CHECK” should be a good result if the
SAT652J
repair is completed.
EC-548
Precautions (Cont’d)
I When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never GI
allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor. MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
SEF348N
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-549
Special Service Tools

FOR DIESEL ENGINE INJECTION NOZZLE
Tool number
Description
Tool name
KV11289004
Nozzle cleaning kit
q
1 KV11290012
Box
q
2 KV11290110
Brush
q
3 KV11290122
Nozzle oil sump scraper
q
4 KV11290140
Nozzle needle tip
q
5 KV11290150
Nozzle seat scraper
q
6 KV11290210
Nozzle holder
q
7 KV11290220
Nozzle hole cleaning
needle
NT296
KV11105700
No. 1 injection nozzle
holder socket
NT648
KV11292210
Nozzle cleaning device
NT293
KV11229352 Measuring plunger lift

Measuring device
q
1 KV11229350
Holder
q
2 KV11229360
Nut
q
3 KV11229370
Pin
q
4 KV11254410
Dial gauge
NT570
EC-550
Special Service Tools (Cont’d)
Tool number
GI
Description
Tool name
KV11103000 Removing injection pump drive gear MA
Pulley puller
EM
LC
NT676
KV10111100 Removing injection pump drive gear cover

Seal cutter
FE
NT046
WS39930000 Pressing the tube of liquid gasket CL

Tube presser
MT
NT052
AT
KV11290632
Nozzle oil sump scraper
TF
PD
NT294
KV11290620
Nozzle seat scraper
FA
RA
NT295
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-551
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM TD42Ti
Engine Component Parts Location
SEC778D
EC-552
Engine Component Parts Location (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
SEC801D
EC-553
Engine Component Parts Location (Cont’d)
SEC802D
EC-554
Circuit Diagram GI
WAGON AND HARDTOP MODELS
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC455M
EC-555
PICKUP MODELS
TEC431M
EC-556
System Diagram GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
SEC903D
EC-557
Vacuum Hose Drawing
SEC904D
Refer to “System Diagram”, EC-557 for vacuum control system.
EC-558
System Chart GI
MA
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) E
EM
Engine coolant temperature sensor E LC

Fuel injection timing control E Injection timing control valve
Needle lift sensor E

FE
Glow control system E Glow relay & glow lamp
CL
Accelerator position sensor E
MT
Malfunction indicator lamp
On board diagnostic system E (On the instrument panel)
Neutral position switch E AT
ECM
TF
Ignition switch E EGR valve & throttle control EGRC-solenoid valve & throttle
valve control
E
control solenoid valve A, B
PD
FA
Battery voltage E
Cooling fan control Cooling fan relay

RA
E
BR
Air conditioning cut control Air conditioner relay

ST
E
Air conditioner switch E RS
BT
Intake air temperature sensor E
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-559
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION TD42Ti
Fuel Injection Timing Control System

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The fuel injection timing system provides the optimal fuel injection timing for the target amount of fuel injected
according to engine speed. The timing is compensated when the vehicle is being driven or when starting
depending on the engine coolant temperature.
The ECM performs duty control on the timing control valve, allowing the valve to provide optimal fuel injection
timing. The ECM also performs feedback control on the timing control valve using the signal from the needle
lift sensor which detects the actual fuel injection timing.
BASIC CONTROL
Input/output signal line
Engine speed
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) E Injection
ECM E timing con-
Injection timing trol valve
The optimal fuel injection timing data, predetermined in proportion

to engine speeds and amount of fuel injected, are stored in the
ECM memory. The ECM uses the data to control the fuel injection
timing.
SEF650S
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION (When starting)

Engine speed

Engine coolant temperature sensor E Injection
ECM timing con-
E
Ignition timing trol valve
Start signal
Ignition switch E
For better startability under cold engine conditions, the fuel injec-
tion timing is compensated according to the engine coolant tem-
perature.
SEF651S
EC-560
DESCRIPTION TD42Ti
Fuel Injection Timing Control System (Cont’d)
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION (During driving) GI
MA
Engine speed
EM
Engine coolant temperature Injection
Engine coolant temperature sensor E ECM
E timing con-
trol valve
LC
Injection timing
For better exhaust efficiency under cool engine conditions, the fuel
injection timing is controlled within a compensation range depend- FE
ing on the engine speed, engine coolant temperature and amount
of fuel injected.
CL
MT
AT
SEF652S
Air Conditioning Cut Control TF
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL LINE PD

Air conditioner “ON” signal
Air conditioner switch E
FA
Accelerator position
Accelerator pedal position sensor E
Air
ECM E conditioner
RA
Vehicle speed relay
BR
Engine coolant temperature sensor E
ST
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves acceleration when the air conditioner is used. RS
When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed, the air conditioner is turned off for a few seconds.
When engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high, the air conditioner is turned off. This continues
until the coolant temperature returns to normal. BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-561
DESCRIPTION TD42Ti
Positive Crankcase Ventilation

DESCRIPTION
The open-type crankcase ventilation system is utilized as a crank-
case emission control system.
The open-type crankcase emission control system prevents
blow-by gas from emitting the atmosphere and keeps the internal
crankcase pressure constant.
During the valve operation, the blow-by gas is fed into the intake
manifold by the air control valve.
This is activated by the intake manifold vacuum. When the intake
air flow is restricted by the throttle body, the internal rocker cover
pressure decreases. At this point, the crankcase emission control
valve keeps the internal rocker cover pressure constant so that air
or dust is not sucked in around the crankshaft oil seal.
SEC934D
INSPECTION
Air control valve
1. Remove rocker cover.
2. Remove control valve from rocker cover.
3. Check the valve as follows.
a. Plug all the lower holes.
b. While applying the vacuum with a handy vacuum pump, make
sure that valve operating sound is heard.
CAUTION:
Before starting inspection, wipe off any engine oil if it exists
SEC935D
in the valve.
Ventilation hose
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air.
If any hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
SEC692
EC-562
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE TD42Ti
Injection Pump GI
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
SEC794D
FA
RA
REMOVAL
1. Drain engine coolant and radiator. BR
2. Remove intercooler and bracket.
3. Remove intake manifold.
4. Remove EGR tube and EGR cooler. ST
RS
BT
5. Remove injection tube.
Cover the injection nozzle assembly with a plug to prevent HA
dust entry.
EL
SE
SEC830D
IDX
EC-563
Injection Pump (Cont’d)
6. Remove injection pump drive gear cover.
DEF012
7. Remove vacuum pump.

I Remove the eye bolt securing the oil tube. Remove the vacuum
pump. Be careful not to bend the oil tube during vacuum pump
removal.
DEM062
I Loosen injection pump drive gear nut and remove drive gear by
using puller (SST).
SEC792D
8. Remove injection pump bracket (Cylinder block side).

9. Remove injection pump fixing nuts and bolts.
10. Remove injection pump with injection tubes.
Disconnect injection tube from pump once it is removed.
EC-564
INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT GI
1. Confirm that No. 1 piston is set at TDC on its compression
stroke.
MA
EM
LC
DEM102
FE
CL
MT
DEM089
AT
2. Install injection pump.
(1) Temporarily set injection pump so that the flange of pump is
aligned with aligning mark on front cover. TF
CAUTION:
Don’t damage gasket between injection pump and front plate.
(2) Install injection drive gear over the key. PD
: 59 - 69 N⋅m (6 - 7 kg-m, 43 - 51 ft-lb)
Coat key with grease to prevent it from falling into the front
cover. Make sure that “Z” marks are aligned. FA
3. Install vacuum pump.
4. Install drive gear cover while applying a continuous bead of
SEC783D
liquid gasket. RA
I Be sure liquid gasket is 2.5 to 3.5 mm (0.098 to 0.138 in)
wide.
I Attach timing gear case cover to timing gear case within 5 BR
minutes after coating.
I Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling engine oil.
I Use Genuine Liquid Gasket or equivalent. ST
RS
SEF626I BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-565
Plunger lift adjustment
1. Loosen injection pump mounting nuts and mounting bracket
bolt.
2. Remove plug bolt from distributor head and install dial gauge.
3. Plunger lift measurement and adjustment
(1) Turn crankshaft counterclockwise 20 to 25 degrees from No. 1
piston at TDC.
(2) Find dial gauge’s needle rest position at step (1) set position,
then set the gauge to zero.
(3) Turn crankshaft clockwise until No. 1 piston is set at TDC.
SEC793D (4) Read dial gauge indication.
0.576±0.02 mm (0.0227±0.0008 in)
(5) If it is not within the above range, turn pump body until it comes
within standard range.
a. If indication is smaller than the specified value, turn pump
body counterclockwise.
b. If indication is larger than the specified value, turn pump
body clockwise.
4. Tighten injection pump securely.
Injection pump fixing bolt:
: 20 - 25 N⋅m (2.0 - 2.5 kg-m, 14 - 18 ft-lb)
Injection pump to mounting bracket:
: 30 - 41 N⋅m (3.1 - 4.2 kg-m, 22 - 30 ft-lb)
5. Disconnect dial gauge and reinstall plug bolt with new washer.
: 14 - 20 N⋅m (1.4 - 2.0 kg-m, 10 - 14 ft-lb)
6. Connect injection tubes.
: 20 - 25 N⋅m (2.0 - 2.5 kg-m, 14 - 18 ft-lb)
7. Install EGR.
8. Install intake manifold.
9. Refill engine coolant.
10. Bleed air from fuel system.
Refer to EC-572.
SEF616G
Idle and maximum speed adjustment

CAUTION:
I Do not remove sealing wires unless absolutely necessary.
I Disturbing full-load adjusting screw will change fuel flow
characteristics, resulting in an improperly adjusted engine.
Readjustment of fuel injection pump should be done using
a pump tester.
I If maximum speed adjusting screw is turned in direction
that increases control lever angle, engine damage may
result.
SEC791D
Idle adjustment
Refer to “Checking Idle Speed”, “ENGINE MAINTENANCE” in
MA section.
Maximum speed adjustment

Maximum speed adjusting screw is retained by sealing wire
and need not be adjusted under normal circumstances.
However, if it becomes necessary to adjust it, the following
procedure should be followed:
1. Start engine and warm it up until coolant temperature indicator
points to middle of gauge.
EC-566
2. Connect tachometer’s pick-up to No. 1 fuel injection tube. GI
To obtain accurate reading of engine rpm, remove clamps that
secure No. 1 fuel injection tube.
3. Depress accelerator pedal fully under no load and, at this point, MA
read the tachometer indication.
Maximum engine speed (Under no load):
+50
4,600-150 rpm EM
LC
4. If indication is lower than specified maximum engine speed,

turn maximum speed adjusting screw counterclockwise 1 or 2
rotations. Then depress accelerator pedal to floor under no load
and, at this point, read indication. FE
5. If indication is still lower than specified speed, repeat step 4
above until specified engine speed is reached.
6. After adjustment, tighten lock nut securely.
CL
7. Seal with a sealing wire or install a sealing cap.
MT
SEF627I
AT
Injection Nozzle
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION TF
1. Remove injection tube assembly using nozzle holder socket
(Special Service Tool).
CAUTION: PD
I Be careful that notch of nozzle holder socket doesn’t con-
tact the terminal point of No. 1 nozzle holder while remov-
ing. FA
I If terminal point is damaged by impact while performing
removing and installing procedure, replace it with brand
SEC830D
new one. RA
2. Remove spill tube assembly.
To prevent spill tube from breaking, remove it by gripping
nozzle holder. BR
3. Remove injection nozzle assembly.
4. Install injection nozzle in the reverse order of removal.
Injection nozzle to cylinder head: ST
: 54 - 64 N⋅m (5.5 - 6.5 kg-m, 40 - 47 ft-lb)
Spill tube nut:
: 29 - 39 N⋅m (3.0 - 4.0 kg-m, 22 - 29 ft-lb)
RS
Injection tube flare nut:
DEM075
: 20 - 25 N⋅m (2.0 - 2.5 kg-m, 14 - 18 ft-lb) BT
a. Nozzle gaskets should always be replaced.
b. To prevent spill tube from breaking later, spill tube nuts
should be tightened gradually in sequence. HA
Refer to “Bleeding Fuel System”, EC-572.
EL
SE
SEC797D
IDX
EC-567
Injection Nozzle (Cont’d)
DISASSEMBLY (NO. 2 - 6 NOZZLES)
Do not disassemble No. 1 nozzle (with needle lift sensor).
1. Loosen inlet connector while keeping nozzle top from turning.
SEF785
2. Arrange all disassembled parts in order shown at left.
SEF425F
INSPECTION (NO. 2 - 6 NOZZLES)

Thoroughly clean all disassembled parts with fresh kerosene or
solvent.
I If nozzle needle is damaged or fused, replace nozzle assem-
bly with a new one.
I If end of nozzle needle is seized or excessively discolored,
replace nozzle assembly.
I Check nozzle body and distance piece for proper contact. If
excessively worn or damaged, replace nozzle assembly or
nozzle holder assembly.
I Check spacer and nozzle holder for proper contact. If exces-
sively worn or damaged, replace spacer or nozzle holder.
I Check nozzle spring for excessive wear or damage. If exces-
sively worn or damaged, replace it with a new spring.
CLEANING (NO. 2 - 6 NOZZLES)

a. Do not touch the nozzle mating surface with your fingers.
b. To wash the nozzles, use a wooden stick and brass brush
with clean diesel fuel.
1. Clean nozzle assembly using the Nozzle Cleaning Kit.
SEF828
EC-568
2. Portions which should be cleaned are indicated in the left fig- GI
ure.
MA
EM
LC
SEF426F
3. Remove any carbon from exterior of nozzle body (except wrap-

ping angle portion) by using Tool.
FE
CL
MT
SEF830
AT
4. Clean fuel sump of nozzle body using Tool.
TF
PD
FA
SEF831-A
RA
5. Clean nozzle seat by using Tool.
This job should be performed with extra precautions, since
efficiency of nozzle depends greatly on a good nozzle seat. BR
ST
RS
SEF832-A BT
6. Clean spray hole of nozzle body by using Tool.
To prevent spray hole from canting, always clean it by start- HA
ing with inner side and working towards outside.
EL
SE
SEF833
IDX
EC-569
7. Decarbon nozzle needle tip by using Tool.
SEF834
8. Check needle for proper position.

(1) Pull needle about halfway out from body and then release it.
(2) Needle should sink into body very smoothly from just its own
weight.
(3) Repeat this test and rotate needle slightly each time.
If needle fails to sink smoothly from any position, replace both
needle and body as a unit.
SEF835
ASSEMBLY
Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
Inlet connector to nozzle holder:
: 29 - 49 N⋅m (3.0 - 5.0 kg-m, 22 - 36 ft-lb)
SEF967
TEST AND ADJUSTMENT

WARNING:
When using nozzle tester, be careful not to allow diesel fuel
sprayed from nozzle to contact your hand or body, and make
sure your eyes are properly protected with goggles.
Injection pressure test

1. Install nozzle to injection nozzle tester and bleed air from flare
nut.
EF791A
EC-570
2. Pump the tester handle slowly (one time per second) and watch GI
the pressure gauge.
3. Read the pressure gauge when the injection pressure just
starts dropping. MA
Initial injection pressure:
Used 9,800 - 10,300 kPa
(98.0 - 103.00 bar, 100 - 105 kg/cm2, EM
1,421 - 1,494 psi)
New 10,300 - 11,300 kPa
(103.0 - 113.0 bar, 105 - 115 kg/cm2, LC
1,494 - 1,639 psi)
SEF672A
Always check initial injection pressure using a new nozzle.
4. To adjust injection pressure, change adjusting shims.
a. Increasing the thickness of adjusting shims increases ini-
tial injection pressure. Decreasing thickness reduces ini-
tial pressure. FE
b. A shim thickness of 0.04 mm (0.0016 in) corresponds
approximately to a difference of 471 kPa (4.71 bar, 4.8
kg/cm2, 68 psi) in initial injection pressure.
CL
Refer to “Injection Nozzle” in SDS for adjusting shims, EC-689.
MT
SEF427F
AT
Leakage test
1. Maintain the pressure at about 981 to 1,961 kPa (9.8 to 19.6
bar, 10 to 20 kg/cm2, 142 to 284 psi) below initial injection TF
pressure.
2. Check that there is no dripping from the nozzle tip or around the
body. PD
3. If there is leakage, clean, overhaul injection nozzle or replace
it.
FA
SEF674A
RA
Spray pattern test
1. Check spray pattern by pumping tester handle one full stroke BR
per second.
a. If main spray angle is within 30 degrees as shown, injec-
tion nozzle is good. ST
b. It is still normal even if a thin stream of spray deviates from
main spray (pattern B).
2. If injection nozzle is not normal, adjust or clean injection nozzle RS
or replace it.
SEF079S BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-571
Fuel System Check

BLEEDING FUEL SYSTEM
Air should be bled out of fuel system when injection pump is
removed or fuel system is repaired.
Protect pump and engine mounts from fuel splash with rags.
If engine will not start after bleeding air, loosen injection tubes
at nozzle side and crank engine until fuel overflows from injec-
tion tube. Tighten injection tube flare nuts.
If the engine does not operate smoothly after it has started, race it
two or three times.
CAUTION:
Wipe up any fuel discharged while bleeding air during each
step.
1. Loosen air bleeder screw to injection pump.
2. Move fuel filter priming pump up and down until no further air
comes out of air bleeder screw.
3. Tighten air bleeder screw.
SEC799D
SEC784D
BLEEDING FUEL FILTER

1. Move the priming pump up and down to bleed air from the fuel
filter.
2. When air is completely bled from the fuel pump, priming pump
operation becomes noticeably heavy. Stop pump operation.
CHECKING PRIMING PUMP

Before checking priming pump, make sure that fuel filter is
filled with fuel.
1. Disconnect fuel return hose.
Place a suitable container beneath hose end.
2. Pump priming pump and check that the fuel overflows from the
hose end. If not, replace priming pump.
DEC003
EC-572
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION TD42Ti
DTC and MIL Detection Logic GI

When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the malfunction (DTC) is stored in the ECM memory.
The MIL will light up each time the ECM detects malfunction. However, if the same malfunction is experienced MA
in two consecutive driving patterns and the engine is still running, the MIL will stay lit up. For diagnostic items
causing the MIL to light up, refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX”, EC-545.
EM
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
HOW TO READ DTC LC
The diagnostic trouble code can be read by the following methods.
1. The number of blinks of the malfunction indicator lamp in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic
Results) Examples: 0103, 0401, 0802, etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
2. CONSULT-II Examples: “CRANK POS SEN (TDC)”, etc.
FE
I Output of the trouble code means that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. However, in the Mode
II it does not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or occurred in the past and returned
to normal. CL
CONSULT-II can identify them. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended.
HOW TO ERASE DTC
The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by the following methods.
MT
Selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
AT
Changing the diagnostic test mode from Diagnostic Test Mode II to Mode I. (Refer to EC-575.)
I If the battery terminal is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours.
I When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT-II is easier and quicker than switching the diagnostic TF
test modes.
HOW TO ERASE DTC (With CONSULT-II)
PD
5 seconds and then turn it “ON” (Engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT “ON” and touch “ENGINE”. FA
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SEF371Y
SE
HOW TO ERASE DTC (No Tools)
5 seconds and then turn it “ON” again. IDX
2. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I. (Refer to EC-575.)
EC-573
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

1. The malfunction indicator lamp will light up when the ignition
switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb
check.
I If the malfunction indicator lamp does not light up, refer to EL
section (“WARNING LAMPS AND CHIME”) or see EC-687.
2. When the engine is started, the malfunction indicator lamp
should go off.
If the lamp remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
SAT652J If MIL illuminates or blinks irregularly after starting engine,
water may have accumulated in fuel filter. Drain water from
fuel filter.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION
The on board diagnostic system has the following three functions.
1. BULB CHECK : This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown, open circuit,
etc.).
2. MALFUNCTION : This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is detected, the
WARNING MIL will light up to inform the driver that a malfunction has been
detected.
3. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC : This function allows diagnostic trouble codes to be read.
RESULTS
Refer to “HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODES” on next page.

Diagnostic Diagnostic
Condition
Test Mode I Test Mode II
Engine
stopped SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
BULB CHECK
Ignition switch RESULTS
in “ON” posi-
tion Engine
running MALFUNCTION
—
WARNING
EC-574
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Cont’d)
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODES GI
Turn ignition switch “ON”.
(Do not start engine.) MA
EM
H
NG NG
Check MIL circuit. E
Repair harness or
E
Diagnostic Test Mode I — BULB CHECK. (See EC-687.) connectors. LC
E Refer to previous page.
MIL should come on. OK OK
F H
OK
FE
E
G E
Diagnostic Test
Mode I
Start engine. — MALFUNC-
TION WARN- CL
ING.
Refer to previ-
ous page. MT
H
NG AT
E
Check MIL circuit and data link connector for
CONSULT-II circuit. (See EC-687.)
OK NG TF
H PD
Data link connector for CONSULT-II Repair harness or
(Connect CHK and IGN terminals with a suitable connectors.
harness.) FA
MIL should go off. OK
OK
H RA
Wait at least 2 seconds. F H
H BR
ST
RS
Data link connector for CONSULT-II
(Disconnect the suitable harness between CHK
and IGN terminals.) BT
H
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II HA
— SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
EL
H
q
B q
A SE
IDX
EC-575
q
B q
A
G
H
I Switching the modes is not possible when the engine

is running.
I When ignition switch is turned off during diagnosis,
power to ECM will drop after approx. 5 seconds.
Data link connector for CONSULT-II The diagnosis will automatically return to Diagnostic
(Connect CHK and IGN terminals with a suit- Test Mode I.
able harness.)
H
Wait at least 2 seconds.
Data link connector for CONSULT-II

(Disconnect the suitable harness between
CHK and IGN terminals.)
H
If the suitable harness is disconnected at this
time, the diagnostic trouble code will be
erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
EC-576
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I—BULB CHECK GI
In this mode, the MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains
OFF, check the bulb. Refer to EL section (“WARNING LAMPS AND CHIME”) or see EC-687.
MA
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I—MALFUNCTION WARNING
MALFUNCTION
Condition EM
INDICATOR LAMP
When the malfunction is detected or the ECM’s CPU is malfunctioning. (Refer to “MIL Illumination” of the
ON
“TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX”, EC-545.) LC
OFF No malfunction.
I These Diagnostic Trouble Code Numbers are clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS).
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II—SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
In this mode, a diagnostic trouble code is indicated by the number of blinks of the MALFUNCTION INDICA-
FE
TOR LAMP as shown below.
CL
MT
AT
TF
SEF298QA
Long (0.6 second) blinking indicates the number of ten digits, and short (0.3 second) blinking indicates the PD
number of single digits. For example, the malfunction indicator lamp blinks 4 times for 5 seconds (0.6 sec x
4 times) and then it blinks three times for about 1 second (0.3 sec x 3 times). This indicates the DTC “0403”
and refers to the malfunction of the accelerator position sensor circuit. FA
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their diagnostic trouble code numbers. The DTC
“0505” refers to no malfunction. (See TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX, EC-545.)
RA
HOW TO ERASE DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (Self-diagnostic results)
The diagnostic trouble code can be erased from the backup memory in the ECM when the diagnostic test mode
is changed from Diagnostic Test Mode II to Diagnostic Test Mode I. (Refer to “HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOS- BR
TIC TEST MODES” on previous page.)
I If the battery terminal is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost from the backup
memory within 24 hours.
ST
I Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-577
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, CONSULT-II AND DRIVING PATTERNS
SEC946C
*1: When a malfunction is detected, MIL will light up. *4: The DTC will not be displayed any longer after vehicle is
*2: MIL will not light up after ignition switch is turned OFF. driven 40 times without the same malfunction.
*3: When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the DTC (The DTC still remain in ECM.)
will be stored in ECM. *5: Other screens except SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS &
DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) cannot display the mal-
function. DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) can display the
malfunction at the moment it is detected.
EC-578
CONSULT-II GI
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. MA
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to data link connector for CONSULT-II.
(Data link connector for CONSULT-II is located under the hood
opener.) EM
LC
SEC788D

4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service FE
procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual.
CL
MT
MBIB0233E
AT
TF
PD
FA
PBIB0410E
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-579
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
Item SELF-DIAG-
DATA ACTIVE
NOSTIC
MONITOR TEST
RESULTS
Engine coolant temperature sensor X X
Vehicle speed sensor X X
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
Accelerator position sensor X X X

Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) X X
Needle lift sensor X
INPUT
Ignition switch (start signal) X
Neutral position switch X
Battery voltage X
Air conditioner switch X
Intake air temperature sensor X
Injection timing control valve X X X
Glow relay X X
OUTPUT
EGRC-solenoid valve & throttle control solenoid valve A, B X X
Cooling fan relay X X
X: Applicable
EC-580
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE GI
Regarding items detected in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode, refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX”,
EC-545.
MA
DATA MONITOR MODE
Monitored item ECM
[Unit] input
Main
Description Remarks
EM
signals
signals
CKPS⋅RPM I The engine speed computed from the
(TDC) [rpm] q q crankshaft position sensor (TDC) signal
is displayed.
LC
F/INJ⋅RPM -
N/L [rpm] q q I The engine speed computed from the
needle lift sensor signal is displayed.
COOLAN TEMP/S I The engine coolant temperature (deter- I When the engine coolant temperature
[°C] or [°F] mined by the signal voltage of the engine sensor is open or short-circuited, ECM FE
q q coolant temperature sensor) is displayed. enters fail-safe mode. The engine coolant
temperature determined by the ECM is
displayed.
CL
VHCL SPEED SE
[km/h] or [mph] q q I The vehicle speed computed from the
vehicle speed sensor signal is displayed.
ACCEL POS SEN [V]
q q I The accelerator pedal position sensor
signal voltage is displayed.
MT
BATTERY VOLT [V]
q q I The power supply voltage of ECM is dis-
played. AT
I/C INT/A T/S [V]
q q I The signal voltage of the intake air tem-
perature sensor is displayed.
TF
P/N POSI SW
[ON/OFF] q q I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
park/neutral position switch signal.
START SIGNAL
[ON/OFF] q q I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
starter signal.
I After starting the engine, [OFF] is dis-
played regardless of the starter signal.
PD
AIR COND SIG I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air
[ON/OFF] q q conditioner switch as determined by the
air conditioner signal.
FA
IGN SW
[ON/OFF] q q I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from igni-
tion switch signal. RA
ACT INJ TIMG [°] I The actual injection timing angle deter-
q q mined by the ECM (an approximate aver-

age angle between injection start and BR
end from TDC) is displayed.
INJ TIMG C/V [%] I Indicates the duty ratio of fuel injection
timing control valve. ST
AIR COND RLY I The air conditioner relay control condition
[ON/OFF] q (determined by the ECM according to the
input signals) is indicated. RS
GLOW RLY [ON/OFF] I The glow relay control condition (deter-
q mined by ECM according to the input
signal) is displayed.
BT
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically. HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-581
Monitored item ECM
Main
[Unit] input Description Remarks
signals
signals
COOLING FAN I Indicates the control condition of the
[LOW/HI/OFF] cooling fans (determined by ECM accord-
q ing to the input signal).

I LOW ... Operates at low speed.
HI ... Operates at high speed.
OFF ... Stopped.
EGRC SOL/V A I The control condition of the EGRC-sole-
[ON/OFF] noid valve (determined by ECM accord-
ing to the input signal) is indicated.
I OFF ... EGRC-solenoid valve is not oper-
ating.
ON ... EGRC-solenoid valve is operating.
THROT RLY A I The control condition of the throttle con-
[ON/OFF] trol solenoid valve A (determined by ECM
according to the input signal) is indicated.
I OFF ... Throttle control solenoid valve A
is not operating.
ON ... Throttle control solenoid valve A is
operating.
THROT RLY B I The control condition of the throttle con-
[ON/OFF] trol solenoid valve B (determined by
ECM according to the input signal) is
indicated.
I OFF ... Throttle control solenoid valve B
is not operating.
ON ... Throttle control solenoid valve B is
operating.
BARO SEN [kPa] I The barometric pressure (determined by
q the signal voltage from the barometric

pressure sensor built into the ECM) is
displayed.
EC-582
ACTIVE TEST MODE GI
I Ignition switch: ON MA
I Operate the cooling fan at Cooling fan moves at “LOW”, “HI” I Harness and connector
COOLING FAN
“LOW”, “HI” speed and turn speed and stops. I Cooling fan motor
“OFF” using CONSULT-II.
EM
I Turn solenoid valve “ON” and Solenoid valve makes an operating I Harness and connector
EGRC SOL/V A
“OFF” with the CONSULT-II and sound. I Solenoid valve
listen to operating sound. LC
I Turn solenoid valve “ON” and Solenoid valve makes an operating I Harness and connector
THL CONT/SOL-V A
THL CONT/SOL-V B
I Turn solenoid valve “ON” and Solenoid valve makes an operating I Harness and connector FE
I Ignition switch: ON (Engine CL
stopped)
Glow relay makes the operating I Harness and connector
GLOW RLY I Turn the glow relay “ON” and
sound. I Glow relay
“OFF” using CONSULT-II and
listen to operating sound. MT
trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
INJ TIMING I Adjust initial injection timing AT
I Retard the injection timing using CHECK ITEM.
CONSULT-II.
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-583
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR”
mode.
1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger):
I The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen in real time.
In other words, the malfunction item will be displayed at the moment the malfunction is detected by
ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously until a malfunction is detected. However, DATA
MONITOR cannot continue any longer after the malfunction detection.
2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger):
I The malfunction item will not be displayed automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a mal-
function is detected by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though a malfunction is detected.
Use these triggers as follows:
1. “AUTO TRIG”
I While trying to detect the DTC by performing the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”, be sure to
select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is
detected.
I While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent.
Inspect the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) suspicious connectors, components and harness in
the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. The moment a malfunction is found the malfunction item
will be displayed. (Refer to GI section, “Incident Simulation Tests” in “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT
DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”.)
2. “MANU TRIG”
I If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU
TRIG”. By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for
further diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition.
SEF720X
EC-584
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Introduction TD42Ti
Introduction GI
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel
injection timing control, glow control system, etc. The ECM accepts MA
input signals from sensors and instantly drives fuel injection pump.
It is essential that both input and output signals are proper and
stable. At the same time, it is important that there are no malfunc- EM
tions such as vacuum leaks, or other malfunctions with the engine.
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs inter-
mittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are LC
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this
SEF858S case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the
replacement of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
test with CONSULT-II or a circuit tester connected should be per-
formed. Follow the “Work Flow”, EC-587. FE
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with
a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such incidents, especially CL
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the
example on next page should be used. MT
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” incidents first.
SEF233G This will help troubleshoot driveability incidents on an electronically
controlled engine vehicle. AT
TF
PD
FA
SEF234G
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-585
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Introduction TD42Ti
Diagnostic Worksheet
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction
of engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make
troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about an incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a
customer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one shown below in order to
organize all the information for troubleshooting.
SEF907L
WORKSHEET SAMPLE
Customer name MR/MS Model & Year VIN
Engine # Trans. Mileage
Incident Date Manuf. Date In Service Date
l Impossible to start l No combustion l Partial combustion
l Partial combustion when engine is warm
l Startability
l Partial combustion when engine is cool
l Possible but hard to start l Others [ ]
l No fast idle l Unstable l High idle l Low idle
l Idling
Symptoms l Others [ ]
l Stumble l Surge l Knock l Lack of power
l Driveability
l Others [ ]
l At the time of start l While idling
l Engine stall l While accelerating l While decelerating
l Just after stopping l While loading
l Just after delivery l Recently
Incident occurrence
l In the morning l At night l In the daytime
Frequency l All the time l Under certain conditions l Sometimes
Weather conditions l Not affected
Weather l Fine l Raining l Snowing l Others [ ]
Temperature l Hot l Warm l Cool l Cold l Humid °F
l Cold l During warm-up l After warm-up
Engine conditions Engine speed
Road conditions l In town l In suburbs l Highway l Off road (up/down)

l Not affected
l At starting l While idling l At racing
l While accelerating l While cruising
Driving conditions l While decelerating l While turning (RH/LH)
Vehicle speed
Malfunction indicator lamp l Turned on l Not turned on
EC-586
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Work Flow TD42Ti
Work Flow GI
CHECK IN
MA
H
CHECK INCIDENT CONDITIONS. ................................................. STEP I EM
Listen to customer complaints. (Get symptoms.)
H LC
Check and PRINT OUT (write down) Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).
Then clear. Also check related service bulletins for information. ........................................... STEP II
Symptoms No symptoms, except MIL

collected. lights up, or Malfunction
Code exists at STEP II. FE
H
Verify the symptom by driving in the condition the cus-
*1
tomer described. ............................................................................................. STEP III CL
Normal Code Malfunction Code
(at STEP II) (at STEP II) MT
H H
INCIDENT CONFIRMATION *1
........................................... STEP IV AT
Verify the DTC by performing the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
H TF
Choose the appropriate action. ...........................................
E STEP V
*2
Malfunction Code (at STEP II or IV) Normal Code (at both STEP II and IV)
H PD
BASIC INSPECTION
SYMPTOM BASIS (at STEP I or III) FA

................................................................E
H
Perform inspections RA
according to Symptom
Matrix Chart.
BR
H H
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC XXXX. STEP VI
ST
H
REPAIR/REPLACE RS
H
NG FINAL CHECK BT
Confirm that the incident is completely fixed by performing BASIC INSPECTION and
........................................... STEP VII
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (or OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK). Then,
erase the unnecessary (already fixed) DTCs in ECM.
HA
OK
H
EL
CHECK OUT
*1: If the incident cannot be duplicated, refer to GI section (“Incident Simulation Tests”, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT
SE
DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”).
*2: If the on board diagnostic system cannot be performed, check main power supply and ground circuit. Refer to
“TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY”, EC-602.
IDX
EC-587
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Work Flow TD42Ti
Description for Work Flow

STEP DESCRIPTION
Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using the
STEP I
“DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET” as shown on EC-586.
Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II) the Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC), then erase the code. Refer to EC-573.
STEP II
Study the relationship between the cause, specified by DTC, and the symptom described by the customer. (The
“Symptom Matrix Chart” will be useful. Refer to EC-591.)
Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs.
The “DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET” is useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA
STEP III MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS. Refer to GI section.
If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V.
Try to detect the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) by driving in (or performing) the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”. Check and read the DTC by using CONSULT-II.
During the DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode
and check real time diagnosis results.
STEP IV
If the incident cannot be verified, perform INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS. Refer to GI section.
In case the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is not available, perform the “OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK”
instead. The DTC cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified “check” is an effective alternative.
The “NG” result of the “OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK” is the same as the DTC detection.
Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV.
If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC XXXX.
STEP V
If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the BASIC INSPECTION. Refer to EC-589. Then perform inspections
according to the Symptom Matrix Chart. Refer to EC-591.
Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes. Inspect
the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) “Harness Layouts”.
Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT-II set in “DATA MONITOR
(AUTO TRIG)” mode.
Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CON-
STEP VI
SULT-II. Refer to EC-596.
The “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE” in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short
circuit inspection is also required for the circuit check in the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. For details, refer to GI
section (“Circuit Inspection”, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”).
Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions
and circumstances which resulted in the customer’s initial complaint.
Perform the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” and confirm the normal code (Diagnostic trouble code No. 55)
STEP VII is detected. If the incident is still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a different method from the
previous one.
Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) DTC in ECM. (Refer
to EC-573.)
EC-588
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Basic Inspection TD42Ti
Basic Inspection GI
Precaution:
Perform Basic Inspection without electrical or mechanical
loads applied; MA
I Headlamp switch is OFF,
I Air conditioner switch is OFF,
I Rear defogger switch is OFF, EM
I Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
LC
BEFORE STARTING
SEF142I 1. Check service records for any recent
repairs that may indicate a related
problem, or the current need for sched-
uled maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the fol- FE
lowing:
I Harness connectors for improper con-
nections
I Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks, or CL
improper connections
I Wiring for improper connections,
pinches, or cuts MT
3. Using priming pump, bleed air from fuel
SEC784D system. Refer to “DRAINING WATER”,
“Checking and Replacing Fuel Filter AT
and Draining Water” of “ENGINE MAIN-
TF
H
CONNECT CONSULT-II TO THE PD
VEHICLE.
Connect “CONSULT-II” to the data link
connector for CONSULT-II and select FA
“ENGINE” from the menu. Refer to
EC-579.
SEC788D
RA
H
DOES ENGINE START? No Turn ignition switch OFF,
E
wait 5 seconds and then BR
Yes start engine. If engine fails
to start, check diagnostic
trouble code (DTC). ST
H
Run engine for 10 minutes.
RS
H
SEF817Y CHECK IDLE SPEED.
BT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Read engine idle speed in “DATA
MONITOR” mode with CONSULT- HA
II.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
Check idle speed using tachom- EL
eter tester.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
700+500 rpm SE
H
(Go to q
A on next page.) IDX
EC-589
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Basic Inspection TD42Ti
q
A
H
CHECK INJECTION TIMING. OK I Bleed air from fuel sys-
E
1. Set No. 1 piston at TDC on its com- tem.
pression stroke. I After this inspection,
2. Remove injection tubes and air bleeder unnecessary diagnostic
on the back of injection pump. trouble code No. might
3. Set dial gauge so its indicator points to be displayed.
SEC793D somewhere between 1.0 and 2.0 mm Erase the stored memory
(0.039 and 0.079 in) on the scale. in ECM.
4. Turn crankshaft 1 turn clockwise and Refer to “ON BOARD
check that dial gauge indicates the DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
same value again. DESCRIPTION” (EC-
5. Turn crankshaft counterclockwise about 573) and “HOW TO
100 degrees, then turn crankshaft ERASE DTC” (EC-573).
clockwise slowly, and set dial gauge
OK
indicator to 0 mm at the position it
stops. H
6. Turn crankshaft clockwise and set the INSPECTION END

injection timing mark on the crankshaft
DEM089 pulley to the timing indicator.
7. Read plunger lift.
Plunger lift:
0.576±0.02 mm (0.0227±0.0008 in)
I When repeating the checking, start
with step 5.
NG
H
ADJUSTING Go to .
E
1. If plunger lift is not within the specified
value, adjust by turning injection pump.
I If indication is smaller than the speci-
fied value, turn pump body away
from engine.
I If indication is larger than the speci-
fied value, turn pump body towards
engine.
2. Tighten injection pump securing bolts
and nuts.
Injection pump fixing bolt:
: 20 - 25 N⋅m
(2.0 - 2.5 kg-m, 14 - 18 ft-lb)
Injection pump to mounting bracket:
: 30 - 41 N⋅m
(3.0 - 4.1 kg-m, 22 - 30 ft-lb)
3. Remove dial gauge and install air
bleeder with new washer.
4. Install injection tubes.
Flare nut:
: 20 - 25 N⋅m
(2.0 - 2.5 kg-m, 14 - 18 ft-lb)
EC-590
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description TD42Ti
Symptom Matrix Chart GI

SYMPTOM
MA

EM
LC
ENGINE STALL
ABNORMAL SMOKE COLOR

OVERHEAT/HIGH ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
SYSTEM FE
— Basic engine
control system
HARD TO START WHEN ENGINE IS COLD
HARD TO START WHEN ENGINE IS HOT
CL
DEAD BATTERY (UNDER CHARGE)


MT
Malfunction indicator lamp illuminates.

NO START (without first firing)

NO START (with first firing)
Can be detected by CONSULT-II?
Feature of symptom, Check point

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
WHEN DECELERATING
POOR ACCELERATION
KNOCK/DETONATION
AT
IDLING VIBRATION
DURING DRIVING
LACK OF POWER
BLACK SMOKE
WHITE SMOKE
TF
LOW IDLE
Reference page
AT IDLE
HI IDLE
PD
Fuel cut
Warranty symptom
AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM AP HA
code
Injection Advanced q q I I q I q q I q EC-589 FA

timing
Retarded q q I I q I q q q I q EC-589
Electric injection pump

q q I I q q q q q I q q q I I q q I q q q q — *1 RA
mainframe
Injection nozzle q q q q q q q I q q q I I q I EC-567 *2
Glow system q q I I I I EC-651

BR
EM sec-
Engine body q q I I q q q I q q q I I q q q q q I tion
*3
ST
EGR system q I I I EC-664
I ; High Possibility Item

q ; Low Possibility Item RS
*1: Insufficient or excess amount. Governor malfunction may be the cause.
*2: Depends on open-valve pressure and spray pattern.
*3: Caused mainly by insufficient compression pressure.
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-591
engine coolant temperature does
Injection timing cannot be con-

Compensation according to
Feature of symptom
Check point
not function.
trolled.
EC-610
EC-671
EC-615
EC-629
EC-623
EC-635
EC-641
Reference
page
Fuel cut
q
q
q
HA
q
WHITE SMOKE
AP
q
BLACK SMOKE
AG AH AJ AK AL AM
q

q
IDLING VIBRATION
q
SYMPTOM
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
LOW IDLE
q
AF
HI IDLE
q
q
POOR ACCELERATION
AE
q
LACK OF POWER
AC AD
q
KNOCK/DETONATION
q
q
q
WHEN DECELERATING
AB
ENGINE STALL DURING DRIVING

q
AT IDLE

q
HARD/NO START/ HARD TO START WHEN ENGINE IS COLD

AA
RESTART (EXCP. HA) NO START (without first firing)

ground short
open, short
open, short
open, short
open, short
open, short
open, short
open, short
noise
Malfunction
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) cir-
Intake air temperature sensor circuit
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Injection timing control valve circuit
Accelerator position sensor circuit

Vehicle speed sensor circuit
Needle lift sensor circuit
SYSTEM
Warranty symptom code
— ENGINE CONTROL system

circuit
cuit
ENGINE CONTROL
EC-592
SYMPTOM
HI IDLE
Fuel cut
LOW IDLE
ENGINE STALL
HARD/NO START/
LACK OF POWER
IDLING VIBRATION
RESTART (EXCP. HA)

KNOCK/DETONATION
POOR ACCELERATION
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING

AT IDLE
SYSTEM
Malfunction
Check point
Reference page
Feature of symptom
DURING DRIVING
— ENGINE CONTROL system

WHEN DECELERATING

NO START (without first firing)

WHITE SMOKE
BLACK SMOKE
HARD TO START WHEN ENGINE IS COLD

Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM AP HA
Start signal circuit open, short q q EC-675 Start control does not function.
open, short
Neutral position switch circuit EC-678
ground short
EC-593
open q q q q
Ignition switch circuit EC-602
short Engine does not stop.
open q q q
Power supply for ECM circuit EC-602
short q q
Throttle control solenoid valve A, B open, short Does not operate.
EC-664
circuit ground short q q q Does not stop operating.
open, short
EGRC-solenoid valve circuit EC-664
ground short q q q Does not stop operating.
open q q q q q Glow lamp does not turn on.
Glow relay circuit EC-651
short Glow lamp does not turn off.
open q q q q
ENGINE CONTROL
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
ECM relay (Self-shutoff) circuit EC-602 Ground short makes engine

short q q
unable to stop.
EC-621,
ECM, Connector circuit open, short q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q
647, 649
open Air conditioner does not operate.
Air conditioner relay circuit EC-684 Air conditioner does not stop
short
operating.
Air conditioner does not stop
open, ground short
Air conditioner switch circuit EC-684 operating.
short Air conditioner does not work.
TD42Ti
GI
TF
AT
EL
FE
ST
FA
SE
BT
CL
LC
RS
RA
PD
HA
BR
MT
EM
MA
IDX

Mode
Remarks:
I Specification data are reference values.
I Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
CKPS⋅RPM (TDC) Almost the same speed as the tachom-
I Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indication.
F/INJ⋅RPM-N/L eter indication.
COOLAN TEMP/S I Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
I Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer indica- Almost the same speed as the speed-
VHCL SPEED SE
tion ometer indication
I Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: released Approx. 0.52V
ACCEL POS SEN
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: depressed Approx. 4.09V
BATTERY VOLT I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V
I/C INT/A T/S I Ignition switch: “ON” Approx. 0°C: Approx. 4V
Approx. 20°C: Approx. 3.5V
Shift lever: Neutral/Park ON
P/N POSI SW I Ignition switch: ON
Except above OFF
START SIGNAL I Ignition switch: ON , START , ON OFF , ON , OFF
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON
engine ON
IGN SW I Ignition switch: ON , OFF ON , OFF
I Engine: After warming up
Idle −5 to −7°
I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
ACT INJ TIMG
I Shift lever: Neutral
2,000 rpm −10 to −13°
I No-load
INJ TIMG C/V I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine. Approx. 40 - 70%
GLOW RLY I Refer to EC-651.
I When cooling fan is stopped. OFF
COOLING FAN
I When cooling fan operates. ON
EGRC SOL/V A I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine. OFF
THROT RLY A I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine. OFF
THROT RLY B I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine. OFF
AIR COND RLY Air conditioner switch: ON
engine ON
Altitude
Approx. 0 m: Approx. 100.62 kPa
(1.0062 bar, 1.026 kg/cm2, 14.59 psi)
Approx. 1,000 m: Approx. 88.95 kPa
BARO SEN I Ignition switch: ON (0.8895 bar, 0.907 kg/cm2, 12.90 psi)
(0.8316 bar, 0.848 kg/cm2, 12.06 psi)
(0.7836 bar, 0.799 kg/cm2, 11.36 psi)
EC-594
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor GI

Mode
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode. MA
(Select “HI SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” with CONSULT-II.)
ACCEL POS SEN, CKPS-RPM (TDC) EM

Below is the data for “ACCEL POS SEN” and “CKPS-RPM (TDC)” when revving engine quickly up to 3,000
rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently. LC
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
PBIB0278E
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-595

PREPARATION
1. ECM is located behind the instrument lower panel. For this
inspection, remove the driver’s side instrument lower cover.
SEC782D
2. Remove ECM harness protector.
AEC913
3. Perform all voltage measurements with the connector con-

nected. Extend tester probe as shown to perform tests easily.
I Open harness securing clip to make testing easier.
I Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
I Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
SEF367I
Be sure ECM unit is properly grounded before checking.
SEF665S
EC-596
ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF064P
ECM INSPECTION TABLE

FE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal
is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION: CL
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring the input/output voltage. Doing so may result in
damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use ground other than the ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER- DATA
MT
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION (DC Voltage and Pulse
COLOR
NO. Signal)
AT

TF
0 - 1.5V
For a few seconds after turning ignition switch
B/Y*1
4
BR*2
ECM relay (Self-shutoff) “OFF” PD
A few seconds passed after turning ignition

BATTERY VOLTAGE FA
(11 - 14V)
switch “OFF”
Engine is running.
RA
BATTERY VOLTAGE
14 L Cooling fan relay BR
Engine is running.
0 - 1V
Cooling fan is operating.
ST
(11 - 14V)
Air conditioner switch is “OFF”. RS
Y/L*1
15 Air conditioner relay Engine is running.
R/W*2
Both air conditioner switch and blower fan 0 - 1V
BT
switch are “ON”.
(Compressor is operating.)
HA
0 - 1.5V
Glow lamp is “ON”. EL
16 L/W Glow lamp
Glow lamp is “OFF”. (11 - 14V) SE
IDX
EC-597
TER- DATA
WIRE
COLOR
NO. Signal)
18 G Malfunction indicator lamp Engine is running. BATTERY VOLTAGE

L/R*1 Engine coolant tempera- Output voltage varies with
19 Engine is running.
LG/R*2 ture sensor engine coolant tempera-
ture.
Ignition switch “ON” Approximately 0V

20 R/W Start signal
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Ignition switch “START”
(11 - 14V)

Air conditioner switch is “OFF”. (11 - 14V)
21 LG/B Air conditioner switch Engine is running.
Both air conditioner switch and blower fan Approximately 0V

switch are “ON”.
(Compressor is operating.)

Approximately 0V
Gear position is “Neutral”.
22 P/B Neutral position switch

Approximately 0.52V
Engine stopped
Accelerator pedal position
23 W
sensor
Approximately 4.09V
Engine stopped
0 - 5V★
Engine is running.
26 L/OR Vehicle speed sensor Lift up the vehicle.

In 2nd gear position
Vehicle speed is 30 km/h (19 MPH).
PBIB0386E
EC-598
TER- DATA
GI
WIRE
COLOR
NO. Signal)
MA
Approximately 0V★
EM
Idle speed
LC
SEC813D
34 W Needle lift sensor
Approximately 0V★ FE
Engine is running. (Warm-up condition) CL

MT
SEC814D
AT
36 LG Engine is running. Output voltage varies with
sensor
intake air temperature. TF
38
BR*1
Ignition switch
PD
B/Y*2 BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
FA
B ECM ground Engine ground
43 Idle speed
RA
42 L/G Approximately 0V
Engine is running.
Data link connector for
64 Y/G Idle speed (CONSULT-II is connected and Approximately 0 - 12V BR
CONSULT-II
turned on)
65 Y/R Approximately 0 - 9V
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-599
TER- DATA
WIRE
COLOR
NO. Signal)
Approximately 0V★
Idle speed
SEC815D
Crankshaft position sensor
44 L
(TDC)
Approximately 0V★
SEC816D
Crankshaft position sensor Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

(TDC) ground Idle speed
Y*1 Accelerator pedal position

48 Ignition switch “ON” Approximately 5V
G/R*2 sensor power supply

50 B Sensor’s ground Approximately 0V
Idle speed
Accelerator pedal position Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

51 L/W Approximately 0V
sensor ground Idle speed
P*1 Throttle control solenoid Engine is running. (Warm-up condition) BATTERY VOLTAGE
54
Y/G*2 valve A Idle speed (11 - 14V)
56 BATTERY VOLTAGE
W Power supply for ECM Ignition switch “ON”
61 (11 - 14V)
P/B*1 Throttle control solenoid Engine is running. (Warm-up condition) BATTERY VOLTAGE
60
Y/L*2 valve B Idle speed (11 - 14V)
BR/Y*1 Engine is running. (Warm-up condition) BATTERY VOLTAGE

103 EGRC-solenoid valve
L/Y*2 Idle speed (11 - 14V)
EC-600
TER- DATA
GI
WIRE
COLOR
NO. Signal)
MA
0 - 0.2V★
EM
Idle speed
LC
SEC817D
Injection timing control
104 L/W
valve
0 - 14V★ FE
Engine is running. (Warm-up condition) CL

MT
SEC825D
AT
118 Idle speed TF
G/W*1
111 Glow relay Refer to “Glow Control System”, EC-651.
LG/B*2 PD
*1: Wagon and hardtop models FA
*2: Pickup models
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-601
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY TD42Ti

CAUTION:
TER- DATA
WIRE
COLOR
NO. Signal)
Ignition switch “OFF” 0 - 1.5V
B/Y*1 For a few seconds after turning ignition switch

4 ECM relay (Self-shutoff) “OFF”
BR*2
BATTERY VOLTAGE
A few seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch “OFF”

BR*1
38 Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
B/Y*2 Ignition switch “ON”
(11 - 14V)
B ECM ground Engine ground
43 Idle speed
56 BATTERY VOLTAGE
W Power supply for ECM Ignition switch “ON”
61 (11 - 14V)

118 Idle speed
*1: Wagon and hardtop models

*2: Pickup models
EC-602
(Cont’d) GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC391M
EC-603
(Cont’d)
TEC373M
EC-604
(Cont’d) GI
PICKUP MODELS
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC432M
EC-605
(Cont’d)
TEC433M
EC-606
(Cont’d) GI
INSPECTION START
MA
H
Start engine. No CHECK POWER SUP-
EM
E
Is engine running? PLY-I.
1. Turn ignition switch
Yes
“ON”.
LC
SEF065P 2. Check voltage between
ECM terminal q 38 and
ground with CONSULT-II
or tester.
Voltage: Battery volt- FE
age
I Fuse block (J/B) CL
M2
I 10A fuse
I Harness for open or MT
fuse
PBIB0438E
If NG, repair open circuit or AT
nectors. TF
OK
H
q
B
PD
H
CHECK POWER SUPPLY-II. OK Go to “CHECK GROUND FA
E
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and then CIRCUIT” on EC-609.
“OFF”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals RA
q56 , q
61 and ground with CONSULT-II or
tester.
Voltage: Case-1: Battery voltage does BR
After turning ignition switch “OFF”, not exist.
battery voltage will exist for a few Case-2: Battery voltage exists
seconds, then drop to approximately for more than a few ST
0V. seconds.
NG RS
Case-2 BT
Go to “CHECK ECCS
Case-1 E
RELAY” on next page.
H HA
q
A
EL
SE
IDX
EC-607
(Cont’d)
q
A
H
CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY NG Repair open circuit or short
E
BETWEEN ECM RELAY AND ECM. to ground or short to power
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. in harness or connectors.
terminals q
56 , q
61 and ECM relay termi-
nal q
5 .
SEC800D Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK
H
CHECK POWER SUPPLY-III. NG Check the following.
E
Check voltage between relay terminals I Harness connectors
q
1 ,q 3 (Wagon and Hardtop models) or E127 , M21
q
2 ,q 3 (Pickup models) and ground with I 20A fuse (Wagon and
CONSULT-II or tester. Hardtop models)
SEC803D Voltage: Battery voltage I 7.5A fuse (Pickup mod-
els)
OK
short between ECM
relay and battery
connectors.
H
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit or short
E
Check harness continuity between ECM to ground or short to power
terminal q
4 and ECM relay terminal q 1 in harness or connectors.
(Pickup models) or q2 (Wagon and Hard-
SEF090M
top models).
and short to power.
OK
H
CHECK ECM RELAY. NG Replace ECM relay.
E
1. Apply 12V direct current between ECM
relay terminals q1 and q 2 .
2. Check continuity between ECM relay
terminals q3 and q 5 .
12V (q 1 -q 2 ) applied:
No voltage applied:
OK
H
q
B
EC-608
(Cont’d) GI
q
B
H MA
E
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. M21 , E127 EM
3. Check harness continuity between ECM I Harness connectors
terminals q39 , q
43 , 106 , 112 , 118 and E68 , E222
engine ground. (Wagon and Hardtop LC
Refer to Wiring Diagram. models)
Continuity should exist. I Harness connectors
If OK, check harness for short to power. E69 , E202
(Pickup models)
OK
E65 , E204 FE
(Pickup models)
short between ECM and CL
engine ground
short to power in harness MT
or connectors.
H
AT
connector. TF
H
INSPECTION END PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-609
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR “COOLANT TEMP SEN”
(DTC 0103) TD42Ti
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor

The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine cool-
ant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sen-
sitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the
thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K
<Reference data>
Voltage* Resistance
ture
(V) (kΩ)
°C (°F)
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.3 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 1.0 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal q
19
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
ground.
Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when ...
(Possible Cause)
No.
0103 I An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor is I Harness or connectors
entered to ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Engine coolant temperature sensor
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE
3) Wait at least 5 seconds.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 5 seconds.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn “ON”.
3) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
SEF817Y results)” with ECM.
EC-610
(DTC 0103) TD42Ti
(Cont’d) GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC374M
EC-611
(DTC 0103) TD42Ti
(Cont’d)
PICKUP MODELS
TEC434M
EC-612
(DTC 0103) TD42Ti
(Cont’d) GI
INSPECTION START
MA
H EM
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. E Check the following.
2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature E202 , E69 LC
sensor harness connector. I Harness connectors
SEC796D 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. E127 , M21
4. Check voltage between terminal q1 I Harness for open or
(Pickup models) or q 2 (Wagon and short between ECM and
Hardtop models) and ground with CON- engine coolant tempera-
SULT-II or tester. ture sensor
Voltage: If NG, repair open circuit or FE
Approximately 5V short to ground or short to
OK nectors.
CL
H
NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. E Check the following.
2. Check harness continuity between E202 , E69 (Wagon and
MT
engine coolant temperature (ECT) sen- Hardtop models)
SEC804D sor terminal q1 (Wagon and Hardtop I Harness connectors
models) or q 2 (Pickup models) and E127 , M21 AT
engine ground. I Harness connectors
Refer to Wiring Diagram. E142 , E250 (Pickup mod-
Continuity should exist. els)
If OK, check harness for short to I Harness for open or TF
ground and short to power. short between ECM and
engine coolant tempera-
OK ture sensor PD
nectors. FA
H
NG RA
CHECK COMPONENT E Replace engine coolant
(Engine coolant temperature sensor). temperature sensor.
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION”
on next page. BR
OK
H
ST
Trouble is not fixed. RS

H
check the connection of ECM harness BT
nector and retest.
HA
H
INSPECTION END
EL
SE
IDX
EC-613
(DTC 0103) TD42Ti
(Cont’d)
Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.0
SEF152P
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
SEF012P
EC-614
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR “F/INJ TIMG F/B” (DTC 0201) TD42Ti
Injection Timing Control Valve GI

The injection timing control valve is built into the fuel injection
pump. It controls the timer piston to change the fuel injection tim- MA
ing.
The timing control valve is a solenoid valve located in the line
between high-pressure chamber and low-pressure chamber. It EM
changes fuel pressure in the high-pressure chamber.
When current flows through the solenoid (the solenoid turns ON),
the timing control valve opens, retarding fuel injection timing. When LC
current does not flow through it, the timing control valve closes,
SEF638S advancing injection timing.
The ECM emits an ON-OFF duty signal. The longer the OFF-
duration, the greater the retard angle. The longer the ON-duration,
the greater the advance angle. This means that changing the ON-
OFF duty ratio makes it possible to achieve an optimal advance FE
angle and accurately control fuel injection timing.
CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE CL
MT
I Engine: After warming up Idle −5 to −7°
I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
ACT INJ TIMG
I Shift lever: Neutral
I No-load 2,000 rpm −10 to −13° AT
INJ TIMG C/V I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine. 40 - 70%
TF

PD
CAUTION: FA
RA
TER- DATA
WIRE
COLOR
NO. Signal) BR
0 - 0.2V★
ST
Idle speed RS
BT
SEC817D
Injection timing control
104 L/W
valve 0 - 14V★
HA
Engine is running. (Warm-up condition) EL

SE
SEC825D
★: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) IDX
EC-615
Injection Timing Control Valve (Cont’d)
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when ....
(Possible cause)
No.
0201 I Injection timing feedback system does not operate I Harness or connectors
properly. (This system consists essentially of ECM, [Injection timing control valve, needle lift sensor, crank-
injection timing control valve and needle lift sensor.) shaft position sensor (TDC) circuits]
I Injection timing control valve
I Needle lift sensor
I Crankshaft position sensor (TDC)
I Air in fuel line

PROCEDURE
Note: If both DTC 0201 and 0304 or 0407 are displayed, per-
form TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC 0304 or 0407. (See
EC-623 or EC-641.)
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR”
2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
3) Run engine for 2 seconds at 3,000 rpm. Return engine
SEF817Y speed to idle, then increase to 3,000 rpm under no load.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
2) Run engine for 2 seconds at 3,000 rpm. Return engine
speed to idle, then increase to 3,000 rpm under no load.
then turn “ON”.
results)” with ECM.
Note: If a malfunction occurs intermittently, conduct suitable
driving pattern for 10 minutes. This makes it possible to
determine DTC.
EC-616
WAGON AND HARDTOP MODELS GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC458M
EC-617
PICKUP MODELS
TEC436M
EC-618
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE GI
INSPECTION START
MA
H
OK
CHECK FOR AIR IN FUEL FILTER. INSPECTION END
E
1. Move priming pump up and down to purge EM
air from fuel filter.
2. Perform “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE
CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. LC
NG
SEC784D
H
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. Check the following.
E
2. Disconnect injection timing control valve har- M21 , E127
ness connector. I Harness connectors FE
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. E144 , E234
4. Check harness continuity between terminal (Wagon and Hardtop mod-
q2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. els)
Voltage: Battery voltage I Harness connectors CL
E142 , E250
OK (Pickup models)
I Harness for open or short
between injection timing con-
MT
trol valve and ECM relay
SEC795D I Harness for open or short
between injection timing con- AT
trol valve and ECM
TF
tors.
H
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
NG
E
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. M21 , E127
3. Check harness continuity between injection I Harness connectors FA
timing control valve terminal q
1 and ECM E144 , E234
terminals 104 . (Wagon and Hardtop mod-
Refer to Wiring Diagram. els)
SEC805D
Continuity should exist. I Harness connectors RA
If OK, check harness for short to ground and E142 , E250
short to power. (Pickup models)
I Harness for open or short BR
OK between injection timing con-
trol valve and ECM
short to ground or short to ST
tors.
H
NG
RS
CHECK COMPONENT Replace injection timing con-
E
(Injection timing control valve). trol valve.
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” on next
SEC806D
page.
BT
OK
H
Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in HA
the circuit. Then retest.
H Trouble is not fixed. EL

Check ECM pin terminals for damage and check
Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest.
SE
H
INSPECTION END
IDX
EC-619
Injection timing control valve
1. Reconnect injection timing control valve harness connector.
2. Disconnect electronic fuel injection pump harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminals q 1 and q2 .
Resistance: Approximately 11Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
If NG, replace injection timing control valve.
SEC807D
SEC808D
EC-620
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR “ECM 2” (DTC 0301) TD42Ti
Engine Control Module (ECM) GI

input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the engine. MA
EM
LC
SEC220B
Diagnostic
Check Item
No.
(Possible Cause) FE
0301 I ECM calculation function is malfunctioning. I ECM
CL
MT

PROCEDURE AT
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. TF
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. PD
then turn “ON”. FA
SEF817Y 4) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-621
Engine Control Module (ECM) (Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
H
2) Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS”
3) Touch “ERASE”.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
2) Erase the Diagnostic Test Mode
II (Self-diagnostic results)
memory.
H
PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS.
Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS”
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
PERFORM “Diagnostic Test Mode
II” (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS).
H
Is the DTC 0301 displayed again? Yes Replace ECM.
E
No
H
INSPECTION END
EC-622
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR “NEEDLE LIFT SEN” (DTC 0304) TD42Ti
Needle Lift Sensor (NLS) GI

The needle lift sensor is built into the No. 1 injection nozzle. Its
piezoelectric element senses changes in fuel injection timing MA
caused by fuel temperature, etc. This change of fuel injection tim-
ing is sent as a pulse signal to the ECM.
EM
LC
SEF604S

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal FE
CAUTION: CL
TER- DATA MT
WIRE
COLOR
NO. Signal)
AT
Approximately 0V★
TF
Idle speed PD
SEC813D FA
34 W Needle lift sensor
Approximately 0V★
RA

BR
ST
SEC814D
★: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) RS
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC BT

Diagnostic
Check Items
(Possible Cause)
HA
No.
0304 I An improper signal from the sensor is sent to ECM. I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
EL
I Needle lift sensor
I Air in fuel line
I Clogging No. 1 injection nozzle
SE
IDX
EC-623
Needle Lift Sensor (NLS) (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE
2) Start engine and run it for at least 10 seconds at idle
speed.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
speed.
SEF817Y then turn “ON”.
EC-624
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC379M
EC-625
PICKUP MODELS
TEC439M
EC-626
INSPECTION START
MA
H
CHECK FOR AIR IN FUEL FILTER. OK
E
INSPECTION END EM
1. Move priming pump up and down to
purge air from fuel filter.
2. Perform “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
LC
SEC784D NG
H
Loosen and retighten engine ground
screws.
H
FE
E
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. I Harness connectors CL
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and M21 , E127
needle lift sensor harness connector. I Harness connectors
3. Check harness continuity between E144 , E234
needle lift sensor terminal q
1 and ECM (Wagon and Hardtop
MT
terminal q34 . models)
SEC798D Refer to Wiring Diagram. I Harness connectors
Continuity should exist. E142 , E250 AT
If OK, check harness for short to ground (Pickup models)
and short to power. I Harness for open or
OK
short between needle lift TF
sensor and ECM
short to ground or short to PD
nectors.
H FA
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit or short
E
Check resistance between needle lift sen- to power in harness or
SEC779D sor terminal q
2 and engine ground. connectors. RA
If OK, check harness for short to power. BR
H
OK
q
A
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-627
q
A
H
E
Wagon and hardtop models I Harness connectors
1. Disconnect harness connectors M21 , E144 , E234
E127 . (Wagon and Hardtop
2. Check harness continuity between E127 models)
terminal 31K and engine ground. Refer I Harness connectors
to Wiring Diagram. M21 , E127
Continuity should exist. (Pickup models)
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- I Harness connectors
Pickup models E142 , E250
Check harness continuity between needle (Pickup models)
lift sensor terminal q 2 and engine ground. I Harness connectors
Refer to Wiring Diagram. E69 , E202
If OK, check harness for short to power. I Harness for open or
short between harness
OK
connector E127 and
engine ground
(Wagon and Hardtop
models)
short between needle lift
sensor and engine
ground
(Pickup models)
or connectors.
H
CHECK NO. 1 INJECTION NOZZLE FOR NG Replace No. 1 injection
E
CLOGGING. nozzle.
Refer to “SPRAY PATTERN TEST”, “Test
and Adjustment”, “INJECTION NOZZLE”,
EC-567.
OK
H

H
and retest.
H
INSPECTION END
EC-628
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR “INTAIR TEMP SEN”
(DTC 0401) TD42Ti
Intake Air Temperature Sensor GI

The intake air temperature sensor is mounted to the air duct hous-
ing. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a sig- MA
nal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive
to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor EM
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
LC
SEC780D
<Reference data>
Intake air temperature Voltage Resistance
°C (°F) (V) (kΩ) FE
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 CL
50 (122) 2.3 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 1.0 0.236 - 0.260
MT
SEF012P
36 (Intake air temperature sensor) and ground.
AT
CAUTION:
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s TF
ground.
PD
is measured by CONSULT-II. FA
CAUTION:
damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use ground other than the ECM terminals, such as the ground. RA
TER- DATA
WIRE
MINAL
COLOR
ITEM CONDITION (DC Voltage and Pulse BR
NO. Signal)
36 LG
Engine is running. Output voltage varies with
ST
sensor
charge air temperature.
Engine coolant tempera- Engine is running. (Warm-up condition) RS

50*1 B Approximately 0V
ture sensor ground Idle speed
*1: Pickup models BT

HA
Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when ...
(Possible Cause)
No. EL
0401 I An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor is I Harness or connectors
sent to ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Intake air temperature sensor
SE
IDX
EC-629
(DTC 0401) TD42Ti
Intake Air Temperature Sensor (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
then turn “ON”.
EC-630
(DTC 0401) TD42Ti
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC460M
EC-631
(DTC 0401) TD42Ti
PICKUP MODELS
TEC438M
EC-632
(DTC 0401) TD42Ti
INSPECTION START
MA
H
NG EM
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. E
2. Disconnect intake air temperature sen- M21 , E127
sor harness connector. I Harness for open or LC
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. short between intake air
SEC780D 4. Check voltage between terminal q 1 temperature sensor and
(Wagon and Hardtop models) or q 2 ECM
(Pickup models) and ground with CON- If NG, repair open circuit or
SULT-II or tester. short to ground or short to
Voltage: power in harness or con-
Approximately 5V nectors.
FE
OK
H CL
NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. E
2. Check harness continuity between M21 , E127
MT
intake air temperature sensor terminal (Pickup models)
q1 and engine ground. I Harness for open or
SEC826D Refer to Wiring Diagram. short between intake air
Continuity should exist. temperature sensor and AT
If OK, check harness for short to ECM (Pickup models)
ground and short to power. If NG, repair open circuit or
short to ground or short to TF
OK power in harness or con-
nectors.
PD
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
Replace intake air tem-
(Intake air temperature sensor). perature sensor. FA
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION”
on next page.
SEC827D
RA
OK
H
Disconnect and reconnect harness con- BR
Trouble is not fixed. ST

H
check the connection of ECM harness RS
nector and retest.
BT
H
INSPECTION END HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-633
(DTC 0401) TD42Ti
Intake air temperature sensor
Check resistance as shown in the figure.

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.0
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
SEF152P
If NG, replace intake air temperature sensor.
SEF012P
EC-634
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR “ACCEL POS SENSOR”
(DTC 0403) TD42Ti
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor GI

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accel- MA
erator position and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM uses the
signal to determine the amount of fuel to be injected.
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
SEC828D
TF
CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values. PD
I Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: released Approx. 0.52V FA

ACCEL POS SEN
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: depressed Approx. 4.09V
ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE RA

is measured by CONSULT-II. BR
CAUTION:
damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use ground other than the ECM terminals, such as the ground. ST
TER- DATA
WIRE
COLOR RS
NO. Signal)
Approximately 0.52V BT
Engine stopped
23 W
sensor Ignition switch “ON” HA
Engine stopped Approximately 4.09V
Accelerator pedal fully depressed EL
Y*1 Accelerator pedal position
48 Ignition switch “ON” Approximately 5V
G/R*2 sensor power supply
SE
Accelerator position sen- Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)
51 L/W Approximately 0V
sor ground Idle speed
IDX
EC-635
(DTC 0403) TD42Ti
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (Cont’d)
Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Malfunction is detected when ...
(Possible Cause)
Code No.
0403 I An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor is I Harness or connectors
detected by the ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Accelerator pedal position sensor

PROCEDURE
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
then turn “ON”.
EC-636
(DTC 0403) TD42Ti
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC456M
EC-637
(DTC 0403) TD42Ti
PICKUP MODELS
TEC440M
EC-638
(DTC 0403) TD42Ti
INSPECTION START
MA
H
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. NG
E
Check the following. EM
2. Disconnect accelerator pedal position E70 , E201
sensor harness connector. I Harness connectors LC
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. M21 , E127
SEC790D
4. Check voltage between terminal q1 and I Harness for open or
ground with CONSULT-II or tester. short between ECM and
Voltage: Approximately 5V accelerator pedal posi-
tion sensor
OK
If NG, repair open circuit or FE
nectors. CL
H
NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT.
E
Check the following. MT
PBIB0783E
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground M21 , E127
screw. I Harness connectors AT
3. Check harness continuity between E70 , E201
accelerator pedal position sensor termi- (Wagon and Hardtop
nal q
3 and engine ground. models) TF
Refer to Wiring Diagram. I Harness connectors
Continuity should exist. E68 , E222
If OK, check harness for short to (Pickup models) PD
ground and short to power. I Harness for open or
OK
accelerator pedal posi- FA
tion sensor
SEC798D
short to ground or short to RA
nectors.
BR
H
E
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. I Harness connectors ST
2. Check harness continuity between ECM M21 , E127
terminal q
23 and accelerator pedal posi- I Harness connectors
tion sensor terminal q
2 . E144 , E234 RS
Refer to Wiring Diagram. (Wagon and Hardtop
Continuity should exist. models)
If OK, check harness for short to I Harness connectors BT
ground and short to power. E69 , E202
(Pickup models)
OK
I Harness for open or HA
accelerator pedal posi-
tion sensor EL
power in harness or con- SE
nectors.
H
q
A
IDX
EC-639
(DTC 0403) TD42Ti
q
A
H
E
Wagon and Hardtop models I Harness connectors
1. Disconnect harness connectors M21 , E144 , E234
2. Check harness continuity between models)
harness connector E127 terminal 76K I Harness connectors
and engine ground. M21 , E127
Refer to Wiring Diagram. (Pickup models)
Continuity should exist. I Harness for open or
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- short between harness
Pickup models connector E127 and
1. Disconnect harness connectors E69 , engine ground
2. Check harness continuity between models)
harness connector E69 terminal q 5 I Harness for open or
and q 2 , E202 terminal q 2 and engine short between harness
ground. connector E69 terminal
Refer to Wiring Diagram. q5 and q 2
If OK, check harness for short to power. I Harness for open or
short between harness
OK connector E202 and
engine ground
(Pickup models)
or connectors.
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace accelerator pedal
E
(Accelerator pedal position sensor). assembly.
EC-640.
OK
H

H
nector and retest.
H
INSPECTION END
Accelerator pedal position sensor
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position sensor harness connec-
tor.
2. Make sure that resistance between terminals q 2 and q 3
changes when depressing accelerator pedal manually.
Accelerator pedal conditions Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]
Completely released Approximately 0.5 kΩ
Partially depressed 0.5 - 4 kΩ
SEC812D Completely depressed Approximately 4 kΩ
If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly.

EC-640
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR “CRANK POS SEN (TDC)”
(DTC 0407) TD42Ti
Crankshaft Position Sensor (TDC) GI

The crankshaft position sensor (TDC) monitors engine speed by
means of signals from the sensing plate (with six protrusions) MA
installed to the camshaft gear. The datum signal output is detected
at ATDC 70° and sent to the ECM. The sensor signal is used for
fuel injection timing control. EM
LC
SEF231Z

Remarks: Specification data are reference values. FE
I Tachometer: Connect CL
Almost the same speed as the
CKPS⋅RPM (TDC) I Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer
tachometer indication.
indication.
MT
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal AT
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring the input/output voltage. Doing so may result in TF
TER- DATA
MINAL
WIRE
ITEM CONDITION (DC Voltage and Pulse
PD
COLOR
NO. Signal)
Approximately 0V★ FA

RA
Idle speed
BR
SEC815D
44 L
Crankshaft position sensor ST
(TDC) Approximately 0V★
RS
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. BT
SEC816D
HA
Crankshaft position sensor Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

47 B/W Approximately 0V EL
(TDC) ground Idle speed
★: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) SE
IDX
EC-641
(DTC 0407) TD42Ti
Crankshaft Position Sensor (TDC) (Cont’d)
Diagnostic
Check Items
(Possible Cause)
No.
0407 I An improper signal from the sensor is detected by I Harness or connectors
ECM during engine running and cranking. (The sensor circuit is open.)
I Crankshaft position sensor (TDC)

PROCEDURE
tery voltage is more than 10V.
2) Crank engine for at least 1 second.
speed.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SEF817Y 1) Crank engine for at least 1 second.
speed.
then turn “ON”.
EC-642
(DTC 0407) TD42Ti
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC462M
EC-643
(DTC 0407) TD42Ti
PICKUP MODELS
TEC441M
EC-644
(DTC 0407) TD42Ti
INSPECTION START
MA
H
NG
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. Check the following.
E
2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (TDC) E68 , E222
EM
harness connector and ECM harness con- I Harness connectors
nector. M21 , E127
3. Check harness continuity between ECM ter- I Harness for open or short LC
minals q44 and crankshaft position sensor between ECM and crank-
SEC781D (TDC) terminal q 1 . shaft position sensor (TDC)
Refer to Wiring Diagram. If NG, repair open circuit or
Continuity should exist. short to ground or short to
If OK, check harness for short to ground and power in harness or connec-
short to power. tors.
OK
FE
H
NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. Check the following.
E
Check harness continuity between crankshaft I Harness connectors CL
position sensor (TDC) terminal q2 and engine E68 , E222
ground. I Harness connectors
Refer to Wiring Diagram. M21 , E127
Continuity should exist. I Harness for open or short MT
If OK, check harness for short to ground and between crankshaft position
short to power. sensor (TDC) and ECM
SEC798D If NG, repair open circuit or
OK short to ground or short to
AT
tors.
H TF
NG
CHECK SHIELD CIRCUIT. Check the following.
E
1. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. I Harness connectors
Wagon and Hardtop models E68 , E222 PD
2. Reconnect crankshaft position sensor har- I Harness connectors
ness connector. M21 , E127 (Pickup mod-
3. Disconnect harness connectors E127 , M21 . els)
4. Check harness continuity between E127 ter- I Harness connectors FA
minal 33K and engine ground. E69 , E202
Refer to Wiring Diagram. (Pickup models)
-------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------- between crankshaft position
RA
Pickup models sensor (TDC) and engine
2. Check harness continuity between crankshaft ground
position sensor (TDC) terminal q 3 and If NG, repair open circuit or BR
engine ground. short to power in harness or
Refer to Wiring Diagram. connectors.
If OK, check harness for short to power. ST
OK
H
NG
RS
CHECK COMPONENT Replace crankshaft position
E
[Crankshaft position sensor (TDC)]. sensor (TDC).
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” on next
page. BT
OK
H
Disconnect and reconnect harness connectors in HA
the circuit. Then retest.
H
EL
Check ECM pin terminals for damage and check
Reconnect ECM harness connector and retest.
SE
H
INSPECTION END
IDX
EC-645
(DTC 0407) TD42Ti
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC)
1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (TDC) harness connec-
tor.
2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
PBIB0483E
5. Check resistance between terminals q 1 and q2 .

Resistance: Approximately 1,287 - 1,573Ω
[at 20°C (68°F)]
If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor (TDC).
SEC831D
EC-646

EM
LC
SEC220B
Diagnostic
Check Item
No.
(Possible Cause) FE
0802 I An excessively high or low voltage from the absolute I ECM
pressure sensor (built into ECM) is sent to ECM. CL
MT
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION AT

PROCEDURE
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. TF
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- PD
3) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 5 seconds and FA
then turn “ON”.
results)” with ECM. RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-647
INSPECTION START
H
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
memory.
H
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
RESULTS).
H
E
No
H
INSPECTION END
EC-648

EM
LC
SEC220B
Diagnostic
Check Item
No.
(Possible Cause) FE
0804 I ECM input signal processing function is malfunction- I ECM
ing. CL
MT
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION AT

PROCEDURE
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. TF
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- PD
3) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 5 seconds and FA
then turn “ON”.
results)” with ECM. RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-649
INSPECTION START
H
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
memory.
H
mode with CONSULT.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
RESULTS).
H
E
No
H
INSPECTION END
EC-650
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS TD42Ti
Glow Control System GI

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed MA
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) Glow relay Glow plugs
E E E
ECM
E E
Glow lamp EM
When engine coolant temperature is more than 60°C (140°F), the glow relay turns off, inactivating the quick-
glow control until coolant temperature drops below 60°C (140°F). LC
When coolant temperature is lower than 60°C (140°F):
I Ignition switch ON
After ignition switch has turned to ON, the glow relay turns ON for a certain period of time in relation to
engine coolant temperature, allowing current to flow through glow plug.
I Cranking
The glow relay turns ON, allowing current to flow through glow plug.
FE
I Starting
After engine has started, current continues to flow through glow plug (after-glow mode) for a certain period
in relation to engine coolant temperature.
CL
The glow lamp turns ON for a certain period of time in relation to engine coolant temperature at the time glow
relay is turned ON. MT
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION AT
Glow plug
The glow plug is provided with a metallic heating element to obtain TF
a high-temperature resistance. It glows in response to a signal sent
from the ECM, allowing current to flow through the glow plug via the
glow relay. PD
FA
SEF857SA
RA
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal BR
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring the input/output voltage. Doing so may result in ST
TER-
WIRE
DATA RS
COLOR
NO. Signal)

BT
0 - 1.5V
Glow lamp is “ON”.
16 L/W Glow lamp HA
Glow lamp is “OFF”. (11 - 14V)
EL
G/W*1
111 Glow relay Refer to “SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”.
LG/B*2

SE
*2: Pickup models
IDX
EC-651
Glow Control System (Cont’d)
TEC382M
EC-652
PICKUP MODELS GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC442M
EC-653
INSPECTION START
H
Check fuel level, fuel supplying system, NG Correct.
E
starter motor, etc.
OK
H
NG
Check that all glow plug connecting plate E
Install properly.
SEL681KA
nuts are installed properly.
OK
H
NG
CHECK GROW INDICATOR LAMP E
CHECK POWER SUPPLY
OPERATION. CIRCUIT-I.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and measure the 1. Turn ignition switch
time the grow lamp lit. “OFF”.
Time the grow lamp should stay lit: 2. Disconnect combination
Approx. 2 - 6 seconds meter harness connec-
(The time will vary according to coolant tor M143 (Wagon and
temperature.) Hardtop models) or
M32 (Pickup models).
DEF031
OK 3. Turn ignition switch
“ON”.
4. Check voltage between
combination meter ter-
minal q46 (Wagon and
Hardtop models) or q9
(Pickup models) and
ground with CONSULT-II
or tester.
Voltage: Battery volt-
age
I Fuse block (J/B) M3
SEC925D I 10A fuse
fuse
nectors.
H
OK
q
B
H
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION. OK CHECK COMPONENT
SEC926D E
Check entire glow control system. (Refer (Glow plug).
to “SYSTEM OPERATION CHECK”, See page EC-657.
EC-656.)
H
NG
q
A
EC-654
q
A GI
H MA
CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II. NG Check the following.
E
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. I 100A fusible link
2. Disconnect glow relay. I Harness for open or EM
3. Check voltage between glow relay ter- short between glow
minals q2 ,q 3 and ground with CON- relay and battery
SULT-II or tester. If NG, repair open circuit or
Voltage: Battery voltage short to ground or short to
LC
PBIB0343E OK nectors.
H
NG
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I. E
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. I Harness connectors FE
terminal 111 and grow relay-1 terminal I Harness for open or
q1 . short between glow
Refer to Wiring Diagram. relay and ECM
CL
Continuity should exist. If NG, repair open circuit or
ground and short to power. power in harness or con- MT
nectors.
OK
H
NG AT
CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY E
BETWEEN GLOW RELAY AND GLOW I Harness connectors
PLUG. E67 , E223
1. Disconnect glow plug harness connec- I Harness connectors
TF
tor. E225 , E241
2. Check harness continuity between glow I Harness for open or
relay-1 terminal q
5 and glow plug har- short between glow PD
ness connector. relay and glow plug
Refer to Wiring Diagram. If NG, repair open circuit or
Continuity should exist. short to ground or short to FA
If OK, check harness for short to power in harness or con-
ground and short to power. nectors.
OK
RA
H
CHECK COMPONENTS NG Replace malfunctioning
E
(Glow relay, Glow plug). component(s). BR
EC-657.
ST
OK
H
tors in the circuit. Then retest. RS
H
BT
and retest. HA
H
INSPECTION END EL
SE
IDX
EC-655
q
B
H
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II. NG Repair open circuit or short
E
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. to ground or short to power
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. in harness or connectors.
3. Disconnect combination meter harness
connector M141 (Wagon and Hardtop
models) M34 (Pickup models).
terminal q16 and combination meter ter-
minal q2 (Wagon and Hardtop models)
or q
30 (Pickup models). Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
and short to power.
OK
H
CHECK COMBIATION METER. NG Repair or replace combina-
E
Check combination meter and grow indi- tion meter or glow indicator
cator lamp. Refer to EL section. lamp.
OK
H

H
nector and retest.
H
INSPECTION END
SYSTEM OPERATION CHECK

Set voltmeter between glow plug and engine body.
SEC829D
EC-656
1. Pre-glow system GI
a. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
b. Read voltage.
Voltage: MA
Battery voltage should appear for 4 to 8 seconds.*
*(Varies with engine coolant temperature)
EM
LC
SEC927D
2. After-glow system
Start engine and read voltage.
Voltage:
Battery voltage for 3* minutes FE
* Engine coolant temperature is lower than 60°C
(140°F).
CL
MT
SEC810D
AT
Glow relay TF
Check continuity between glow relay terminals 3 and 5 under the
PD
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and
2
Yes FA
PBIB0428E
RA
Glow plug
1. Remove glow plug connecting plate. BR
2. Check each glow plug for continuity.
Continuity should exist:
Approximately 0.85Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] ST
I If NG, replace glow plug.
3. Install glow plug connecting plate securely.
I Do not bump glow plug heating element. If it is bumped, RS
replace glow plug with new one. (If glow plug is dropped
from a height of 10 cm (3.94 in), replace with new one.)
SEC809D I If glow plug installation hole is contaminated with carbon, BT
remove using a reamer or suitable tool.
I Hand-tighten glow plug by turning it two to three times,
then tighten using a tool to specified torque. HA
: 15 - 20 N⋅m (1.5 - 2.0 kg-m, 11 - 14 ft-lb)
EL
SE
IDX
EC-657
Cooling Fan
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
E
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Cooling fan

E ECM E
relay
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner “ON” signal

E
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, air condi-
tioner system pressure and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 2-step control [ON/OFF].
Operation
SEC811D

I Engine: After warming up, idle
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
I When cooling fan is stopped. OFF
COOLING FAN
I When cooling fan operates. ON

CAUTION:
TER- DATA
WIRE
COLOR
NO. Signal)

14 L Cooling fan relay
Engine is running.
0 - 1V
Cooling fan is operating.
EC-658
Cooling Fan (Cont’d)
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC459M
EC-659
PICKUP MODELS
TEC437M
EC-660
INSPECTION START
MA
H
CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION. OK INSPECTION END
E EM
“ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON- LC
SULT-II and make sure that cool-
SEF646X ing fan operates when touching
“ON”.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Disconnect engine coolant tem-
perature sensor harness connec- FE
tor.
3. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine
coolant temperature sensor har-
ness connector. CL
4. Start engine and make sure that
cooling fan operates.
MT
NG
H
SEF979S NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY.
E
Check the following. AT
2. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1. I 30A fusible link (Pickup
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. models)
1 , I 40A fusible link (Wagon
TF
q3 ,q6 (Wagon and Hardtop models) or and Hardtop models)
q1 ,q3 (Pickup models) and ground with I Fuse block (J/B) E112
CONSULT-II or tester. I Harness for open or short PD
Voltage: Battery voltage between cooling fan
relay-1 and fuse
OK FA
I Harness for open or short
between cooling fan
relay-1 and battery
SEC785D If NG, repair open circuit or RA
nectors. BR
H
CHECK MOTOR CIRCUIT. NG Repair open circuit or short
E
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. to ground or short to power ST
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness in harness or connectors.
connector.
3. Check harness continuity between relay
terminal q5 ,q7 (Wagon and Hardtop
RS
models) or q 5 (Pickup models) and
motor terminals q 1 ,q3 .
SEC833D Refer to Wiring Diagram. BT
and short to power. HA
4. Check harness continuity between motor
terminals q2 ,q4 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. EL
and short to power.
SE
H OK
q
A
SEC834D
IDX
EC-661
q
A
H
E
terminal q14 and cooling fan relay-1 ter- I Harness for open or short
minal q2 . between cooling fan
Refer to Wiring Diagram. relay-1 and ECM
If OK, check harness for short to ground short to ground or short to
SEF691V
and short to power. power in harness or con-
nectors.
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace cooling fan relay.
E
(Cooling fan relay-1).
EC-663.
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace cooling fan motor.
E
EC-663.
OK
H

H
and retest.
H
INSPECTION END
EC-662
COMPONENT INSPECTION GI
Cooling fan relay-1
Wagon and Hardtop models MA
1. Apply 12V direct current between relay terminals q
1 and q2 .
2. Check continuity between relay terminals q3 and q 5 , q
6 and
q
7 . EM
LC
Yes
PBIB0077E terminals q
1 and q 2
3. If NG, replace relay.

FE
CL
MT
AT
Pickup models
1 and q
1. Apply 12V direct current between relay terminals q 2 .
2. Check continuity between relay terminals q3 and q5 . TF
PD
Yes
terminals q
1 and q 2
No current supply No FA
3. If NG, replace relay.
PBIB0098E
RA
Cooling fan motor-1
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector. BR
check operation.
ST
Terminals
(!) (@)
RS
Cooling fan motor q
1 ,q
3 q
2 ,q
4
SEF763V Cooling fan motor should operate. BT

HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-663
EGRC-Solenoid Valve and Throttle Control

Solenoid Valve A, B
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed
Camshaft position sensor (TDC) EGRC-solenoid valve
E E
Accelerator position
Accelerator pedal position sensor
E
ECM E Throttle control solenoid valve A

E
Start signal
Ignition switch Throttle control solenoid valve B
E E
The ECM receives signals sent from the engine coolant tempera-
ture sensor, crankshaft position sensor (TDC), ignition switch and
accelerator pedal position sensor to determine engine speed and
operating conditions. Based on these signals, the ECM controls
EGR control solenoid valve operation and throttle control solenoid
valve (A and B) operation.
Engine coolant Throttle control solenoid valve

EGRC-solenoid Throttle control Amount of EGR
temperature Load EGR valve
valve A B valve gas
°C (°F)
OFF OFF OFF
Below 60 (140) Any Fully closed Fully open —
(Closed) (Open) (Open)
OFF OFF OFF
Low load Fully closed Fully open —
ON ON ON
Medium load-1 Fully open Closed Large
(Open) (Closed) (Closed)
Above 60 (140)
ON OFF OFF
Medium load-2 Fully open Fully open Small
(Open) (Open) (Open)
OFF OFF OFF
High load Fully closed Fully open —
The EGRC-solenoid valve and throttle control solenoid valve B
control vacuum pressure acting on the EGR valve. The EGR con-
trol valve will then be fully opened or fully closed, as required.
The throttle control solenoid valve controls vacuum pressure acting
on the throttle chamber. Thus, intake air passages are opened or
closed in relation to exhaust gas and intake air. Utilizing the rela-
tionship between exhaust gas pressure and intake air pressure
control, the amount of EGR (exhaust gas recirculated) is regulated
in two stages — large, small.
SEF784V
EC-664
Solenoid Valve A, B (Cont’d) GI
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values. MA
EGRC SOL/V A I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine. OFF EM
THROT RLY A I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine. OFF
THROT RLY B I Engine: After warming up, idle the engine. OFF
LC

CAUTION: FE
CL
TER- DATA
WIRE
COLOR
NO. Signal) MT
P*1 Throttle control solenoid Engine is running. (Warm-up condition) BATTERY VOLTAGE
54
Y/G*2 valve A Idle speed (11 - 14V) AT
P/B*1 Throttle control solenoid Engine is running. (Warm-up condition) BATTERY VOLTAGE
60 TF
Y/L*2 valve B Idle speed (11 - 14V)
BR/Y*1 Engine is running. (Warm-up condition) BATTERY VOLTAGE

103
L/Y*2
EGRC-solenoid valve
(11 - 14V) PD
Idle speed

*2: Pickup models FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-665
Solenoid Valve A, B (Cont’d)
TEC461M
EC-666
PICKUP MODELS
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC447M
EC-667
INSPECTION START
H
CHECK CONTROL FUNCTION. OK CHECK VACUUM HOSE.
E
1. Stop engine. Check vacuum hose for
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. clogging, cracks or
SEC832D 3. Turn EGRC-solenoid valve and improper connection.
throttle control solenoid valve A,
B “ON” and “OFF” in “ACTIVE
TEST” mode with CONSULT-II
and check operating sound.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Disconnect ECM harness con-
nector.
3. Connect a suitable wire between
ECM terminal q 54 and ground.
SEC922D 5. Make sure that throttle control
solenoid valve A operating
sound is heard when discon-
necting or reconnecting the suit-
able wire.
7. Connect a suitable wire between
ECM terminal q 60 and ground.
9. Make sure that throttle control
solenoid valve B operating
sound is heard when discon-
necting or reconnecting the suit-
SEF816F
able wire.
11. Connect a suitable wire
between ECM terminal 103
and ground.
13. Make sure that EGRC-solenoid
valve operating sound is heard
when disconnecting or recon-
necting the suitable wire.
NG
H
q
B
EC-668
q
B
H
MA
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. E Check the following.
2. Disconnect EGRC-solenoid valve and M21 , E127 EM
throttle control solenoid valve A, B har- I 10A fuse
ness connector. I Fuse block (J/B) M2
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. I Harness for open or LC
4. Check voltage between terminal q 1 short between EGRC-
(Wagon and Hardtop models) or q 2 solenoid valve and fuse
SEC789D
(Pickup models) and ground with CON- I Harness for open or
SULT-II or tester. short between throttle
Voltage: Battery voltage control solenoid valve A,
B and fuse
OK If NG, repair open circuit or
FE
nectors.
H
CL
NG
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. E Check the following.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. E127 , M21 MT
Wagon and Hardtop models I Harness for open or
SEC836D
3. Check harness continuity between short between EGRC-
ECM terminal q 54 and throttle control solenoid valve and ECM AT
solenoid valve A terminal q 2 , I Harness for open or
ECM terminal q 60 and throttle control short between throttle
solenoid valve B terminal q 2 , control solenoid valve A,
ECM terminal 103 and EGRC-solenoid B and ECM TF
valve terminal q 2 . If NG, repair open circuit or
Refer to Wiring Diagram. short to ground or short to
Continuity should exist. power in harness or con- PD
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- nectors.
Pickup models
ECM terminal q 54 and throttle control FA
solenoid valve A terminal q 1 ,
ECM terminal q 60 and throttle control
solenoid valve B terminal q 1 ,
ECM terminal 103 and EGRC-solenoid RA
valve terminal q 1 .
Continuity should exist. BR
OK ST
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENTS E Replace malfunctioning
(EGRC-solenoid valve and throttle control component(s). RS
solenoid valve A, B).
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” on
next page.
BT
OK
H
tors in the circuit. Then retest. HA
H
Check ECM pin terminals for damage or EL
retest.
SE
H
INSPECTION END
IDX
EC-669
EGR valve
Apply vacuum to EGR vacuum port with a hand vacuum pump.
EGR valve spring should lift.
If NG, replace EGR valve.
MEF137D
Throttle control valve

1. Install a handy vacuum pump to throttle control valve.
2. Make sure that the throttle control valve rod moves smoothly
when applying a vacuum of −53.3 kPa (−533 mbar, −400
mmHg, −7.73 psi) and releasing it.
3. If NG, replace throttle control valve.
SEC835D
EGRC-solenoid valve and throttle control solenoid

valve A, B
Check air passage continuity.
Air passage Air passage

Condition continuity continuity
between qA and q
B between qA and q
C
12V direct current supply

between terminals q 1 Yes No
and q
2
MEC488B
No supply No Yes
If NG, replace solenoid valve(s).
EC-670
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) GI

The vehicle speed sensor is installed in the transaxle. It contains a
pulse generator which provides a vehicle speed signal to the
speedometer. The speedometer then sends a signal to the ECM. MA
EM
LC
AEC110

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal FE
CAUTION: CL
TER- DATA MT
WIRE
COLOR
NO. Signal)
AT
0 - 5V
TF
Engine is running.
26 L/OR Vehicle speed sensor Lift up the vehicle.

In 1st gear position PD
Vehicle speed is 30 km/h (19 MPH).
PBIB0386E FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-671
TEC457M
EC-672
PICKUP MODELS GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC435M
EC-673
INSPECTION START
H
E
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. I Joint connector M79
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector (Wagon and Hardtop
and combination meter harness con- models)
nector. I Harness for open or
terminal q26 and meter terminal q
26 combination meter
(Pickup models) or q 65 (Wagon and If NG, repair open circuit or
Hardtop models). short to ground or short to
Refer to Wiring Diagram. power in harness or con-
Continuity should exist. nectors.
OK
H
CHECK SPEEDOMETER FUNCTION. NG Check the following.
E
Make sure that speedometer functions I Harness connectors
properly. M21 , E127
OK
E70 , E201
short between combina-
tion meter and vehicle
speed sensor
nectors.
Check vehicle speed sen-
sor and its circuit.
H

H
nector and retest.
H
INSPECTION END
EC-674
Start Signal GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC445M
EC-675
Start Signal (Cont’d)
PICKUP MODELS
TEC445M
EC-676
Start Signal (Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
MA
H
E EM
2. Check “START SIGNAL” in
“DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II. LC
PBIB0433E IGN “ON” OFF
IGN “START” ON
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Turn ignition switch to “START”. FE
terminal q 20 and ground.
Voltage: CL
Ignition switch “START”
Battery voltage
Except above MT
Approximately 0V
SEF109P NG
H AT
E
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. I 7.5A fuse
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and I Fuse block M3 , E112
ignition switch harness connector. I Harness for open or short
TF
3. Check harness continuity between ECM between ECM and igni-
terminal q20 and ignition switch terminal tion switch
q6 . If NG, repair open circuit or PD
Refer to Wiring Diagram. short to ground or short to
Continuity should exist. power in harness or con-
If OK, check harness for short to ground nectors. FA
and short to power.
OK
H RA

BR
H
check the connection of ECM harness con- ST
and retest.
RS
H
INSPECTION END
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
EC-677
Park/Neutral Position Switch

TEC386M
EC-678
Park/Neutral Position Switch (Cont’d)
PICKUP MODELS GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC446M
EC-679
When the gear position is in neutral position switch is “ON”. The ECM detects the position because the con-
tinuity of the line (the “ON” signal) exists.

Shift lever: Neutral ON
P/N POSI SW I Ignition switch: ON
Except above OFF

CAUTION:
TER- DATA
WIRE
COLOR
NO. Signal)
Approximately 0V
Gear position is “Neutral”.
22 P/B Neutral position switch
INSPECTION START
H
E
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
SEF212Y
3. Check “P/N POSI SW” signal
under the following conditions.
Neutral position: ON
Except neutral position: OFF
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
terminal q 22 and ground under
the following conditions.
Voltage:
Neutral position
Approximately 0V
Except neutral position
SEF622S Battery voltage
NG
H
q
A
EC-680
q
A
GI
H
MA
E
2. Disconnect neutral position switch har- E201 , E70 (Wagon and
EM
ness connector. Hardtop models)
3. Check harness continuity between termi- I Harness for open or short
LC
nal q
2 and engine ground. between neutral position
Refer to Wiring Diagram. switch and engine ground
If OK, check harness for short to short to power in harness
power. or connectors.
OK FE
H
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG
E
Check the following. CL
2. Check harness continuity between ECM M21 , E127
terminal q
22 and neutral position switch I Harness connectors MT
terminal q
1 . E144 , E234 (Wagon and
Refer to Wiring Diagram. Hardtop models)
Continuity should exist. I Harness connectors AT
If OK, check harness for short to E70 , E201 (Pickup mod-
ground and short to power. els)
OK
I Harness for open or short TF
between ECM and neutral
position switch
If NG, repair open circuit or PD
nectors. FA
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace neutral position
E RA
(Neutral position switch). switch.
Refer to MT section.
OK BR
H
tors in the circuit. Then retest. ST
H
Check ECM pin terminals for damage and RS
and retest. BT
H
HA
INSPECTION END
EL
SE
IDX
EC-681
Fuel Cut System

WIRING DIAGRAM
Wagon and Hardtop models
TEC384M
EC-682
Fuel Cut System (Cont’d)
Pickup models GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC444M
EC-683
Fast Idle Control Circuit

WIRING DIAGRAM
Wagon and Hardtop models
TEC388M
EC-684
Fast Idle Control Circuit (Cont’d)
Pickup models GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC448M
EC-685
Fast Idle Control Circuit (Cont’d)
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS INSPECTION
IACV-FICD solenoid valve
1. Disconnect IACV-FICD solenoid valve harness connectors and
vacuum hoses.
2. Connect solenoid valve connector to battery and adequate
vacuum hoses to the solenoid valve as shown in the figure.
3. Blow air into hoses.
If air flows: OK
If air does not flow: NG
If NG, replace IACV-FICD solenoid valve.
SEC786D
Air conditioner related components

Refer to “Electrical Components Inspection”, “TROUBLE DIAG-
NOSES” in HA section.
DEC011
EC-686
MIL & Data Link Connectors GI

MA
EM
LC
FE
CL
MT
AT
TF
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SE
IDX
TEC389M
EC-687
MIL & Data Link Connectors (Cont’d)
PICKUP MODELS
TEC449M
EC-688
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) TD42Ti
General Specifications GI
Unit: rpm
Engine TD42Ti
MA
Idle speed 700+500
Maximum engine speed 4,600

EM
Injection Nozzle
LC
INJECTION NOZZLE ASSEMBLY
Unit: kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi)
New 9,800 - 10,300 (98.0 - 103.0, 100 - 105, 1,421 - 1,494)

Initial injection pressure
Limit 10,300 - 11,300 (103.0 - 113.0, 105 - 115, 1,494 - 1,639)
FE
ADJUSTING SHIMS
Thickness mm (in) Part No.
CL
0.1 (0.004) 16613-43G00
0.2 (0.008) 16613-43G01
0.3 (0.012) 16613-43G02
0.4 (0.016) 16613-43G03 MT
0.5 (0.020) 16613-43G04
0.52 (0.0205) 16613-43G05
0.54 (0.0213) 16613-43G06 AT
0.56 (0.0220) 16613-43G07
0.58 (0.0228) 16613-43G08
0.8 (0.031) 16613-43G09
TF
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
PD
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9

FA
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260

RA
Crankshaft Position Sensor (TDC)
BR
Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] Ω 1,287 - 1,573
ST
Glow Plug
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Ω 0.85 RS
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor BT

Throttle valve conditions Resistance between terminals 2 and 3 kΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]
Completely closed Approximately 0.5 HA

Partially open 0.5 - 4
Completely open Approximately 4 EL
Injection Timing Control Valve SE

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Ω Approximately 11
IDX
EC-689

Engine Control System: Modification Notice

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Engine Control System: Modification Notice

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GI

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

I Wiring diagrams have been modified.

When you read wiring diagrams:

Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit

Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS)

Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

Approximately 2.6 - 2.7V★

Engine is running. (Warm-up condition)

Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.

Trouble is not fixed.

Condition Terminals Voltage

If NG, replace distributor assembly with camshaft position sen-

Cooling Fan Control (Overheat) GI

Perform FINAL CHECK by the following procedure after repair HA

Trouble is not fixed.

Cooling fan relay-2

Cooling fan motor-2

SEF646V Cooling fan motor should operate.

Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) GI

Trouble is not fixed.

IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve

3. If no sound is heard from fuel cut solenoid valve, replace with

SEC202B If NG, replace relay. BT

Wiring Diagram — COOL/F —

If NG, replace cooling fan relay.

If NG, replace air conditioner relay.

DTC No. Index

Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System GI

I When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it

I Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.

I Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.

I When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure

Special Service Tools

KV10114400 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors

Commercial Service Tools

Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant tem-

Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads

Vacuum Hose Drawing GI

Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System

Open loop control BT

FUEL INJECTION TIMING

Two types of systems are used.

Sequential multiport fuel injection system

Simultaneous multiport fuel injection system

Electronic Ignition (EI) System GI

Air Conditioning Cut Control

Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine

Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check

3. Check ignition timing.

Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning GI

Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning FE

Idle Air Volume Learning

6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.

7. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen.

Fuel Pressure Check

FUEL PRESSURE CHECK

5. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.

Injector Removal and Installation

6. Expand and remove clips securing fuel injectors.

8. Install injector to fuel tube assembly.

12. Tighten fuel tube assembly mounting nuts in numerical

1 EC-72 2 EC-77 *3 EC-77